BT3000 PLUS
Technology Advanced Random Generation Analyzer System
SERVICE MANUAL
P/N: MS04444-05ING
Software Version 10.0
Rev. 2, October, 2006
This product conforms to the safety requirements of the Council
Directives 98/79/EEC of 27 October 1998 (European Parliament)
regarding the In-Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices. This directive is in
accordance with the Article 2, Paragraph 2 of the Directive 89/336/EEC,
which ceases to apply to the products complying with the present
directive. Refer to Paragraph 7, Article No.1 of the IEC Official Gazette
No. L331 of Dec. 1998.
It also conforms to Italian Regulations CEI EN 61010-01 and CEI EN
61326-1 (EMC).
The conformity is attested when the equipment is installed
in accordance with the conditions outlined in the manual
MANUAL REVISION RECORD
This record page is for recording revisions to your BT3000 PLUS manual that has been published
by Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. We recommend that only the management or facility
representative authorized to process changes and revisions to publications observe as follows:
Make the pen changes or insert the revised pages.
Ensure that obsolete pages are withdrawn and either disposed of immediately, or marked
as superseded and placed in a superseded document file.
Enter the information below reflecting that the revisions have been entered.
Rev. No.
Date
Ver.10.0
06/10/2006
Rev.2
Description
Approved By
The following sections have been revised: Index, Section A, Section 002,
Section 003, Section 005, Section 006, Section 010, Section 012, Section
013, Section 014, Section 015
Revisions are recorded separately and are available upon request.
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 15
Menchinelli
This Page is intentionally left blank
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 15
BT 3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
INSTRUMENTS RETURN AUTHORIZATION MOD.05-35a
POTENTIAL RISKS DURING OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
WARNINGS
USE OF THE BT3000 PLUS & BYPRODUCTS INTERNAL COMPUTER
RETURNING THE ANALYZER TO THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE SERVICE
ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES DISPOSAL
CONFORMANCE
THE COMPANY PROFILE
PACKING AND UNPACKING THE ANALYZER
SECTION I
INTRODUCTION - BT3000 PLUS SYSTEM
PARA.
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
TITLE
SECT.
EXAMPLES OF THE BASIC OPERATIONS OF CLIN. CHEM.....
PHASE 1: CREATION OF THE WORKLIST……………...........….
PHASE 2: PLACEMENT OF SAMPLES AND REAGENTS……...
PHASE 3: START-UP....................................................................
PHASE 4: PROCESS INITIATION................................................
PHASE 5: READING CYCLE………………...................................
EXAMPLE OF BASIC ELECTROLYTES OPERATION…….........
ISE SAMPLING.............................................................................
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PARA.
TITLE
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-4.1.
2-4.2.
2-4.3.
2-4.4.
PHYSICAL DIMENSION OF BT 3000 PLUS......................….......
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS.............................................
EMC AND ELECTRICAL SAFETY..............………………….........
PERFORMANCE & TECHNICAL SPECS.....................................
OPERATING AMBIENT CONDITIONS.........................................
VOLUMES.....................................................................................
ISE MODULE.................................................................................
"UTILITY" EXECUTION TIMES.....................................................
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
SECT.
Page 4 of 15
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
2-14.
TITLE
SECT.
FUNCTIONAL LIMITS...................................................................
CUVETTE TEMPERATURECONTROL........................................
REAGENTS REFRIGERATION.......…………………….................
DILUTER LINEARITY AND ACCURACY........…………………....
PHOTOMETER LINEARITY AND ACCURACY............................
PHOTOMETER TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP……..…..............
DATA MANAGEMENT……….......................................................
FLUID DYNAMICS............………………......................................
WASHING SOLUTION SUPPLY...................................................
LIQUID SENSOR...........................................................................
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
SECTION III
ELECTRONICS
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-3.1.
3-3.2.
3-3.3.
3-3.4.
3-3.5.
3-3.6.
3-3.7.
3-4.
3-5.
TOP VIEW OF THE BT 3000 PLUS..............................................
ANALYZER STRUCTURE…………………....................................
DESCRIPTION OF ANALYZER MODULES................................
COMPUTER MODULE..................................................................
READING STATION......................................................................
POWER SUPPLY MODULE..........................................................
REAGENTS SYSTEM...................................................................
SAMPLING MODULE....................................................................
ISE MODULE.................................................................................
DUAL SAMPLING ARMS MODULE .............................................
SYSTEM ELECTRONICS….……..................................................
EXAMPLE OF THE I2C-BUS CONFIGURAZIONE.......................
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
SECTION IV
SOFTWARE
PARA.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-4.1.
4-5.
4-6.
TITLE
GENERAL......................................................................................
PATIENT TRANSMISSION...........................................................
RESULTS RECEPTION................................................................
CALCULATION OF CHECK-SUM.................................................
ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THE SERIAL PROTOCOL..................
WIRING DIAGRAM OF INTERFACE CABLE................................
VARIABLE SERIAL PROTOCOL...................................................
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 15
SECT.
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
TITLE
SERIAL COMMUNICATION TEST PROGRAMS..........................
PROGRAM COMUNICA.EXE........................................................
PROGRAM BTPLUS.EXE.............................................................
SECT.
IV
IV
IV
SECTION V
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENTOF VARIOUS PARTS
PARA.
5-1.
5-2.
5-2.1.
5-2.2.
5-2.3.
5-3.
5-3.1.
5-3.2.
5-3.3.
5-3.4.
5-4.
5-4.1.
5-4.2.
5-4.3.
5-4.3.1
5-4.4.
5-4.5.
5-4.6.
5-4.7.
5-5.
5-5A.
5-5.1.
5-5.1.1.
5-5.2.
Fig.5-1
Fig.5-2
Fig.5-3
Fig.5-4
Fig.5-5
Fig.5-6
Fig.5-7
TITLE
ACCESS TO VERIOUS MODULES………………………..............
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SAMPLING ARM.............
ARM HEAD RETROFIT KIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS....
SAMPLING TUBE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE......................
ARM CONTROLLER BOARD KIT P/N 11-05248-01
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE REAGENTS MODULE....
REPLACEMENT OF REAGENT PELTIER MODULES.................
REPLACEMENT OF REAG. PLATE TRANSMISSION BELT…...
REPLACEMENT OF REAG. PLATE DRIVE MOTOR...................
REPLACEMENT OF REAG. TEMP/HALL SENSORS..................
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE READING STATION…....
REPLACEMENT OF CUVETTES PELTIER..................................
REPLACEMENT OF THE HALOGEN LAMP................................
REPLACEMENT OF HYDRAULIC TUBES...................................
PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBING INSTALLATION...........................
REPLACEMENT OR MAINTENANCE OF DILUTER....................
REPLACEMENT OF THE WASHING PISTON.............................
REPLACEMENT OF READING CUVETTE...................................
PHOTOMETER REPLACEMENT.................................................
INTRODUCTION TO THE COMPUTER BOX…...........................
COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD..................
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF COMPUTER BOX.................
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE.......................................................
8-WIRE ANALOGUE RESISTIVE TOUCH-SCREEN...................
BT3000 PLUS - EXPLODED VIEW…………………………………
SAMPLING ARM (FRONT)............................................................
SAMPLING ARM (REAR)..............................................................
ARM HEAD PLACEMENT.............................................................
METALLIC FIN INSERTION INTO THE ARM HEAD....................
ARM HEAD COVER REPLACEMENT/REMOVAL........................
SAMPLING TUBE WITH NEEDLE HOLDER................................
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 15
SECT.
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
Fig.5-8
Fig.5-9
Fig.5-10
Fig.5-11
Fig.5-12
Fig.5-13
Fig.5-14
Fig.5-15
Fig.5-16
Fig.5-17
Fig.5-18
Fig.5-19
Fig.5-20
Fig.5-21
Fig.5-22
Fig.5-23
Fig.5-24
Fig.5-25
Fig.5-26
Fig.5-27
Fig.5-28
Fig.5-29
Fig.5-30
Fig.5-30A
Fig.5-31
Fig.5-32
Fig.5-33
Fig.5-34
Fig.5-35
Fig.5-36
Fig.5-37
TITLE
ARM HEAD (TOP VIEW)...............................................................
ARM HEAD (BOTTOM VIEW).......................................................
ARM HEAD (SIDE VIEW)..............................................................
SAMPLING TUBE WITH NEEDLE HOLDER................................
SAMPLING TUBE WITH NEEDLE HOLDER................................
ARM HEAD COVER REMOVAL....................................................
SAMPLING TUBE DISCONNECTION...........................................
NEEDLE HOLDER CLAMP LOOSENING.....................................
SAMPLING TUBE REMOVAL.......................................................
SAMPLING TUBE REMOVAL.......................................................
ISE I/O TUBE REMOVAL...............................................................
ISE SOLUTION CCONTAINERS...................................................
ISE COVER SCREWS...................................................................
REAGENT COVER SCREWS.......................................................
CYLINDRICAL CONTAINER REMOVAL.......................................
BASE COVER REMOVAL.............................................................
ARM REMOVAL.............................................................................
ARM CONTROLLER BOARD REMOVAL.....................................
MICROCONTROLLER VERIFICATION.........................................
REPLACING THE HALOGEN LAMP.............................................
LAMP REMOVAL (REAR COVER)................................................
LAMP REMOVAL (FRONT SHUTTER))........................................
HYDRAULIC TUBES AND ACCESSORIES..................................
HYDRAULIC TUBES AND ACCESSORIES..................................
WASHER MODULE.......................................................................
READING STATION - BOTTOM VIEW (REF. CHANNEL)............
FUNNEL CAP OPENER................................................................
WASHING PISTON REMOVAL & CLEANING..............................
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT...................................................................
COMPUTER BOX..........................................................................
COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD...................
SECT.
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SECTION VI
READING STATION SYSTEM
PARA.
6-1.
6-2.
6-2.1.
6-2.2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-4.1.
6-4.2.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
TITLE
GENERAL......................................................................................
PHOTOMETER MODULE.............................................................
REACTION CUVETTES OPERATING PRINCIPLE..........…..…...
LIGHT SOURCE............................................................................
READING CUVETTES SYSTEM...................................................
DILUTER AND WASHER MODULE..............................................
DILUTER OPERATING PRINCIPLE.....................….....................
NEW NO-PINCH VALVE................................................................
ELECTRONICS FOR THE READING STATION SYSTEM............
MAIN LOGIC BOARD (15-04211-01).............................................
MAIN POWER BOARD (15-04209-01)...........................................
INTERFACE BOARD (15-04270-01)..............................................
THE 10 - CHANNEL PHOTOMETER.............................................
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 15
SECT.
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
6-9.1.
6-10.
Fig.6-1
Fig.6-2
Fig.6-3
Fig.6-4
Fig.6-5
Fig.6-5A
Fig.6-6
Fig.6-7
TITLE
SECT.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE PHOTOMETER...........
FCC PROCEDURE........................................…............................
PHOTOMETER MODULE..............................................................
READING STATION - BOTTOM VIEW..........................................
CUVETTES SYSTEM....................................................................
DILUTER/WASHER MODULE AND WATER RESERVOIR....…..
DILUTER PUMP............................................................................
NO-PINCH VALVE.........................................................................
READING STATION - REAR VIEW...............................................
PHOTODIODE ARRAY...............................…...............................
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
VI
SECTION VII
REAGENTS MODULE
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
7-1.
GENERAL................................................................................…... VII
7-2.
REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER 15-05211-01........................... VII
7-3.
REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER 15-04313-03 - OBSOLETE...
VII
7-4.
REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM........................…..…......
VII
7-5.
REAGENT & SERUM BARCODES...............................................
VII
Fig.7-1
REAGENT REFRIGERATOR MODULE...........................….........
VII
Fig.7-2
REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW......
VII
Fig.7-3
REAGENT DRIVE MOTOR...................................................…..... VII
Fig.7-4
REAGENT CONTROLLER MODULE....................................…....
VII
SECTION VIII
SAMPLING STATION
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
8-1.
GENERAL……………………………..............................................
VIII
8-2.
SAMPLING ARM MODULE...........................................................
VIII
8-2.1.
ARM CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04765-01)...............................
VIII
8-2.2.
ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER BOARD (15-05023-01)........
VIII
8-2.3.
ISE SAMPLING ARM MODULE....................................................
VIII
8-3.
THE SERUM MODULE.................................................................
VIII
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 15
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
8-3.1.
SERUM PLATE CONTROLLERS.................................................. VIII
8-3.2.
SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04422-01)..............
VIII
8-3.3.
LEFT SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR BOARD (15-04280-01)...
VIII
8-3.4.
RIGHT SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR BOARD (15-04278-01)...
VIII
8-4.
BARCODE SCANNER................................................................... VIII
8-5.
SERUM & REAGENT BARCODES...............................................
VIII
Fig.8-1
SAMPLING ARM WITH HEATER.................................................
VIII
Fig.8-2
SAMPLING ARM MODULE...........................................................
VIII
Fig.8-3
SAMPLING ARM (FRONT)............................................................ VIII
Fig.8-4
SAMPLING ARM (REAR)............................................................
VIII
Fig.8-5
SERUM MODULE.........................................................................
VIII
Fig.8-6
SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER MODULE...................................
VIII
Fig.8-7
SERUM MODULE - EXPLODED VIEW........................................
VIII
SECTION IX
ISE MODULE
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
9-1.
GENERAL…………………….........................................................
IX
9-2.
SUBASSEMBLIES OF THE ISE MODULE.................................... IX
9-2.1.
ISE PREAMPLIFIER BOARD (15-04440-01)................................
IX
9-2.2.
ISE CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04320-01).................................
IX
9-3.
COMMONLY ASKED ISE QUESTIONS……………………………
IX
9-4.
ISE TROUBLE-SHOOTING BT3000 PLUS................................... IX
Fig.9-1.
ISE MODULE ARRANGEMENT - FRONT VIEW..........................
Fig.9-2.
ISE MODULE - VIEW "A"............................................................... IX
Fig.9-3.
ISE MODULE - VIEW "B"............................................................... IX
Fig.9-4.
ISE MODULE - ELECTRODES LOCATION..................................
Fig.9-5.
ISE MODULE WITH NO-PINCH VALVE…………………………… IX
IX
IX
SECTION X
COMPUTER MODULE
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
10-1.
ELECTRONICS MODULE…………………....................................
10-1.1.
COMPUTER BOX.......................................................................... X
10-1.2.
MAINBOARD CONNECTORS.....................……........................... X
10-1.2.1.
COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD................... X
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 9 of 15
X
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
10-1.3.
10-1.3.1.
10-1.3.2.
10-1.4.
10-1.5.
10-1.6.
10-1.7.
Fig.10-1.
Fig.10-2.
Fig.10-3.
Fig.10-4.
TITLE
SECT.
LCD MODULE 8-WIRE ANAL.RESIS.TOUCH-SCREEN..............
TOUCH-SCREEN DRIVER INSTALLATION
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL..................................
POWER SUPPLY MODULE..........................................................
MAINBOARD LAYOUT CONTENTS.............................................
INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD...........................................................
NEW COMPUTER BOX, VARIATIONS & OPTIONS....................
COMPUTER BOX……...................................................................
COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD.……..........
LAYOUT.........................................................................................
MAINBOARD ASSEMBLY.............................................................
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SECTION XI
POWER SUPPLY
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
11-1.
11-1.1.
11-1.2.
11-1.3.
POWER SUPPLY………………….................................................
EMC DIRECTIVE APPLICATION TO THE PWR SUP..................
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION (PFC)………...……….............
INHIBIT OPTION (INH)........................................…………............
XI
XI
XI
XI
SECTION XII
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01
PARA
12-1.
12-1.1.
12-1.2.
12-1.3.
12-1.4.
12-1.5.
12-1.6.
12-1.7.
Fig.12-1
Fig.12-2
Fig.12-3
TITLE
SECT.
FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS.............................................
SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTIONS................................................
DESCRIPTION OF THE BOARD 15-05085-01.............................
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM COMPONENTS..................................
INSTALLATION & OPERATION....................................................
MAINTENANCE AND CARE..........................................................
TROUBLE-SHOOTING..................................................................
SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE...................
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01................................
FLUIDIC PATHWAY.......................................................................
WASTE PROBE.............................................................................
XII
XII
XII
XII
XII
XII
XII
XII
XII
XII
XII
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM, P/N 662.0788 & BY-PRODUCTS
PREVIOUS VERSION (OBSOLETE)
PARA
TITLE
12-2.
12-2.1.
INTRODUCTION...........................................................................
VACUUM GAUGE.........................................................................
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
SECT.
Page 10 of 15
XII
XII
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
12-2.2.
VACUUM LEVEL REGULATOR.................................................... XII
12-2.3.
HYDROPHOBIC FILTER............................................................... XII
12-2.4.
CAUTION! SHIPPING RETAINER - VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM..
XII
12-2.5.
INSTALLATION.............................................................................
XII
12-2.6.
QUICK START-UP......................................................................... XII
12-2.7.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE.........................................................
12-2.8.
FUSE REPLACEMENT FOR MAIN POWER INLET MODULE..... XII
12-2.9.
FILTER REPLACEMENT............................................................... XII
12-2.10.
PERISATLTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT..................
XII
12-2.11.
VACUUM REGULATION PROCEDURE.......................................
XII
12-2.12.
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION.....................................................
XII
12-2.13.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF BOARD (15-04541-01).............
XII
12-2.14.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE.....................................................
XII
12-2.15.
SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE...................
XII
12-2.15.1. ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT P/N 11-05339-01..........................
XII
12-2.16.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................
12-2.17.
CLEANING OF THE HYDROPHOBIC FILTER.............................
XII
XII
Fig.12-4
Fig.12-5
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM INSTALLATION.................................
XII
SPARE PARTS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR...................
XII
Fig.12-6
WASTE CHAMBER LEFT AND RIGHT......................................... XII
DETAILS OF SOME SPARE PARTS............................................ XII
Fig.12-7
Fig.12-8
Fig.12-9
XII
WASTE PROBE............................................................................. XII
SPARE CABLES FOR VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM....................... XII
Fig.12-10 VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM WARNINGS.......................................
XII
SECTION XIII
MEASUREMENTS AND CALIBRATIONS
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
13-1.
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................... XIII
13-1.1.
PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS.............. XIII
13-1.2.
PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION PROCEDURE............................. XIII
13-1.3.
VERIFICATION OF ANY PROBLEMS DURING THE READING.. XIII
13-2.
CUVETTES CALIBRATION AND TEMP. CONTROL SPECS....... XIII
13-2.1.
CUVETTE TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
13-3.
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM CALIBRATION AND SPECS...........
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 11 of 15
.
XIII
XIII
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
13-3.1.
REAGENT CONTROLLER P/N 15-04313-03 (OBSOLETE).........
XIII
13-3.2.
REAGENT CONTROLLER BOARD P/N 15-05211-01..................
XIII
13-4.
BARCODE CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS....................
XIII
13-4.1.
PROGRAMMING OF SERUM/REAGENT BARCODE..................
XIII
13-4.2.
BARCODE - MECHANICAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE.........
XIII
13-5.
ISE MODULE CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS................
XIII
13-5.1.
ISE BUBBLE SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE.................
XIII
13-5.2.
ISE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT VERIFICATION.................................. XIII
13-5.3.
ISE ELECTRODES POTENTIAL VERIFICATION......................... XIII
13-6.
PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR CALIBRATION AND SPECS.............
13-7.
STRESS ANALYZER..................................................................... XIII
XIII
SECTION XIV
TROUBLE-SHOOTING
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
14-1.
INTRODUCTION……………………………...................................
XIV
14-1.1.
CUVETTES TEMPERATURE...........................…………..............
XIV
14-1.2.
REAGENT CHAMBER TEMPERATURE..........………...............
XIV
14-1.3.
POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS...........................………...............
XIV
14-1.4.
POWER UP PROBLEMS.....................................………..............
XIV
14-1.5.
THE MOUSE AND KEYBOARD..........................………...............
XIV
14-1.6.
RESET ERRORS: SERUM PLATE / REAGENT TRAY
DILUTER / SAMPLING ARM.................................……….............
XIV
14-2.
INTRODUCTION - COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLEXIV
SHOOTING....................................................................................
14-2.1
COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE-SHOOTING.....…………........
XIV
14-2.1.1.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL..................................
XIV
14-2.2
BOOTSTRAP - COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLESHOOTING.... XIV
UNRELIABLE RESULTS OF ANALYSES - GENERAL
XIV
CONSIDERATIONS.......................................................................
VERIFICATION OF PHOTOMETRIC INSTABILITY
XIV
14-3.
14-4.
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 12 of 15
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
14-5.
VERIFICATION OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION............
XIV
14-6.
ISE TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................
XIV
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
CALIBRATION ERRORS
OBSTRUCTIONS CAUSED BY PROTEINS IN ELECTRODES CL & CO2
BAD RESULTS OF SAMPLES
ERROR MESSAGES, AIR BUBBLES, FLAGS
RESULTS WITH FLAG "D"
Fig. 14-1
CHLORIDE ELECTRODE CLEANING PROCEDURE..................
XIV
Fig. 14-2
ISE ELECTRODES CLEANING PROCEDURE............................. XIV
SECTION XV
SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
PARA.
TITLE
SECT.
15-1.
READING STATION MODULE SPARE PARTS...........................
XV
15-2.
REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SPARE PARTS.............
XV
15-3.
SERUM MODULE SPARE PARTS...............................................
XV
15-4.
SAMPLER ARM SPARE PARTS..................................................
XV
15-5.
ISE MODULE SPARE PARTS......................................................
XV
15-6.
COMPUTER BOX.........................................................................
XV
15-7.
CONSUMABLES...........................................................................
XV
15-8.
ELECTRONICS HARDWARE.......................................................
XV
15-9.
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM SPARE PARTS.................................
XV
15-10.
ORDERING INFORMATION.........................................................
XV
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 13 of 15
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE:
SCHEMATICS, COMPONENT LAYOUTS, AND OTHER HELPFUL INFORMATION
ARE ON THE LAST PAGES OF THIS MANUAL
COMPONENT LAYOUT
ELECTRONICS SYSTEM
LAYOUT
TITLE
15-04209-01
15-04211-01
15-04270-01
15-04278-01
15-04280-01
15-04282-01
15-04313-03
15-04320-01
15-04422-01
15-04431-01
15-04440-01
15-04503-01
15-04541-01
15-04649-01
15-04651-01
15-04661-01
15-04680-01
15-04765-01
15-04765-02
15-04767-01
15-04902-01
15-05021-01
15-05023-01
15-05085-01
15-05211-01
15-05234-01
MASTER POWER
MASTER LOGIC
READING PLATE INTERFACE
SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "R"
SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "L"
SERUM HALL SENSOR
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
ISE CONTROLLER
SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER
PERIPHERALS DISABLE
ISE PREAMPLIFIER
ISE INTERFACE
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
PHOTOMETER PREAMPLIFIER
PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE
LEFT ARM CONTROLLER
RIGHT ARM CONTROLLER
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
LIQUID SENSOR
DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR
ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS
ELECTRONICS SYSTEM
SCHEMATIC
TITLE
SE-04209-01
SE-04211-01
SE-04270-01
SE-04278-01
SE-04280-01
SE-04282-01
SE-04313-03
MASTER POWER
MASTER LOGIC
READING PLATE INTERFACE
SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "R"
SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "L"
SERUM HALL SENSOR
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 14 of 15
BT3000 PLUS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCHEMATIC
TITLE
SE-04320-01
SE-04334-02
SE-04334-03
SE-04348-02
SE-04379-02
SE-04379-03
SE-04422-01
SE-04431-01
SE-04436-03
SE-04437-03
SE-04438-02
SE-04439-01
SE-04440-01
SE-04442-04
SE-04442-05
SE-04443-02
SE-04444-04
SE-04444-05
SE-04445-04
SE-04446-01
SE-04446-03
SE-04503-01
SE-04541-01
SE-04649-01
SE-04651-01
SE-04661-01
SE-04680-01
SE-04765-01
SE-04765-02
SE-04767-01
SE-04872-01
SE-04873-01
SE-04902-01
SE-05021-01
SE-05023-01
SE-05050-01
SE-05085-01
SE-05161-01
SE-05165-01
SE-05211-01
SE-05234-01
SE-662.0788
SE-662.0788A
SE-662.0788B
SE-662.0788E
ISE CONTROLLER
READING PLATE ASSY
READING PLATE ASSY
SERUM PLATE ASSY
BOX COMPUTER ASSY
BOX COMPUTER ASSY
SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER
PERIPHERALS DISABLE
LEFT ARM ASSY
RIGHT ARM ASSY
ARM WITH HEATER
WIRED CASE
ISE PREAMPLIFIER
READING STATION
READING STATION
REAGENTS PLATE ASSY
BT3000 PLUS
BT3000 PLUS
SERUM MODULE
ISE UNIT
ISE UNIT WITHOUT ISE MODULE
ISE INTERFACE
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
PHOTOMETER PREAMPLIFIER
PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE
LEFT ARM CONTROLLER
RIGHT ARM CONTROLLER
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
LEFT ARM
RIGHT ARM
LIQUID SENSOR
DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR
ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER
BT3000 PLUS (WITHOUT ISE)
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
VACUUM SYSTEM
WASTE PROBE
REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM
WASTE PROBE - 1
WASTE PROBE - 2
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM
INDEX - BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 15 of 15
SECTION A
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
•
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A., after having accurately tested this analyzer, guarantees the
instrument for 1 (one) year starting from invoice.
•
The warranty includes the repairing and the replacement for free of the faulty parts due to
wrong manufacturing. Warranty is not extended to the normally consumable parts of the
system.
•
The warranty is not valid in case of improper use, negligence, improper or lack of maintenance
and cleaning, tampering or repairing by third parties not authorized by Biotecnica Instruments
S.p.A. and in any case when the cause cannot be stated as original manufacturing fault.
•
The costs of shipment and transport to Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. for repair or substitution,
and the risks deriving from this is the responsibility of the buyer, including all the costs of
onsite technical service at client's location (transport, board and lodging) as well.
•
If the stated defects will result to be out of warranty limits, the buyer will pay repair or
replacement costs.
•
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. is not responsible for any unforeseen technical problem that
might occur. If the requested technical assistance is outside the terms of warranty a charge
will me made to the customer as per current rates in force.
•
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. is an internationally known for its high quality standards in
production. Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. is thus responsible for providing to the customer
clear and effective information for use of it's products, including all the precautions and
warnings for a secure and risk-free use.
•
Service personnel must also refer to the warnings and cautions notices in this manual. It is the
duty of the service engineer of Biotecnica to instruct his service personnel to take all
necessary precautions during repair and handling of products.
•
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. is not responsible for any damage that may be caused directly
or indirectly to persons or things due to a lack of observance of all the warnings and cautions
outlined in the user's manual, and concerning the warnings and cautions during the different
working phases of the instrument (see chap. M). Direct, indirect, incidental, special, moral
damages as well as other damages of any type (including, with no limitation, those deriving
from profit’s loss, business interruption or information loss) cannot be ascribed to Biotecnica
Instruments S.p.A. even in the case in which the possibility of the event had been explicitly
stated.
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A.
Via Licenza, 18
00156 Rome (ITALY)
Tel. +39-06-4112316
Fax +39-06-4103079
E-mail: bt@biotecnica.it
Web: www.biotecnica.it
© 2004 BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A., ROME, ITALY
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS PROPRIETARY WITH
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.. REPRODUCTION OF ANY PART OR
WHOLE MAY ONLY BE PERFORMED WITH WRITTEN PERMISSION
FROM BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 13
Page 1 of 1
Mod.05-35a-ing Rev. 1
Parts / Instruments Return Authorization
DATE: ______/______/____
From:
To: Technical Assistance – Export Manager
Client information
Instrument model:
Serial number:
Defective part
Part description:
Code:
Bar-code number:
Under warranty: Yes
No
Serial number:
Quantity:
Invoice number:
Date:
Description of the problem:
Request for:
Repair
Exchange
Quotation
Name:
Urgent
Signature:
Biotecnica Instruments response
Return authorization number:
Approved:
Yes
No
Exchange
Repair
Note:
/ 2004
Destroy
Date:
Quotation:
Approved by: Technical Assistance Dept.
Signature:
Checked by: Quality Assurance Manager
Signature:
Note: No parts or instruments will be accepted for repair or replacement without a Return Authorization
number, which can be obtained from Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. Fax this Return Authorization form to
+39 06 410 3079 to the attention of Technical Assistance/Export Manager, who will then evaluate and issue a
Return Authorization number.
WARRANTY EXCTRACT: Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. warrants its instruments to be free from defective parts and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of purchase. Liability under this warranty is expressly limited to
repair or replacement of defective parts at the option of Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. This warranty does not cover the
results of misuse, accident or abuse of any parts of its instruments which have been repaired, tampered with or altered by
anyone other than personnel authorized by Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. This warranty does not apply to fluid handling
devices, consumables or reagents.
Products returned to Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. for repair or replacement shall be sent with transportation prepaid.
If found not to be defective under the terms of warranty, a charge will be made for repair or replacement and freight costs
will be at customer’s expense.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 13
POTENTIAL RISKS DURING OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
USE
Although the BT3000 PLUS analyzer system uses high performance
components, which provide a high degree of safety, it is essential that the user
takes the usual precautions to safeguard himself and to ensure a safe working
environment.
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. only guarantees the workmanship and materials
of its products. It is the duty of the user to take care of safe operation and no
amount of warnings can take place of such care.
As regards the moving parts in the analyzer, these have been appropriately
protected to avoid any potential risks to the user, and for proper instrument
operation and safety. However, it is highly recommended to exercise extreme
care during analyzer operation and especially when working close to the
devices.
To avoid accidental contamination, use suitable guards and/or personal
protection, such as overall and gloves. When handling reagents, it is advisable
to observe good laboratory practice (GLP) rules.
Chemicals, serum samples and reagents must be handled with extreme
caution. Patient samples may be biologically hazardous. The reagents or any
other substances that may enter in contact with samples should be treated in
the same way as samples themselves.
The materials of human origin, such as control sera, are tested for the
detection of HbsAg, anti-HCV anti-HIV-1 anti-HIV–2 antibodies. Even if the
result is negative, as no known analytical method can exclude any
infection’s risk with certainty therefore these materials must be
considered as potentially infective and thus must be handled with
extreme caution. The reagents and any other substance entering in contact
with samples must be treated in the same way. The reagents must be
manipulated (before, during and after the use) by qualified personnel familiar
with their characteristics in order to safeguard the user as well as the quality of
the reagent itself.
MAINTENANCE
• It is of extreme importance that the instrument is fully turned off and the
power cord unplugged from the wall outlet to safely perform any
maintenance or service procedure.
• During maintenance procedures, the safety and warning precautions must
be observed as outlined in this section.
• The exterior of the analyzer casing may be cleaned periodically to remove
dust grease and other contamination. It is not necessary to clean the inside.
Use soft cloth dampened with a mild solution of detergent with water.
• The owner shall be responsible for maintenance of the analyzer. Wear or
damage caused by lack of normal maintenance or by misuse of the
analyzer shall not be considered as defective workmanship and material.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 13
WARNINGS
ALTHOUGH THE BT3000 PLUS ANALYZER SYSTEM USES HIGH PERFORMANCE
COMPONENTS WHICH PROVIDE A HIGH DEGREE OF SAFETY, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE
SERVICE ENGINEER TAKES THE USUAL PRECAUTIONS TO SAFEGUARD HIS SERVICE
PERSONNEL. WE ONLY GUARANTEE THE WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS OF OUR
PRODUCTS. IT IS THE DUTY OF THE SERVICE ENGINEER TO TAKE CARE FOR SAFE
OPERATION AND NO AMOUNT OF WARNINGS CAN TAKE THIS PLACE OF SUCH CARE.
THE FOLLOWING WARNINGS WILL AID THE SERVICE PERSONNEL TO PROVIDE
ADEQUATE SAFEGUARDS TO ASSURE SAFE TROUBLE-FREE PERFORMANCE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
BEFORE SERVICING THIS SYSTEM, BE SURE TO READ THE SERVICE MANUAL
THOURALLY AND CAREFULLY. AFTERWARDS, KEEP IT HANDY FOR FUTURE
REFERENCE.
TAKE SPECIAL CARE TO FOLLOW THE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS INDICATED ON
THE SYSTEM REAR PANEL AS WELL AS IN THE SERVICE MANUAL.
SERVICING OF THIS SYSTEM SHOULD BE RESTRICTED TO QUALIFIED/APPROVED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
SLOTS AND OPENINGS IN THE CASE, BACK PANEL, AND BOTTOM ARE PROVIDED
FOR VENTILATION. THIS ENSURE RELIABLE OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM AND TO
PROTECT IT FROM OVERHEATING. DO NOT BLOCK OR COVER THESE OPENINGS.
BEFORE SERVICING, CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ON THE REAR PANEL LABEL
MATCHES THE LOCAL LINE VOLTAGE.
TO GUARANTEE SAFETY THE SYSTEM MUST BE GROUNDED. THE WIRES IN THE
MAINS POWER CORDSET ARE COLORED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING
CODES:
GREEN AND YELLOW:
EARTH
BLUE:
NEUTRAL
BROWN:
LIVE
THE WIRE COLORED BLUE IS INTERCHANGEABLE WITH WIRE COLORED BROWN.
REPLACE FUSE AS MARKED. PRIOR TO THE REMOVAL OF ANY FUSE, TURN POWER
OFF AND UNPLUG THE CORDSET FROM THE WALL.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE ANY PANEL OR
COVER UNDER POWER "ON" CONDITION. BEFORE REMOVING ANY PANEL OR
COVER, TURN POWER "OFF" AND UNPLUG THE POWER CORDSET FROM THE WALL
FOR OPERATING SAFETY, DO NOT INSTALL THE SYSTEM IN A LOCATION WHERE IT
WILL BE EXPOSED TO HEATING EQUIPMENT OR RADIATORS, DIRECT SUN LIGHT,
OR ANY OTHER SOURCE OF EXTREMELY HIGH TEMPERATURES.
DO NOT OPERATE THE SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE FLUIDS OR
GASEOUS ATMOSPHERE, DISINFECTING AGENTS, CLEANING AGENTS, ETC., DUE
TO POSSIBLE FIRE OR EXPLOSION.
DO NOT KINK, BEND, LAY OBJECT ON, OR OTHERWISE DAMAGE OR RESTRICT
CABLES.
BE SURE THAT THE POWER SWITCH ON THE BACK PANEL OF SYSTEM IS OFF
WHEN PLUGGING IN, OR REMOVING THE POWER CORDSET FROM A WALL OUTLET.
TURN OFF THE MAINS POWER SWITCH WHENEVER THE SYSTEM IS NOT IN USE;
THE SYSTEM IS SWITCHED OFF BUT NOT ENTIRELY. TO TURN OFF POWER TO
WHOLE SYSTEM, UNPLUG POWER CORD FROM WALL OUTLET.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ALTER THE SHAPE OF ANY PART OF THE SYSTEM.
IF THE SYSTEM IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY AND THE TROUBLE-SHOOTING
SECTION DOES NOT PROVIDE A SATISFACTORY SOLUTION TO THE PROBLEM,
THEN DO NOT USE THE SYSTEM UNTIL THE DEFECTS ARE REMEDIED.
INSPECT ALL ACCESSORIES AND SYSTEM CORDS. DO NOT USE IF DAMAGE CAN
BE SEEN SUCH AS CUT INSULATION OR OUTER COVERING, FRAYED OR BROKEN
WIRES, CORRODED OR BROKEN CONNECTORS ETC.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT ALLOW FLUIDS OR
ANY FOREIGN OBJECT TO ENTER THE SYSTEM. WIPE OFF SPILLS IMMEDIATELY.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 13
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
DO NOT USE BENZENE, THINNER, ANY KIND OF SOLVENTS, OR ABRASIVE
DETERGENTS TO CLEAN THE CASE. CLEAN WITH SOFT DUSTING CLOTH
DAMPENED WITH DISTILLED WATER. IF NECESSARY USE ONLY NEUTRAL
DETERGENT.
DO NOT STICK OBJECTS OF ANY KIND INTO THE SYSTEM THROUGH BACK PANEL
OR CASE SLOTS AS THEY MAY TOUCH DANGEROUS VOLTAGE POINTS OR SHORT
OUT PARTS THAT COULD RESULT IN FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK.
INSTALL THE SYSTEM IN SUCH A WAY THAT ADEQUATE VENTILATION IS PROVIDED
ALL AROUND TO PROPERLY DISSIPATE THE HEAT.
MAKE SURE ALL FLUID LINES ARE FREE OF KINKS, NICKS, SHARP BENDS,
PUNCTURES, OR OCCLUSIONS BEFORE INSTALLING ON SYSTEM.
DO NOT TWIST THE PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBING WHEN PLACING IN THE RACEWAY
OF THE PUMP ROLLER.
RELEASE THE PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBING WHENEVER THE SYSTEM IS UNUSED
FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME.
IF IT IS NOT BE USED FOR SOME TIME, THE PINCH-VALVES TUBING SHOULD BE
RELEASED.
CAUTION
THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT SHOULD BE FULLY DISCHARGED AND THE WATER RESERVOIR
DISCONNECTED FROM THE CIRCUIT PRIOR TO RELEASING THE TUBES FROM THE PINCH VALVES. IF
THESE STEPS ARE NOT TAKEN, SERIOUS DAMAGE MAY BE CAUSED TO THE ANALYZER.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
THE HALOGEN LAMP MUST BE REPLACED SOME MINUTES AFTER THE
INSTRUMENT HAS BEEN TURNED OFF AND POWER CORD UNPLUGGED.
ALWAYS ALLOW THE BURNT OUT LAMP TO COOL DOWN BEFORE HANDLING OR
ATTEMPTING REPLACEMENT.
NEVER TOUCH THE LAMP OR THE REFLECTOR WITH BARE FINGERS. USE A RAG
WHEN CHANGING.
IF THE LAMP IS TOUCHED INADVERTENTLY DURING INSTALLATION, CLEAN THE
LAMP OR REFLECTOR WITH ALCOHOL AND DRY WITH A CLEAN, SOFT CLOTH
BEFORE BURNING. CONTAMINATION OF THE LAMP OR REFLECTOR MAY REDUCE
LAMP PERFORMANCE.
THIS LAMP EMITS UV (ULTRAVIOLET) RADIATION. PROLONGED EXPOSURE TO THIS
LAMP MAY CAUSE SKIN AND EYE IRRITATION
USE ONLY ORIGINAL TUBING REPLACEMENTS-"MONTHLY AND QUARTERLY
REPLACEMENT KITS". DO NOT USE CONVENTIONAL TUBING. THIS WILL CAUSE
MALFUNCTION OF THE SYSTEM.
THE ANALYZER SYSTEM MUST NOT BE DISMANTLED OR REPAIRED BY ANYONE
WHO HAS NOT BEEN QUALIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER. INCORRECT WORK MAY
CAUSE FIRE OR IRREPARABLE DAMAGE TO THE SYSTEM.
DO NOT OVERLOAD ACCESSORIES POWER OUTLETS AND EXTENSION CORDS AS
THIS CAN RESULT IN FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT PLACE THE SYSTEM ON AN UNSTABLE CART, STAND, OR TABLE; THE
SYSTEM MAY FALL, CAUSING SERIOUS INJURY TO USER, AND SERIOUS DAMAGE
TO THE APPLIANCE. PLACE THE SYSTEM ON A STABLE, VIBRATION-FREE, LEVEL
TABLE OR CART.
USE ONLY SECURE POWER SOURCE TO PROTECT THE ANALYZER SYSTEM
AGAINST POWER SURGES. DISCONNECT TEMPORARILY THE ANALYZER POWER
CORD FROM THE WALL OUTLET IN CASE OF BAD ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS.
DO NOT USE VACUUM PUMP UNTIL THE TWO TRANSIT SCREWS (COLORED RED)
AT THE BOTTOM OF CABINET HAVE BEEN REMOVED (VALID FOR OLD VACUUM
PUMP SYSTEM P/N 662.0788 AND BY-PRODUCTS).
DO NOT OIL ANY PART OF THE SYSTEM.
EMPTY WASTE CONTAINERS WHENEVER THEY ARE FULL. ENSURE THAT THE
CONTAINER LIDS ARE SCREWED ON TIGHTLY TO PREVENT LEAKAGE OR
DISPERSION INTO THE ENVIRONMENT.
THE SAFE DISPOSAL OF THE ANALYZER WASTE MATERIAL WITH MINIMAL
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE ANY PANELS OR COVERINGS OF THE ANALYZER OR
THE VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM WHILE THE SYSTEM IS IN OPERATION.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 13
40.
DO NOT USE SOFTWARE DISKS OF UNKNOWN ORIGIN IN THE ANALYZER
COMPUTER AS THEY MAY INTRODUCE VIRUSES.
DO NOT USE THE COMPUTER OF THE ANALYZER FOR ANY OTHER PURPOSE THAN
THE ONE FOR WHICH IT IS DESIGNED FOR.
AFTER OPERATION/SERVICING, COVER THE SYSTEM WITH A PROTECTIVE PLASTIC
OR CLOTH SHEET.
BE PARTICULARLY CAUTIOUS THAT NO PARTS OF YOUR BODY (e.g. FINGERS HAIR,
ETC.) OR LOOSE OBJECTS (e.g. CABLES, TUBING, ETC.) CAN BE TRAPPED BY ANY
MOVING OR ROTATING PARTS (e.g. SAMPLING ARM, PLATES, WASHER MODULE,
PUMP ROLLERS ETC.) OF THE ANALYZER SYSTEM.
41.
42.
43.
NOTE:
a)
THE CAREFUL OBSERVATION OF THE PROCEEDING WARNINGS SHOULD RESULT IN A LONG AND
SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE.
THIS INFORMATION IS BELIEVED TO BE CURRENT AT THE TIME OF PUBLICATION, BUT IT IS
PROVIDED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND AND WE ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY WITH
RESPECT THERETO.
b)
CAUTION:
(USE OF THE BT3000 PLUS & BYPRODUCTS INTERNAL COMPUTER)
The computer box of analyzer BT3000 PLUS and by-products is designed
for long-term security and reliability and is virtually maintenance-free as
long as the user does not install any third-party application programs. If
these applications are installed, then they may damage the operating
system registry and may also cause disastrous consequence for the
computer's hard-drive. Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. will not be responsible
for any damage to the analyzer, its software and data in the hard-disk in
case of improper use of the PC box. This includes also: installation of
external programs, not properly secure net connections (intranet and
internet) and the use of disks without the necessary verification for viruses
presence. Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. will not be responsible for any
damage caused by non authorized third parties who may open and alter the
PC box configuration.
WASTE DISPOSAL
•
To ensure environment health and safety, it is recommended not to discard
the used consumables, waste liquids or disposable maintenance kits into
the environment.
•
Insure that the disposal of waste material is done according to all
applicable laws and regulations.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 13
RETURNING THE ANALYZER TO THE
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE SERVICE
The Technical Service Assistance (S.A.T.) may intervene locally, at the Lab, or at Biotecnica Instruments
S.p.A. for analyzers returned for repair.
In both cases it is necessary to decontaminate the analyzer and its parts to protect the health of technical
assistance employees.
To decontaminate the analyzer follow the procedure below, bearing in mind that any part of the
analyzer may come into contact, even accidentally, with potentially infected samples: therefore set
up adequate protection using the necessary individual protection devices.
Be very careful of any splashing of residual decontaminant when disconnecting the various tubes
or touching the various parts of the hydraulic system, after decontamination.
The procedure described below is not considered to be complete and any other action taken by
the Lab to ensure the safety of Biotecnica’s technicians is appreciated.
• OPERATING ANALYZER
1. Remove all the consumable parts, still present, from the analyzer (sample cups, test
tubes, reagent bottles etc.).
2. Put a suitable decontaminant (e.g. HCl 1N hydrochloric acid diluted at 3%) in a reagent
bottle and place it in position no. 40.
3. Prepare a bottle of enzymatic solution for washing the I.S.E. and place it together with the
other I.S.E. solutions in the specific housing.
4. Start a cuvette (Analyzer Utilities menu – Wash cuvettes) and I.S.E. (Analyzer Utilities
menu – Wash I.S.E.) wash cycle.
5. Wait five minutes after the washes have finished and then remove the decontaminant
bottle from the reagent tray and put the I.S.E. enzymatic solution back in the refrigerator.
Remove all the other bottles of I.S.E. solutions.
6. Run a normal wash cycle with water (Analyzer Utilities – Wash with water).
7. Empty the hydraulic circuit (from the Analyzer Utilities menu - Empty fluidics).
8. Shut down the analyzer.
9. Clean off the entire sample tray with decontaminant and a clean cloth, as well as its
housing and all the accessible surfaces of the analyzer.
For assistance at the Lab: in addition to the above, disconnect the waste tubes from the
instrument and clean an area with decontaminant which is large enough for the Technician to
work.
For shipping the analyzer to Biotecnica:
In addition to the instructions in points 1 to 9 above, carry out the following:
1. Disconnect the waste tubes from the instrument.
2. Disconnect the water tube from the instrument, wind it up and put it in a bag.
3. Push the sampling needles all the way into their wash wells.
4. Put the cuvette and serum cover trays back in their places.
5. Make sure that all moveable parts are secured tightly.
6. Decontaminate the vacuum system and make sure there is no residual fluid.
7. Decontaminate the vacuum system discharge probe by soaking it for five minutes in HCl
1N diluted at 3%.
8. Wind up the waste tubes and put them in a tightly shut bag.
9. Pack up the peripheral devices and analyzer in their original packing.
• NOT OPERATING ANALYZER
1. Remove all the consumable parts, still present, from the analyzer (sample cups, test
tubes, reagent bottles etc.).
2. Clean off the entire sample tray with decontaminant (hydrochloric acid HCl 1N diluted at
3%) and a clean cloth, as well as its housing and all the accessible surfaces of the
analyzer.
3. Unscrew the sampling needles from their arms and soak them for five minutes in
decontaminant and then rinse them with water and put them aside or screw them back into
place.
4. Decontaminate the vacuum system and make sure there is no residual fluid.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 13
5. Decontaminate the vacuum system discharge probe by soaking it for five minutes in HCl
1N diluted at 3%.
6. Make sure the cuvettes are empty and then fill them manually with the decontaminant
solution. After five minutes remove the solution and replace it with bidistilled water.
For assistance at the Lab: in addition to the above, disconnect the waste tubes from the
instrument and clean the technician's workspace with appropriate decontaminant.
For shipping the analyzer to Biotecnica:
In addition to the instructions in points 1 to 6 above, carry out the following:
1. Disconnect the waste tubes from the instrument.
2. Disconnect the water tube from the instrument, wind it up and put it in a bag.
3. Push the decontaminated sampling needles all the way into their wash wells.
4. Put the cuvette and serum cover trays back in their places.
5. Make sure that all moveable parts are secured tightly.
6. Wind up the decontaminated waste tubes and put them in a tightly shut bag.
7. Make sure the cuvettes are empty.
8. Make sure there is no residual liquid in the hydraulic circuit or any other part of the
instrument.
9. Pack up the peripheral devices and analyzer in their original packing.
• ANALYZER SAFE DISPOSAL
When the instrument is no longer useable or needs to be decommissioned, follow the procedure
below, bearing in mind that any part of the analyzer may come into contact, even accidentally, with
potentially infected samples: therefore set up adequate protection using the necessary individual
protection devices.
Be very careful of any splashing of residual decontaminant when disconnecting the various tubes
or touching the various parts of the hydraulic system, after decontamination.
1. Remove all the consumable parts, still present, from the analyzer (sample cups, test
tubes, reagent bottles etc.).
2. Empty the hydraulic circuit (from the Analyzer Utilities menu: empty fluidics).
3. Remove the water tube from the external container and put it in a container with at least
one liter of suitable disinfectant or decontaminant (e.g. hydrochloric acid HCl 1N diluted at
3%). Put disinfectant in the four empty bottles in place of I.S.E. solutions and in a bottle in
position 40 of the reagent tray.
4. Fill the hydraulic circuit again by running a reset and a series of prime of the clinical
chemical diluter and the diluter of the I.S.E.
5. Run a wash of the cuvettes and I.S.E. (from the Analyzer Utilities menu - Wash with water
and Wash I.S.E.)
6. Wait five minutes. Remove the disinfectant from the container and from the I.S.E. bottles
and replace it with water. Put the water tube back in the container which has just been
filled.
7. Run a wash of the cuvettes and I.S.E. again, and then empty the hydraulic circuit again.
8. Shut down the analyzer.
9. Remove all the cords connecting the UPS to the mains and peripheral devices from the
analyzer.
10. Remove all the cables connecting the peripheral devices (keyboard, mouse, wireless
connector, printer and UPS).
11. Carefully clean off the entire sample tray with decontaminant (hydrochloric acid HCl 1N
diluted at 3%) and a clean cloth, as well as its housing and all the accessible surfaces of
the analyzer.
12. Carefully clean the peripheral devices using a clean cloth and a disinfectant.
13. Remove the waste tubes from the analyzer and the vacuum system.
14. Remove the vacuum system discharge probe and soak it for five minutes in disinfectant
(HCl 1N diluted at 3%). Then rinse it in water.
15. Remove all the tubes which are part of the washing, distribution and sampling hydraulic
circuit and the I.S.E. circuit. Remove the I.S.E. electrodes as well.
16. Sort the material from decommissioning the instrument so that they can be recycled or
disposed of as special waste in accordance with local laws.
If the analyzer is going to be returned to the Distributor, make sure all the removal parts of the
system are bagged and separated after decontamination so that they can be disposed of as
special waste.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 13
ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES DISPOSAL
CAUTION:
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, called WEEE must be disposed of
in accordance with Italian Legislative Decree no. 151 of 25 July 2005:
“Implementation of EC directives 95/2002, 96/2002 and 108/2003, related to
the reduction of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment as well as waste disposal” published in the Italian Official Gazette
no. 175 of 29-7-2005- Ordinary Supplement no. 135.
The points below provide some instructions related to disposal of WEEE, however
we recommend consulting the aforesaid Legislative Decree for additional
information.
1. WEEE must not be disposed of as urban waste, it must be recycled.
2. Municipalities guarantee operation, access and suitability for recycling
systems for WEEE, so that end users and distributors can return to
collection centers all waste produced within their territories, at no cost.
3. WEEE can be returned to the distributor when new equipment is
purchased, without prejudice the provisions of Legislative Decree 151/05.
4. The distributor has the obligation to take the WEEE, however pick up may
be refused when there is a risk of contamination of personnel assigned to
this job.
5. The presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment requires separate disposal due to the potential effects on the
environment and humans. Improper use of the same equipment or its parts
may be potentially hazardous.
6. The symbol that indicate separate disposal of electrical and electronic
equipment is a trash container on wheels with a cross over it as indicated
below: the symbol is printed in a visible, readable and indelible manner
Editor’s note: The picture is only for the purposes of example: see the printed version
in the Italian Official Gazette no. 175 of 29-7-2005
7. Legislative Decree 151/05 includes a list of fines for illegal disposal of
WEEE.
NOTE:
The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any failure to comply with regulations
regarded to delivery of the instrument to third parties. Check the pertinent lists at
specialized waster disposal centers.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 9 of 13
CONFORMANCE
IMPORTANT NOTICE - EMC CERTIFICATE
The analyzer BT3000 PLUS has passed all the tests relevant to Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) and electrical safety. This product received the certificate of
compliance with international standards EN 66110-1 and EN 61326-1 from OCE
(Organismo di Certificazione Europea) of Rome (Italy), accredited and certified
(certificate number 051 of 21 Oct.1998) by Ministero delle Comunicazione of Italy.
The test reports 46/E and 47/E are available upon request.
This product conforms to the safety requirements of the Council Directives
98/79/EEC of 27 October 1998 (European Parliament) regarding the In-Vitro
Diagnostic Medical Devices. This directive is in accordance with the Article 2,
Paragraph 2 of the Directive 89/336/EEC, which ceases to apply to the
products complying with the present directive. Refer to Paragraph 7, Article
No.1 of the IEC Official Gazette No. L331 of Dec. 1998.
It also conforms to Italian Regulations CEI EN 61010-01 and CEI EN 613261 (EMC).
The conformity is attested when the equipment is installed
in accordance with the conditions outlined in the manual
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 10 of 13
THE COMPANY PROFILE
Biotecnica was founded in 1972, with years of technical expertise and
manufacturing knowledge in the field of design, production, sales and
technical support behind its staff. The Company develops and
manufactures clinical chemistry equipment and relevant reagent products,
to be sold directly and through OEM agreements. The market consists of
private and state clinical laboratories, hospitals, clinics, day hospitals,
and universities, etc. Since that time the company has developed and
produced instruments of uncompromising performance characteristics,
which has enabled Biotecnica to become one of Europe’s leading
manufacturers
of
clinical
chemistry
instruments.
Biotecnica
is
headquartered in Rome (Italy) and markets products both domestically and
internationally through a network of distributors.
Our actual range of instruments is composed of:
•
•
•
Photometers for clinical chemistry
Automatic analyzers for clinical chemistry
Electrophoresis densitometers & accessories
•
Flame photometers & associated reagents
•
Ion selective analyzer
•
Clinical chemistry reagents
Biotecnica has over 3,000 square meters of manufacturing facility, which
houses the latest in engineering, manufacturing, testing, and quality
control equipment. It is staffed with highly experienced personnel with a
dedication to quality.
The company supplies more than just products, it provides highly efficient
technical and manufacturing support based on the requirements of its
customers with ongoing training programs to keep them current on
advancements in technology. A global network of distributors and sales
engineers, assure the most comprehensive customer support across the
world.
For more information about Biotecnica, visit the Biotecnica web site at
www.biotecnica.it Please do not hesitate to contact us. We will be pleased
to assist with any inquiries you may have.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 11 of 13
PACKING / UNPACKING THE ANALYZER
♦ UNPACKING THE ANALYZER & ACCESSORIES
Two wooden crates contain the analyzer and the accessories. The crates can be easily opened by applying a lever action, with a large screwdriver, to remove all
the spring clips on the base of the crate as shown in the figure below. Carefully
remove the upper covering from the base. Remove the analyzer and place it on a
stable, vibration-free-surface, level table or cart. Carefully unpack all the
accessories and place them in a protected place. Store the empty wooden crate
assy in a safe place for future use.
CAUTION
The analyzer is provided with four integral push-pull handgrips located on
the left and right sides of the base frame. To lift or move the instrument
from one location to another, always use the handgrips.
Arrow Pointing
Upwards
Base
Spring Clip
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 12 of 13
♦ VERIFICATION OF THE CONTENTS OF THE WOODEN CRATES
Verify upon receipt of the BT3000 PLUS analyzer system (with accompanying
mod.05-28spr - packing check list) that all parts are present and intact when
opening the wooden crates and packaging.
♦ VERIFYING EVENTUAL DAMAGES OCCURRED DURING SHIPMENT
It is highly recommended to accurately verify the instrument and its accessories
for any damages that could have occurred during shipment. In case there is a
damaged or missing item then please fill out all the sections of the Form 05-35a in
this section. Send it to your nearest sales/service office or directly to Biotecnica
Instruments S.p.A. Rome, Italy. After appropriate evaluation, Biotecnica or its
branch office will provide the best solution to the problem.
NOTES FROM THE MANUFACTURER
The Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. reserves the right to revise this
manual without notice, for any reason. This includes but is not
limited to, utilization of advance in the state-of-the-art and
changes thereof. Product enhancement resulting from our
continuing quality improvement effort may necessitate changes in
specifications without notice. This fact doesn’t oblige the
company to inform its actual customers because the information
included in the present manual refers to state of the product when
shipped, thus no warranty about notification of future changes is
given.
The information contained in this manual is proprietary with
"Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A.". Reproduction of any part or
whole may only be performed with written permission from
"Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A.".
TRADEMARKS
NOTE: Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or
copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the
owner's benefit, without intent to infringe.
® Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
®
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines.
®
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
®
Lambda is an "Invensys Company."
®
Pharmed is a registered trademark of Norton Performance Plastics Corporation.
®
Baydur is a registered trademark of Bayer Polymers, LLC.
Section A
Warnings, Warranty, Unpacking
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 13 of 13
SECTION - I
INTRODUCTION - BT3000 PLUS
The BT3000 PLUS is an automated analyzer for the determination of clinical chemistry and
electrolyte results. The combined performance of this analyzer is from 300 to 500 tests per hour.
The technical material in this manual is for approved technical personnel with reasonable
familiarity with similar instruments only. A diligent effort has been made to provide engineering
illustrations, schematics, and other helpful information regarding the analyzer on the following
pages to facilitate the task of service personnel.
The BT3000 PLUS is a fully automatic analyzer that can perform high volume of analysis on serum
or urine samples. The test sample is followed continuously, upon insertion, so the analysis can be
performed quickly and with maximum reliability. The automated instrument consists of the
following three distinct subsystems:
a) The Mechanical System: Utilized for the transfer of the solutions, samples, and reagents
b) The Electronic System: Based on microprocessors for activating drive motors, alarm
devices, and temperature control, etc.
c) The Information Management System: IBM® compatible for patient inputs, processing of
the results, and communication with the host computer etc.
1-1.
Examples of The Basic Operations of Clinical
Chemistry
1-2.
PHASE 1: Creation of the Worklist.
1-3.
PHASE 2: Placement of Samples and Reagents
1-4.
PHASE 3: Start-up
1-5.
PHASE 4: Process Initiation
The mechanical arm is equipped with a sampling needle that can perform both swiveling and
up/down motions to accomplish complete mixing during the sampling cycle along with the diluter
pump. The cycle sequence starts with the aspiration of the reagent and the serum, followed by the
dispensing and mixing in the reading cuvette.
The sampling cycle is performed using the following devices: a sampling arm, a diluter pump, and
a peristaltic pump. The sequence of the sampling cycle is as follows:
a) Washing and drying of cuvettes
b) Reagent aspiration
c) Needle washing
d) Sample aspiration
e) Dispensing and mixing the solution in the pre-washed and dried cuvette
f) Washing the needle and the hydraulic circuit
The diluter provides the aspiration of the solution. A built-in liquid sensor, attached directly to the
needle mechanism, controls the descent of the needle into the reagent or sample. This controlled
immersion of the needle avoids any excessive contamination. The first part of the hydraulic circuit
(located inside the sampling arm) is pre-heated to about 40°C in order to compensate for the low
temperature of the reagent. The peristaltic pump provides approximately 2.0ml of H2O into the
waste bowl to wash the needle and the attached hydraulic circuit.
Section - I
Introduction
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 2
1-6.
PHASE 5 - Reading Cycle
In this phase, the sample remains in its cuvette for the necessary incubation time, after which, the
reading phase will begin. The reading cycle takes place every 10 seconds and lasts about 2
seconds. The photometer, located under the reading station, converts the luminous intensity of the
cuvettes into digital signals and transfers them to the microcontroller. After the initial reading, the
acquired data is stored as concentration and absorbance values for generating the test results.
1-7.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OF THE BT3000 PLUS
The process described above regards the complete dynamics for the testing of clinical chemistry
samples. The operation for running electrolytes is similar and can be performed simultaneously
with the preceding clinical chemistry samples. The final solution to be analyzed is not dispensed
into a cuvette, but into the ISE (Ion Selective Electrode) funnel located on top of the ISE module.
Obviously the phases 1, 2, and 3 are basically the same.
1-8.
ISE Sampling
The right sampling arm aspirates the reagents positioned near the ISE Module on the right of the
analyzer. The sampling is performed in two phases. The first phase is dedicated to the aspiration
and dispensation of the reference solution into the ISE funnel. The second phase is assigned to
the sampling of serum aspirated together with diluent reagent and buffer. The solutions are
dispensed and mixed in the ISE funnel followed by the use of a peristaltic pump to draw the
solution into the ISE electrodes for measurements. The signal produced by the electrodes is then
processed, as per the NERNST formula, and is translated into values of concentration. The ISE
module has its own diluter pump that is similar to that of the sampling (located on the reading
station) for clinical chemistry.
Section - I
Introduction
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 2
SECTION - II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
2-1.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OF THE BT3000 PLUS
Packed analyzer without accessories:.....
Packed analyzer with accessories:..........
Packed accessories:................................
Analyzer dimensions:...............................
Crate dimensions:....................................
Accessories package dimensions:...........
Approximately 135 Kg. (298 lb)
Approximately 225 Kg. (496 lb)
Approximately 90 Kg. (199 lb)
W = 100cm (40"), D = 58cm (23"), H = 68cm (27")
W = 120cm (48"), D = 80cm (32"), H = 80cm (32")
W = 120cm (48"), D = 72cm (29"), H = 70cm (28")
NOTE: Weight and dimensions shown are approximate.
2-2.
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
BT3000 PLUS analyzer:
Input Voltage Range:......................
Universal input, 100 - 240 V~
Input Frequency:.............................
50-60 Hz
Power Consumption:.......................
590 Watts max
New "Vacuum Pump System" P/N 06-05161-01:
Input:...............................................
100/240 V~, 50-60 Hz
Power:.............................................
40 Watts
Previous "Vacuum Pump System" P/N 662.0788 - (OBSOLETE)
Input:................................................ 220 V~, 50-60 Hz (110 V~ on request)
Power Consumption:.......................
80 Watt
Printer (accessory):.......................
Approx. 50 Watts, 100/240V~, 50-60 Hz (depending upon
model)
UPS (optional):...............................
Input 220V~, 50-60 Hz (110 V~ on request)
Output 220V~, 50-60 Hz (110 V~ on request)
Power: 1100 V.A. (710 Watt)
The detailed information regarding the specifications of the instrument power supply is outlined in
Section XI entitled "Power Supply" The internal power supply of the analyzer is stabilized and
incorporates the Power Factor Correction device (PFC), thereby require no additional external
electronics accessory. The use of an optional UPS device (uninterrupted power supply) is
recommended to avoid undesired power interruptions and to ensure software integrity in case of
sudden power failure.
2-3.
EMC AND ELECTRICAL SAFETY
The BT3000 PLUS instrument has passed all tests related to Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC), and "Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and
laboratory use" performed by the OCE Lab (EMC & Electrical Safety Compliance Test Laboratory),
Ministry of Communication - Italy accredited EMC certification body, No. 051 of 21 October 1998.
Certificate's documentation is available on request. The BT3000 PLUS chemistry analyzer
conforms to following EMC directives (Electro Magnetic Compatibility):
EMC:…………………... EN61326
EMC:…………………... EN55011
Electrical Safety:……… EN61010-1
The EMC performance characteristics and electrical safety reports are available upon request.
Section - II
Technical Specs
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 6
2-4.
PERFORMANCE & TECHNICAL SPECS
Operating Mode:………………….
Methods:…………………………..
ISE Module:……………………….
Test Mode:………………………..
Tests on line:……………………..
Tests in memory:…………………
Test Re-runs:……………………..
Calibrations and Controls:………
Automatic Profiles:……………….
Measurement:…………………….
Quality Control:…………………...
Remote Diagnostic:………………
Maintenance:……………………..
Sample Tray Capacity:…………..
Sampling Arm:……………………
Bar code scanner:………………..
Random access
Tests for Clinical Chemistry and Immune-Chemistry
Na, K, Cl and CO2
Routine, Batch, Emergencies (STAT), and profiles
80 refrigerated reagents + Relation Tests
500 single or double-reagent
Automatic or on demand
Automatic or on demand
Automatic execution of related profiles or on demand
Direct reading of 34 cuvettes in non-disposable optical glass
3 known levels and 3 unknown levels
Via modem (optional)
Automatic program
78 total positions; 52 positions for Samples & STAT, 26 for
Standard and Controls
2, for samples and reagents
2 distinct readers for positive identification of samples and
reagents
TIME REQUIRED TO REACH STEADY STATE
Ambient conditions:………………
Time required for the analyzer to
reach steady state:……………….
Ambient conditions:………………
Time required for refrigerated
bottles to reach steady state:……
21 °C R.T., 33% RH
20 minutes
21°C T. A., 33% RH
Approximately 2 hours
CLINICAL CHEMISTRY
Sampling Cycle:…………………..
Analytical throughput:…………….
Approximately 12 seconds
Up to 300 tests/hour single reagent
ISE PROCEDURE
Analytical throughput:……………
Up to 190 tests/h (K+, Na+, Cl- and CO2)
2-4.1.
OPERATING AMBIENT CONDITIONS
The instrument will perform optimally in the following ambient conditions:
CUVETTE OPERATING TEMPERATURE
Programmable Temperatures: OFF, 30ºC, 32 °C, or 37 °C
Precision ± 0,2°C - Accuracy ± 0,2°C
Temperature Monitoring Device based on Peltier Effect
REAGENT CHAMBER TEMPERATURE
Nominal Temperature: Between 5°C and 15°C approx. (depending upon the setting)
Temperature Monitoring Device based on Peltier Effect
OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
18 °C to 32 °C, 10% to 90% RH, Non condensating
Section - II
Technical Specs
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 6
2-4.2.
VOLUMES
WORKING SOLUTIONS
Clinical Chemistry
Reaction Volume:……………………………..
Sample Volume:……………………………….
280 µl minimum - 700 µl max (for double reagent)
From 1 to 100 µl
ISE
Concentrated Buffer Solution:…………….….
Concentrated Reference Solution:…………..
Sample Volume:…………………………….…
Concentrated Buffer 10 ml:………………..….
Concentrated Reference Solution 10 ml:……
Approximately 50 µl + 400 µl (H2O)
Approximately 50 µl + 400 µl (H2O)
30 µl
Approximately 200 tests
Approximately 200 tests
RESIDUAL VOLUMES OF REAGENT BOTTLES
80 ml BOTTLES:……………………………… 2 ml
50 ml BOTTLES:……………………………… 1.5 ml
20 ml BOTTLES:……………………………… 0.6 ml
10 ml BOTTLES:……………………………… 0.6 ml
2-4.3.
ISE MODULE
The ISE Module is designed to utilize solid state Ion Selective Electrodes:
Number of electrodes:………………………. 4 plus Reference Electrode
Analytes:……………………………………... K+, Na+, Cl- and CO2
Analytical throughput:……………………..… Up to 190 tests/h (K+, Na+, Cl- and CO2)
Number of Reagents for the test:………..… 2, Buffer and Reference Solution (concentrated)
Sample Type:……………………………..…. Serum, Urine (Whole)
Minimum Sample Volume:……………….… 30 µl
Concentrated Reagents Dilution:………..… 1/9 with H2O (automatically)
Dilution of Serum/ Buffer:………………..…. 1/14 (automatically)
Precision on Serum test:………………….... +/- 1% for K+, Na+
+/- 2% for Cl+/- 3% for CO2
Precision on Urine test:……………….….… +/- 2% for K+, Na+, ClLinearity for Serum test:……………………. Na+ = 50 - 200 mEq/l
K+ 1 - 20 mEq/l
CO2 10 - 45 mEq/l
Cl = 50 - 400 mEq/l
Linearity for Urine test:……………………... Na+ = 20 - 400 mEq/l
K+ 2 - 200 mEq/l
Cl = 40 - 400 mEq/l
Accuracy for Serum test:
Intra Run Serum (20 samples):………….…
Infra Run Serum (N°20 samples):………....
Accuracy for Urine test:
Intra Run Urine (20 samples):………………
Infra Run Urine (20 samples):………………
Average Life of Electrodes:…………………
Section - II
Technical Specs
Na+ and K+
ClCO2
Na+ and K+
ClCO2
C. V.
C. V.
C. V.
C. V.
C. V.
C. V.
Na+, K+ and ClCO2
Na+, K+ e Cl-
C. V. < 2%
C. V. < 5%
C. V. < 2.5%
Na+ and Reference Electrode
K+
Cl- & CO2
12 months
3 months
3 months
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 6
< 1%
< 2%
< 5%
< 2%
< 2.5%
< 5%
2-4.4.
“UTILITY” EXECUTION TIMES
FUNCTION
TIME
Wash with water…………………..
Wash cuvettes…………………….
Extra wash cuvettes………………
Zeroing on water………………….
Sleep mode wash…………………
FCC Function……………………..
ISE wash………………………….
Shutdown wash (cuvettes & ISE)
Cuvette single wash………………
Needle single wash……………….
Consumption per test…………….
Consumption per ISE test………..
5 minutes
7 minutes
11 minutes
6 minutes
5 minutes
15 minutes
12 minutes
13 minutes
WASHING SOL.
USED (approx)
200 ml
250 ml
500 ml
200 ml
200 ml
300 ml
20 ml
300 ml
6 ml
2 ml
8 ml
10 ml
DEDICATED SOLUTION
USED (approx)
15 ml
15 ml
15 ml
NOTE: stated times and liquid consumptions should be considered only as indicative as they may
vary in different conditions
2-5.
FUNCTIONAL LIMITS
The instrument will not perform correctly in the following situations:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Out of range (defined) ambient conditions.
Use of unapproved chemical products such as Washing Solution, Distilled
Water, and ISE reagents etc.
Non-observance of care and maintenance procedures.
Use of unapproved spare parts and consumables.
The manufacturer does not guarantee the correct instrument performance if new methods are
implemented unexpectedly. Consult the manufacturer regarding application of different methods.
2-6.
CUVETTE TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The cuvette plate is thermally controlled in a very precise way. The solution dispensed in the
cuvette reaches the working temperature in minimal time possible. However, it is possible to
observe a notable time difference due to the potential difference of the temperature of reagents.
Therefore, the heated sampling tube aids in preheating the reagent before dispensing.
The stabilization times of the solution in cuvette range from 80 seconds to 60 seconds with
reagent temperatures at 11°C and 22°C, respectively. The time was measured after the solution
had reached 36.7°C:
Accuracy measured after 2 minutes:
Adjustment measured after 2 minutes:
2-7.
+/- 0.25°C.
+/- 0.20°C.
REAGENT REFRIGERATION
The purpose of reagent refrigeration is for optimal conservation and reagent performance. The
temperature inside the reagent chamber is variable, based on the external ambience and the time
inside the refrigerated chamber. A reagent bottle inside the chamber gradually reaches the
minimum temperature within 2 hours. The temperature range may go from 5°C to 15°C with
outside temperature of 20°C and 32°C, respectively.
Section - II
Technical Specs
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 6
2-8.
DILUTER LINEARITY AND ACCURACY
A unique diluter system is used for the processing of chemistries and ISE testing.
Technical Specifications for the Biotecnica dilutor are as follows:
Diluter:Volume F.S.:…………… 470 µl
Linearity F.S.:………….. +/- 0.1% F.S.
Accuracy at 3 µl:……….. +/- 3%
Accuracy (Full Scale):…. +/- 1% from 10 to 470µl
Reproducibility:………… +/- 0.7% at 3µl; +/- 0.6% > 3µl
Life Expectancy:……….. 3 million operating cycles
Maintenance:…………… Every 300,000 operating cycles (O-ring seal replacement)
Peristaltic Pump:Dispensation Volume:…. Approximately 1ml per sec.
Average Life……………. >1 million cycles
Maintenance:…………… Every 50,000 cycles (Cartridge replacement)
Pinch-Valve:Average Life:……………
Maintenance:……………
Approximately 1 million cycles
Monthly replacement of valve tube
NOTE:
All declared values are approximate and are dependent upon work load of the components,
inactivity, and observance of routine maintenance.
2-9.
PHOTOMETER LINEARITY AND ACCURACY
Optical System……..
Detectors……………
Solid state photometry, (patented by Biotecnica Instruments)
10 UV/VIS photodiodes + reference channel
PRECISION AND ACCURACY
Spectral Response:.. 340, 380, 405, 436, 480, 510, 546 578, 630, 700 nm
Bandwidth:………….. +/- 5nm max (The 700 nm is a Long Pass filter)
Linearity O.D.:……… +/- 1% from 0 to 2,000; +/- 2.5% from 2,000 to 2.400
Resolution:………….. +/- 0.001 Abs.
Drift:…………………. +0.005 Abs. per hour (after warm-up)
Optical path length… 7 mm
NOTE: The specification regarding drift applies exclusively to the photometer, excluding the
drift related to the halogen lamp of the photometer.
2-10.
PHOTOMETER TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP
This lamp is custom made. It is a halogen lamp with dichroic reflector and a special coating for
maximum UV (ultra violet) emission.
Beam Angle: ……………………
Watts: ……………………………
Volts:……………………………..
Avg Rated Life:………………….
9°
35W
12
Approximately 2000 hours
NOTE: For optimal result the lamp can be used for about 1500 hours. The long-term use will result in
the gradual deterioration of the UV emission.
Section - II
Technical Specs
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 6
2-11.
DATA MANAGEMENT
Computer:......................….......
RAM:…………………………….
DVD/CD Rom Player:.......…....
Hard disk:..........................…...
Floppy Disk Drive:.............…...
Monitor:.............................…...
Interface:............................…..
Printer:...............................…..
Mouse & keyboard:...........…...
External Modem:................…..
Error Messages:...............…....
Software:...........................…...
2-12.
Pentium Mobile, > 1.6 GHz or more, IBM compatible
> 256 MB
> 16X
>40 GB
1,44 MB
LCD Display Module TFT 12” with integrated touchscreen
Serial Ports RS232C, USB Ports, LAN, VGA
Ink-jet Color IBM compatible or other
Cordless, IBM compatible.
Optional
Visible (Vocal optional)
Microsoft Windows 2000® PRO (License)
FLUID DYNAMICS
Mixing, Prime, Water H2O Supply, Liquid Sensor Sensitivity, Contamination, Sample Viscosity,
Carry-Over, and Sample Evaporation.
2-13.
WASHING SOLUTION SUPPLY
The analyzer BT3000 PLUS, utilizes distilled water mixed with a surface - active agent (surfactant)
for all the washing and sampling operations. The operator can use any container of desired
dimensions for the washing solution. The container can be positioned at a considerable distance
from the analyzer as a powerful pump is used for constant supply of washing solution to the
additional reservoir of the analyzer.
The maximum permissible connecting tube distance between the analyzer and the water container
is 25 meters horizontally and 6 meters vertically. This data is valid for a flexible plastic tube with
inside diameter of 6 mm max.
2-14.
LIQUID SENSOR
The liquid sensor incorporates a high frequency electronic circuit with functions of capacitive
discriminator.
For this characteristic, the sensor can detect any type of liquid including distilled water with the
same sensitivity. In the normal operating conditions the minimum detectable volume is 100 µl.
The limiting factor necessitates that the container is surrounded by a metallic surface. The
distance of the isolating material from the metal should not be more than 4 mm. However in
different conditions and without the surrounding metallic material around, the analyzer is sensitive
to minimum volumes of 150 µl.
Recently carbon filled plastic adapters (black) have been introduced, which have identical
characteristics to the ones in metal.
Section - II
Technical Specs
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 6
Top View of the BT3000 PLUS
3-2.
Analyzer Structure
REAGENT BOTTLES
REAGENT
CHAMBER
SAMPLING ARM
PHOTOMETER
COMPUTER
MODULE
POWER
SUPPLY
DILUTER
SERUM
PLATE
READING
STATION
SAMPLING
MODULE
CUVETTE
PLATE
ISE
REAGENTS
ISE
MODULE
ISE ARM
3-1.
DILUTER
SECTION - III
ELECTRONICS
The analyzer structure is composed of a heavy-duty sheet metal. The outer casing and covers are
molded in a highly resistant Baydur® material. The preceding figure illustrates the location of
various modules on the analyzer. Each module has a specific function for the analyzer operation.
Section - III
Electronics
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 3
3-3.1.
3-3.4.
3-3.2.
3-3.3.
3-3.5.
3-3.7.
3-3.6.
3-3.
Description of Analyzer Modules
3-3.1.
COMPUTER MODULE
The computer module consists of a LCD monitor, a touch-screen, main-board, power supply, and
peripheral devices.
3-3.2.
Reading Station
The reading station is comprised of a cuvette plate, photometer, diluter, washing station, water
reservoir, and the associated electronics.
3-3.3.
Power Supply Module
The power supply module is the general power source of the analyzer.
3-3.4.
Reagents System
The reagent system consists of the rotating reagent plate, refrigeration system, barcode, and
electronics.
Section - III
Electronics
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 3
3-3.5.
Sampling Module
The sampling system consists of the rotating serum plate, barcode, Vacutainer® sensors, washing
bowls, and electronics.
3-3.6.
ISE Module
The ISE module consists of the electrodes panel, diluter, ISE reagents, and electronics.
3-3.7.
Dual Sampling Arms Module
The dual sample arm modules consists of 2 sampling arms, incorporating electronics with appropriate
Servomotors, and sampling needles.
Note: For detailed description of the preceding modules, refer to Sections VI to XII of this manual.
3-4.
System Electronics
The electronics of the analyzer, with the exception of the IBM compatible computer, is composed of
80C51 micro-controllers. All the modules are defined as intelligent peripherals.
Micro-controller 87LPC764 is programmed to perform process control functions assigned to it as a
slave driver. The master functions are performed by a 552 microprocessor, which communicates with
the main-board of the IBM through RS 232 serial port. The modules communicate between them
through the I2CBUS protocol, established by only two conductors, SCL and SDATA. The wiring of the
instrument is extremely simplified, with the cable connecting various modules has only two wires for
communication and additional wires for power supplies.
The power supply of the instrument is composed of two power supplies of high quality. One power
supply is located inside the computer module and is used for powering the IBM module with its various
peripheral devices. The 5 Volt power supply, in addition to supplying the main-board, is used for
energizing the series of micro-controller modules.
The second power supply, located outside the computer module, is for the supply of voltage to the
power circuits. The three voltage outputs power the following systems:
1. 24V, 8A; variable from 18 to 26 Volts, for refrigerated Peltier groups.
2. 24V, 8A; stabilized the servomotors, solenoid valves, pumps, temperature controls, and fans
3. 12V, 8A; stabilized, for Halogen lamp of photometer
All of the supplies are isolated to enhance digital communication through the opto-electronic devices,
thus greatly reducing the interference, which is typical of direct digital-power circuits communication.
Both of the power supplies incorporate PFC and have a universal input, which ranges from 100 to 240
Volts.
Example of the I2C-BUS Configuration
3-5.
The I2C-BUS uses several microprocessors as shown below:
VDD
RP RP
Microprocessor
Master Logic
Microprocessor
Slave Logic
(Peripheral)
Microprocessor
Slave Logic
(Peripheral)
SDA
SCL
RST
Section - III
Electronics
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 3
Microprocessor
Slave Logic
(Peripheral)
SECTION - IV
SOFTWARE
Important Notice:
Any modification to the Variable Serial Protocol is restricted to qualified personnel only. The
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. guaranties the correct performance of the internal serial protocol.
The responsibility for any malfunction arising out of any modifications to the scripts of the Variable
Serial Protocol rests with the customer.
WARNING
This information regards the setting up of the barcode for sample tubes identification. The reading
of the sample barcode label has the same progression as patient code.
For example: Once a patient code of 15 characters has been entered, then a code of 8 characters
followed by 7 empty spaces to reach the 15 characters is sent.
The code read on the barcode label must have the same sequence 8 + 7 for correct detection.
SERIAL COMMUNICATION OF THE BT3000 PLUS
TO A HOST COMPUTER
4-1.
GENERAL
The analyzers BT3000 PLUS allows bidirectional communication through RS 232C serial
connection with any host computer.
The particular feature of the dialog is that it is always the host computer, which initiates the
communication for either transmitting patient list or for receiving the results.
To initiate any communication the host computer will have to send to analyzer the character STX
(0x02) and expect the character ACK (0x06) as a response. At this point the host computer will
send data to the analyzer and terminate the communication by sending the character EOT (0x04).
It is important to remember that any communication is followed by a response from the analyzer.
It must be noted that if the parameter to be transmitted is shorter in length than the length
requirement of the communication protocol than a space must be added before or after. For
example the analysis have length 4, therefore to send a code GLU one must add a space before
or after to reach the length of 4 characters.
4-2. PATIENT TRANSMISSION
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
Start communication with sequence STX<->ACK
Send patient code.................................................
Send list type for patient insertion.........................
Send type of serum...............................................
Send if the patient is a clone.................................
Transmit position of capsule.................................
Send number of tests to be executed...................
Send codes of tests to be performed....................
Send Check-Sum..................................................
Send end transmission character EOT
Wait for response from the analyzer.....................
(15 characters)
("T" for Routine or "R" for STAT)
("S" for Serum or "U" for Urine)
("Y" for Yes or "N" for No)
("00" unknown)
(from "01" to "99")
(4 characters)
(3 characters)
(2 characters)
If the communication is successful then the analyzer responds with character "Y" followed by a
byte, which identifies the position where patient has been inserted. In case the communication was
unsuccessful, then the analyzer responds with "N" followed by a byte identifying the type of error.
The possible errors generated by the analyzer in response to the invalid insertion of patient are as
follows:
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 13
0x01...........
0x02...........
0x03...........
0x04...........
0x05...........
0x06...........
0x07...........
0x08...........
0x09...........
0x0A..........
0x0B..........
0x0C..........
0x0D..........
0x0E..........
Check-Sum Error
Unknown Command
Routine/STAT field Error
Serum/Urine field Error
Clone Yes/No field Error
Capsule position Error
Number of Analysis field Error
Wrong Number of Test
Position already in execution
Cloning impossible
Code duplicated
One or more analysis not present in the analyzer
One or more analysis not present in the current plate
Too many analysis for the patient
For example to send a patient with code 000000000000001, serum type and with analysis GLU,
BUN and CHO onto the STATS list, then one must send the following sequence of characters
(excluding initial sequence STX<->ACK):
000000000000001RSN0003GLU BUN CHO 134<EOT>
Where:
000000000000001......
R.................................
S.................................
N.................................
00................................
03................................
GLU, BUN, CHO.........
134..............................
<EOT>........................
4-3.
Patient code
Identifies STATS list
Identifies the type of patient (in this case: Serum)
Identifies that the patient is not a clone
Unknown position (the analyzer will insert the patient in a convenient
position)
identifies the number of test to be executed.
Test codes (observe the space after each code to reach the 4
characters limit)
Identifies the Check-Sum
This character ends communication
RESULTS RECEPTION
There are three commands for receiving reports from the analyzer:
R........
L.........
A........
Reception of next available report
Reception of the last report sent (in case of reception problems)
Reception of the first available report (in case one desires to receive again all
the reports)
The commands R, L, and A require standard communication or the procedure STX<->ACK and
the character EOT to end communication.
As a response to one of these three commands the analyzer sends the requested report (if
available) or the character NAK (0x15) if there is no report to be sent.
It must be borne in mind that after a run test the reports are not immediately available for
transmission, as these need validation. To do this go to Utility menu, RS232 and enable the option
"Accept result to be sent". This operation must always be performed after each run test or groups
of run test.
There is also an additional option for performing validation operation automatically. Go to Setup of
the analyzer (Menu Utility, Setup Analyzer), go to the Serial (fourth from the left) and enable the
option "All results must be sent automatically (without validate)" at the bottom of the page.
In case of positive response to the request for a report the analyzer transmits:
Patient code.................
List type.......................
Sample type.................
Number of reports.......
Section - IV
Software
15 characters
"T" for Routine or "R" for STATS
"S" for Serum or "U" for Urine
3 characters
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 13
Patient code.................
List type.......................
Sample type.................
Number of reports.......
15 characters
"T" for Routine or "R" for STATS
"S" for Serum or "U" for Urine
3 characters
For each report:
Analysis code..............
Result...........................
Check-Sum..................
<EOT>
4 characters
7 characters
3 characters
The following is an example of eventual response to the data sent in "Sending a patient to BT
3000 PLUS":
000000000000001RS003GLU 000.000BUN 0010.10CHO 00100.0245<EOT>
4-4.
Where:
000000000000001..
R...................................
S...................................
003................................
GLU...............................
000.000........................
Patient code
Identifies STATS list
Identifies the type of patient (in this case: Serum)
Identifies numbers of reports
First test code
GLU test result
BUN.........................
0010.10....................
CHO..........................
00100.0...................
245..........................
<EOT>....................
Second test code
BUN test result
Third test code
CHO test result
Identifies the Check-Sum
This character ends communication
CALCULATION OF CHECK-SUM:
This procedure calculates a Control code in accordance with the transmitted or received data.
An algebraic sum of ASCII values of all the sent characters is executed. For example the character
"A" has ASCII value 65 - 0x41.
Consequently the module 256 of the found value is executed (balance of dividing the value by
256). This is the Check-Sum to be sent.
4-4.1. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THE SERIAL PROTOCOL
The patients reception has been improved in the following manner:
1)
2)
3)
Code
22
23
24
If a patient is already in the list and is sent again, then the same will be overwritten.
If more patients above the real capacity of the list were sent then these were sent to
the supplementary list of controls. This error has been corrected.
The following errors have been added to the existing list:
Description
A patient has been sent after assigning him a specific position, which is already
occupied.
The patient is already in the list (or has been executed), the Clone field has not been
enabled, but the list of assignment is different in comparison to that of the patient
stored in the analyzer.
The transmitted code belongs to an executed patient but neither the Repetition field
nor the Clone field has been activated.
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 13
4-5.
WIRING DIAGRAM OF INTERFACE CABLE
BT3000 PLUS
BT3000 PLUS
4-6.
VARIABLE SERIAL PROTOCOL
Introduction
The variable serial protocol has been designed to provide the user with possibility to personalize
the transmitted and received data from the analyzer.
The user can transmit or receive in addition to preset data (patient code, analysis code, results
etc.), also the simple text strings and/or characters in order to meet the personal requirements.
Not only the user can decide to send or receive numerical information (for example number of
tests) not as single byte but as a preset numerical string or vice versa.
For example the user can decide to receive something like:
"Initiate analysis data"
<Analysis data true and typical>
"End analysis data"
Where the phrases "Initiate analysis data" and "End analysis data" do not refer to any preset data
by the analyzer but serve only for monitoring communication process (can be useful for inserting
specific markers on those programs which obtain information from text files).
It is obvious that the protocol of initiation and end of communication, the commands for the request
of report, and the analyzer responses in case of error or success remain identical to the usual
preset serial communication.
NOTE:
a)
If a check-sum is omitted in a communication then the analyzer will not control it.
b)
The following numbers have been used to represent the error codes relevant to sending a patient to the
analyzer as regards the parameters not part of the standard serial communication:
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 13
Error Code
1
2
3
4
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Description
Number of invalid analysis
Invalid Data (not through variables)
Invalid Data (through variables)
An analysis variable is outside the SET BEGIN/END relative to
the analysis
The patient is not to be repeated
The field corresponding to the Serum/Urine is different from the
patient in memory
Patients list full
Transmitted list different from the original
A patient has been sent after assigning him a specific position,
which is already occupied.
The patient is already in the list (or has been executed), the
Clone field has not been enabled, but the list of assignment is
different in comparison to that of the patient stored in the
analyzer.
The transmitted code belongs to an executed patient but neither
the Repetition field nor the Clone field has been activated.
Notes regarding Scripts
A script is a text document. Each one of the single commands must each reside in a different line
and be complete. In other words a single command cannot be divided into more lines.
Stringn ‘Name’|$10
-> Valid line
Stringn ‘Name’|$10 char ‘A’ -> Invalid line
Stringn ‘Name
-> Invalid Command
|$10
An editor for writing, modifications, saving and compiling of one or more scripts is accessible inside
the program (setup function). In any case it is possible to write a script with any text editor (DOS or
Windows) like Notepad of Windows or the EDITOR of the DOS. It is not possible to import
documents written with UNIX as the characters used for going to the next line are different from
the ones used by the DOS or Windows.
CAUTION!
If one wants to use the script stored in a removable disk (for example floppy disk) then it will be necessary to copy
it on the hard disk.
TYPE OF DATA
Identifies a single character, can pass as printable character (enclosed between
Character:
single apostrophes), as decimal ASCII value (followed by symbol $) or else
hexadecimal ASCII value (followed by 0x).
If for example we want to identify the character A (decimal value 65 or
hexadecimal value 41) then we can write 'A', $65 or 0x41.
Identifies a sequence of printable characters enclosed in single apostrophes, for
String:
example: 'this is a string'.
Identifies a portion of test (preceded by a character ; which will not be compiled
Comment:
but will serve as note only for the programmer.
These are particular sequence of characters preceded by the symbol #, which
Variables:
will be used by the program for storing internal informations (patient code,
analysis name and etc.), refer to "TABLE 1 - TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION".
There are also variables for direct uses, which allow for identification of any
character below ASCII 32 (space) to facilitate the writing of the script (for
example, one can use the variable #EOT to identify the character $4), see
"TABLE 2 - INTERNAL VARIABLES".
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 13
SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
String:
Identifies a string of variable length ending with a particular character.
Syntax:
String <string>I<Terminator>
Where
<String>
<Terminator>
Transmit/receive string
End character
NOTE:
It is not possible to use the variables like parameter <Terminator>
Example:
String ‘Hello Word’|$0
String ‘My String’|’@’
String #Variable1|0x10
Stringn:
Identifies a string of fixed length
Syntax:
Stringn <String>|<Length>
Where
<String>
<Length>
Transmit/receive string
String length
Note:
If the length of the text strings is less than the data length then a series of spaces will be added on the right to
reach the data preset length. In case the text string is longer than the data length then the string end will be cut off
to match the data length.
If the length of the numerical values is less than the data length then a series of characters '0' will be added to the
left to reach the preset data dimension. In case the length of the numerical values string is longer than the data
length then the string will be truncated to match the data length.
It is not possible to use variables as parameter <Length>.
Example:
Stringn ‘Hello Word’|$40
Stringn #Variable1|0x10
Char:
Identifies a single character (or single byte)
Syntax:
Char <Character>
Example:
Char ‘H’
Char $20
Char 0x10
Char #STX
Set:
Identifies the beginning and the end of the group of repetitive commands
Syntax
Set Begin<Name of group>
Begin repetitive group
Set End<Name of group>
End repetitive group
NOTE:
Actually the ANALYSESDATA is the unique SET present, which identifies
transmission/reception.
Only one command SET BEGIN and one command SET END can be present in a script.
A script must always contain the command SET.
The variable PATIENTNUMBERTEST must be present before the command SET.
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 13
the
analysis
in
COMPILATION ERROR
One or more errors due to incorrect script writing or the system error may show up during
compilation of a script. The compiler shows the error code, the description of error, and the line
where it has been detected.
The following table shows the error codes, description, and the possible causes:
Error Code
Description
1
Unknown command
2
A string request
3
A number request
04
Invalid number format
5
Excessive data
6
7
Invalid data
String Terminator Request
8
Too little data
9
Invalid String Length
10
Empty string
Possible Causes
An invalid command has been inserted in the
commands of script.
A string as first parameter for String or Stringn
command has not been inserted.
A string like parameter <lunghezza> of command
Stringn has been inserted.
Inserted invalid decimal or hexadecimal number.
a) Inserted more than two parameters for command
String or Stringn.
b) Inserted more than one parameter for the
command Char or Set.
A string for command Char has been inserted.
The end (') character of a string not found.
a) Inserted less than two parameters for command
String or Stringn.
b) No parameter inserted for command Char or Set.
The string length for Stringn command is less than 0 or
more than 128.
a) An empty string inserted for the command String or
Stringn.
b) Inserted a character identified as "
a)
11
Unknown variable
12
Damaged file
13
Unknown file
14
Incorrect identifier in the SET
command.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Damaged exit file
SET command not closed
Too many SET commands
SET command not found
Incorrect variable for SET
command
Variable not found before the
SET command
The variable must be String
type
Tried to transfer an invalid variable in the list of
internal variables.
b) Tried to use a transmission variable in the script of
reception or vice versa.
Hard disk error. Contact Sales/Service.
Internal error. Probably damaged program. Reinstall the
program. If the problem persists contact sales/service.
a) The text SET BEGIN or SET END not written.
b) A different value from ANALYSEDATA transferred
as <Group name> for the SET command.
Hard disk error. Contact sales/service.
The SET END not inserted in the script.
More than one SET BEGIN command inserted.
The SET BEGIN command not found in the script.
A different value from ANALYSEDATA transferred as
<Group name> for the SET command.
The highlighted variable required in the script before the
SET BEGIN command.
The highlighted variable must be String type, not Char
An already occupied position on the plate has been
entered
Patient exists but in different An already existing code (or already executed) on the
lists
plate has been entered, but the list is different.
Patient executed but no An already processed code has been entered without
repetition
indicating a repetition or a clone.
Already occupied position
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 13
TABEL 1 – TRANSMISSION
The following variables are used for the transmission of a report from analyzer to the host
computer:
Variable
PATIENTCODE
PATIENTNAME
PATIENTSURNAME
PATIENTGROUP
PATIENTLISTTYPE
PATIENTTYPE
PATIENTNOTE
PATIENTNUMBERTEST
CHECKSUM
ANALYSESCODE
ANALYSENAME
ANALYSESTYPE
ANALYSESCONCENTRATION1
ANALYSESCONCENTRATION2
ANALYSESFLAGS1
ANALYSESFLAGS2
ANALYSESMINVALUE
ANALYSESMAXVALUE
ANALYSESUM1
ANALYSESUM2
ANALYSESUMFACTOR
ANALYSES2RESULT
ANALYSESSERUMTYPE
ANALYSESURINE24H
Usage
Type of valid data
Patient Code
Patient Name
Patient Surname
Group (1)
List (2)
Method Type (3)
Descriptive Note
Number of Results
Check-Sum
Analysis Code
Analysis name
Analysis Type (4)
1st Concentration
2nd Concentration
Flag 1st Result
Flag 2nd Result
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
1st Unit of Measurement
2nd unit of measurement
Unit Factor
Does the 2nd result exists? (5)
Method Type (3)
Urine in 24/h
String
String
String
String Character
String Character
String Character
String
String Character
String Character
String
String
String Character
String
String
String
String
String
String
String
String
String
String Character
String Character
String
(1)
Identifies Male, Female or Child (Select one of these):
‘M’ : Male
‘F’ : Female
‘C’ : Child
(2)
Identifies Routine or STAT (Select one of these):
‘R’ : Routine
‘S’ : STAT
Transmitting patient from archive will always have identifier of Routine.
(3)
Identifies Serum or Urine (Select one of these):
‘S’ : Serum
‘U’ : Urine
(4)
Identifies Clinical Chemistry, ISE Module or Relation Analysis (Select one of these):
‘C’ : Clinical Chemistry
‘I’ : ISE Module
‘R’ : Relation Analysis
(5)
Identifies if the 2nd result exists or not (Select one of these):
‘Y’ : 2nd result exists
‘N’ : 2nd result does not exists
●
●
If only the final result is desired then always refer to variables pertaining to 2nd result.
In case of the absence of 2nd result then its variables will have the same values of the 1st
result.
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 13
TABLE 1 – RECEPTION
The following variables are used for reception of a patient by the analyzer:
Variable
Usage
PATIENTCODE
PATIENTNAME
PATIENTSURNAME
PATIENTLISTTYPE
PATIENTGROUP
PATIENTTYPE
PATIENTURINE24H
PATIENTNOTE
PATIENTISCONTROL
PATIENTCONTROLKNOK
PATIENTCONTROLLEVEL
PATIENTCLONE
PATIENTCUPPOSITION
PATIENTNUMBERTEST
#PATIENTTOREPEAT
CHECKSUM
ANALYSESCODE
Patient Code
Patient Name
Patient Surname
(1)
List
(2)
Group
(3)
Method Type
Urine in 24/h
Descriptive Note
(4)
If the patient is a control
(5)
If it is a known control
(6)
Control Level
(7)
If it is a clone
Vial (Cup) position
Number of test
Patient repetition
Check-Sum
Analysis Code
Type of valid data
String
String
String
String Character
String Character
String Character
String
String
String Character
String Character
String Character
String Character
String Character
String Character
String Character
String Character
String
(1)
Identifies Routine or STAT (Select only one of these):
$0
: Routine
$1
: STAT
‘0’
: Routine
‘1’
: STAT
‘R’
: Routine
‘S’
: STAT
‘ROUTINE’
: Routine
‘STAT’
: STAT
(2)
Identifies Male, Female or Child (Select only one of these):
$0
: Male
$1
: Female
$2
: Child
‘0’
: Male
‘1’
: Female
‘2’
: Child
‘M’
: Male
‘F’
: Female
‘C’
: Child
‘MAN’
: Male
‘FEMALE’
: Female
‘CHILD’
: Child
(3)
Identifies Serum or Urine (Select only one of these):
$0
: SERUM
$1
: URINE
‘0’
: SERUM
‘1’
: URINE
‘S’
: SERUM
‘U’
: URINE
‘SERUM’
: SERUM
‘URINE’
: URINE
(4)
Identifies a Control or a Sample (Select only one of these):
$0
: Sample
$1
: Control
‘0’
: Sample
‘1’
: Control
‘N’
: Sample
‘Y’
: Control
‘S’
: Sample
‘C’
: Control
‘NO’
: Sample
‘YES’
: Control
‘SAMPLE’
: Sample
‘CONTROL’
: Control
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 9 of 13
(5)
Identifies a Known or Unknown Control (Select only one of these):
$0
: Unknown
$1
: Known
‘0’
: Unknown
‘1’
: Known
‘N’
: Unknown
‘Y’
: Known
‘U’
: Unknown
‘K’
: Known
‘NO’
: Unknown
‘YES’
: Known
‘UNKNOW’
: Unknown
‘KNOW’
: Known
(6)
Identifies Control Level (Select only one of these):
$1
: Level 1
$2
: Level 2
$3
: Level 3
‘1’
: Level 1
‘2’
: Level 2
‘3’
: Level 3
‘L’
: Level 1
‘N’
: Level 2
‘A’
: Level 3
‘LOW’
: Level 1
‘NORMAL’
: Level 2
‘ABNORMAL’
: Level 3
(7)
Identifies if it is a Clone (Select only one of these):
$0
: Normal
$1
: Clone
‘0’
: Normal
‘1’
: Clone
‘N’
: Normal
‘Y’
: Clone
‘NOCLONE’
: Normal
‘CLONE’
: Clone
(8)
Identifies if the patient is a repetition or not
#00
: Normal patient
#01
: To be repeated
'0'
: Normal patient
'1'
: To be repeated
'N'
: Normal patient
'Y'
: To be repeated
Note:
It is possible to repeat the patient if:
1) It is not present among the executed patients
2) No free position exists on the plate
3) The patient has already been inserted in the current list
4) The lists of execution are different
5) The Serum/Urine field is different
6) It is also selected as clone
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 10 of 13
TABEL 2 – INTERNAL VARIABLES
Variables
Decimal
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
TAB
LF
VF
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
$00
$01
$02
$03
$04
$05
$06
$07
$08
$09
$10
$11
$12
$13
$14
$15
$16
$17
$18
$19
$20
$21
$22
$23
$24
$25
$26
$27
$28
$29
$30
$31
Hexadecimal
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
0x20
0x21
SCRIPT EXAMPLES
The examples outlined here are the transformation in script of the standard routine of the patient
reception by the analyzer.
Stringn
Char
Char
Char
Stringn
Stringn
#PatientCode|$15
#PatientListType
#PatientType
#PatientClone
#PatientCupPosition|$2
#PatientNumberTest|$2
Set
Stringn
Set
#BeginAnalysesData
#AnalysesCode|$4
#EndAnalysesData
Stringn
#CheckSum|$3
The following are the details of the above Scripts:
#PatientCode|$15
Stringn
Patient Code of fixed length equal to 15 characters
#PatientListType
Char
Type of list (Routine/STAT) as single character
#PatientType
Char
Serum type (Serum/Urine) as single character
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 11 of 13
#PatientClone
Char
Identifies if the patient is or is not a clone (single character)
#PatientCupPosition|$2
Stringn
Position of serum cup (string of fixed length equal to 2 characters)
#PatientNumberTest|$2
Stringn
Number of tests to be executed (string of fixed length equal to 2 characters)
#BeginAnalysesData
Set
Beginning of analysis codes
#AnalysesCode|$4
Stringn
An analysis code of fixed length equal to 4 characters. It must be entered for each
type of test as per qty indicated in the #PatientNumberTest.
#EndAnalysesData
Set
End of analysis codes
#CheckSum|$3
Stringn
Check-Sum (transferred as a string of fixed length equal to 3 characters)
The following examples are the transformation in script of the standard routine for the
transmission of a report by the analyzer to the host computer:
Stringn
Char
stringn
Set
Stringn
Stringn
Set
Stringn
#PatientCode|$15
#PatientType
#PatientNumberTest|$3
#BeginAnalysesData
#AnalysesCode|$04
#AnalysesConcentration2|$7
#EndAnalysesData
#CheckSum|$3
The details of the above scripts are as follows:
#PatientCode|$15
Stringn
Patient Code of fixed length equal to 15 characters
#PatientType
Char
Serum type (Serum/Urine) as single character
#PatientNumberTest|$3
Stringn
Number of results to be sent (a string of fixed length equal to 3 characters)
#BeginAnalysesData
Set
Beginning of zone repeated for the number of results to be sent (see
#PatientNumberTest)
#AnalysesCode|$04
Stringn
An analysis code of fixed length equal to 4 characters
#AnalysesConcentration2|$7
Stringn
Concentration referred to the analysis code as per #AnalysesCode (a string of fixed
length equal to 7 characters)
#EndAnalysesData
Set
End of zone repeated for the number of results to be sent
#CheckSum|$3
Stringn
Check-Sum (transferred as a string of fixed length equal to 3 characters)
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 12 of 13
4-7.
SERIAL COMMUNICATION TEST PROGRAMS
4-8.
PROGRAM COMUNICA.EXE:
A simple communication program for sending command characters to the analyzer and receive
any response.
At the start the only input to the program is the number of the communication port (from 1 to 4).
A blue screen divided into two sections is displayed. In the upper section the characters coming
from the analyzer are displayed, while the lower section displays the characters sent to the
analyzer.
The only special keys used are F1 to clear the screen and F10 for exiting the program.
The special characters (with values less than 32) are displayed in ASCII notations along with their
values.
For example the Character EOT - value 4 - will be shown as EOT (4).
To send a special character (with values less than 32 or higher than 124) it is necessary to keep
pressed the ALT key and simultaneously write the value of the character to be sent using
numerical keys. For example to send EOT it is necessary to keep the ALT key pressed and
simultaneously enter the value 4 through the numerical key and then release the ALT key.
4-9.
PROGRAM BTPLUS.EXE:
A simple communication program that simulates the host computer. At the start it is necessary to
identify the number of communication port (from 1 to 4) and the desired procedure (Transmission
or Reception).
In case the Transmission is selected the program will ask for patient code (from 1 to 15
characters), the test number (from 1 to 9) and the relevant analysis code for each test (for
example: BUN).
It is a good practice to use the same analysis codes, which the analyzer has memorized in the
plate actually in use, if otherwise then an error will result in the transmission phase.
Now the program will execute an initialization procedure of communication with the analyzer, will
send patient data and wait for the outcome of transmission.
At the end the screen will display the outcome of the operation or show the position number of the
plate where the patient has been inserted or explanation of error code sent by the instrument (for
example: Patient Code Duplicated).
If the Reception procedure is selected, then the program will begin initialization of communication
with analyzer, will ask for data of the next report ready for serial dispatch and show data of
relevant downloaded report.
If there are no reports to be received, then a relevant message will be displayed.
Every time the program waits for a response from the analyzer, in case of problem it is possible to
abort the current operation by simply pressing the Esc (Escape) key.
Note:
Both the programs must reside in the computer connected serially to the analyzer through appropriate cable
indicated in the Operators Manual.
The computer must be an IBM compatible equipped with DOS operative system: Windows 95,
Windows 98, or Windows 2000. The operating systems such as MAC, UNIX, Windows ME or XP
are not supported.
Since the programs operate in DOS ambience, therefore in case the Windows operating system is
used then it will be necessary to open a DOS shell (the command Prompts of MS-DOS is found in
the menu Programs, Accessories - accessed through the Start button on the bottom left of the
screen).
Both the programs use serial port with the following setups:
Baude-Rate.......................
9600
Stop-Bits...........................
1
Parity.................................
None
Hand-shake......................
Hardware
Important Notice:
These two programs are in the installation disk under Utility folder.
Section - IV
Software
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 13 of 13
SECTION - V
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF VARIOUS PARTS
REAGENT
MODULE
REFRIGERATION
MODULE
SAMPLING
ARMS
READING
STATION
REAR
PANEL
ACCESS
COMPUTER
BOX
SERUM
MODULE
ISE MODULE
BT3000 PLUS - EXPLODED VIEW
Figure 5-1
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 21
5-1.
ACCESS TO VARIOUS MODULES - INTRODUCTION
The BT3000 PLUS chemistry analyzer requires a series of mechanical adjustments
during the production and assembly process to assure optimal performance. The same
mechanical adjustment procedures that were followed in the production are outlined here
for field maintenance and repair.
The analyzer is based on a modular construction. Each module must be correctly
inserted into its proper location. Any positioning adjustments are facilitated by the large
tolerances on the mounting holes. It is important to check that the sampling arm
movement precisely coincides with all the operating positions. A fine adjustment of
positions can be made through the software. During the production phase of the analyzer,
a special reference mask (jig) is used to correctly position the various modules in their
locations. However, during maintenance and repair, one must take care to operate, step
by step, so as not to alter the original assembly. Therefore, it is strongly recommended
not to disassemble multiple modules at one time. Instead, the modules should be
serviced and calibrated one at a time
5-2.
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SERUM/ISE
SAMPLING ARM
Turn off all power to the instrument before replacing or repairing the sample arm.
Remove the casing and all of the parts necessary to access the arm subassembly (see
Figures 5-2 & 5-3). Disconnect the electrical cable and the liquid heater cable. Unscrew
the liquid line connector from the appropriate diluter. Unscrew the sampling arm
assembly 3 mounting screws. Gently lift the sampling arm module and place it on a safe
location. This operation may not seem simple but the figure here facilitates the removal.
Replace the repaired or substitute sampling arm module in its appropriate location
observing the preceding steps in reverse order.
Arm Head
Needle
Timing Belts
SAMPLING ARM (FRONT)
SAMPLING ARM (REAR)
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Do not tighten the new sampling arm mounting screws to allow for position calibration.
Manually swivel the sampling arm to verify coverage from reagent plate to the cuvette
plate. Also verify if the sampling needle centers the washing funnel and the reading
cuvette correctly by observing the following procedure:
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 21
1)
2)
3)
4)
Manually lower the sampling needle all the way into the washing funnel to verify
that it centers correctly. Gently lift out needle from washing funnel and move it
CCW (counterclockwise) to the cuvette plate.
Align the washing piston with any cuvette on the cuvette-plate, and then carefully
slide downwards the washer body until the piston bottoms into the cuvette.
Locate and mark the position of 12th cuvette by counting anticlockwise starting
from the cuvette adjacent to the cuvette with washing piston.
Move CCW (counterclockwise) and lower sampling arm needle into the 12th
cuvette and verify that it centers correctly. If necessary adjust the whole arm assy
until the needle is centered properly. To verify the correct needle centering
position in the washing funnel, lower again the sampling needle into the washing
funnel. Repeat the funnel/cuvette adjustment procedure for a few times until the
needle centers properly on the washing funnel and the cuvette then finally tighten
the three mounting screws on the arm bracket.
NOTE:
When the sampling arm is substituted or simply removed for service and then reinstalled, it is highly
important to verify the zero position and afterwards check all the other positions observing the
procedure as follows:
a)
Start up the analyzer and let the program bootstrap begin.
b)
During bootsrap press the keys <Alt>, <Ctrl> and <Shift> simultaneously.
c)
Let the bootstrap end (a message "ONLY FOR SPECIALIST" appears on the screen).
d)
Align any cuvette on the cuvette-plate with the washing piston, and then carefully slide
downwards the washer body until the piston bottoms into the cuvette.
e)
Lower the sampling arm needle into the washing funnel and press enter key. Do not touch
the sampling arm; leave it in whatever position it is in.
f)
Enter the mechanical calibration program (icon with gear symbol).
g)
Carefully perform mechanical calibration of all the positions. Do not overlook any position.
h)
Perform a general reset (F5). The arm needle should position itself on the center of the
washing bowl. Verify the correct position.
The function "ONLY FOR SPECIALIST" can also be activated with the instrument already turned on.
Perform a reset by clicking on the icon Ⓡ and press the keys ALT, CTRL, and SHIFT simultaneously
and then repeat preceding steps d) to h).
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
Mechanical calibration procedure for the ISE Arm is the same as above except that the ISE Arm needle is
first centered on the ISE washing funnel (metallic funnel located on the right of the serum plate) and then
moved CCW to any cuvette on the cuvette plate where it centers correctly.
5-2.1. ARM
HEAD
RETROFIT
KIT
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
P/N
07-04438-02
This retrofit kit replaces and upgrades the previous sampling arm head (P/N 07-0443801). It simplifies the routine maintenance procedure. The new arm head installation is
permanent, and only the tube heater assy must be replaced when necessary.
To install the arm head observe the following step-by-step procedure:
1)
Turn off power to the analyzer and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to
avoid electric shock.
2)
Gently disconnect the previous arm head tubing and cable connectors.
3)
Loosen the 3 setscrews on the rear near the (shaft) and remove the arm head.
4)
Unscrew the 2 lateral screws from the new arm head cover and remove cover
(Figure 5-6) from the body.
5)
Carefully place the new arm head body over vertical shaft (Figure 5-4) ensuring
that the locking screw is parallel to the reference slot on top edge of the shaft.
Gently push down the arm head body until level with the top edge of shaft and
securely tighten the locking screw.
6)
Insert the metallic fin into the aperture on the rear of arm head and tighten the
screw (Figure 5-5).
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 21
Reference Slot
Head
Body
Fin
Shaft
Locking
Screw
Figure 5-4
7)
8)
Figure 5-5
Place the cover on the arm head and gently push down to stop. Ensure that the
sample tube is correctly positioned between the metallic fin and the appropriate
slot on the rear of cover. Securely fasten the two screws on the sides of the
cover (Figure 5-6).
Securely connect sample tube and cable to correct connectors.
Cover
Left Sampling
Arm, cut 20
cm from this
tube.
Figure 5-6
Sampling Tube with Needle Holder
P/N 08-05029-01
Figure 5-7
NOTE:
The preceding installation procedure is identical for both the sampling and ISE arms (left arm and right arm in
BT 3000 PLUS). To facilitate production the length of sample tube (single plastic tube adjacent to the
electrical connector - Figure 5-7) is identical in both the arms. It is necessary to reduce the length of the
plastic tube of left arm head (for clinical chemistry sampling) by about 20 centimeters prior to connecting it to
the diluter. The length of tube of right arm head (ISE sampling arm) remains unaltered. In the analyzers BT
1000 and BT 2000 PLUS (without ISE sampling arm) the tube length of sampling arm head must be reduced
by 20 centimeters (Figure 5-7) as already outlined
9)
10)
It is mandatory to perform calibration of positions with the standard service
procedures. This operation is necessary because of possible variations during
installation.
It is mandatory to perform the calibration of volumes using appropriate
procedure. This procedure is necessary because the vertical position of needle
may result to be slightly displaced with respect to the previous version of
sampling arm.
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 21
Final testing:
After terminating the installation procedure, test the system as follows:
a)
Verify that the new arm head is firmly secured to the shaft (Fig. 5-4, 5-5 and 5-6). Try to
rotate the head after holding the shaft stationary. Head should not move, if otherwise
then firmly tighten the locking screw.
b)
Touch with finger the sampling needle, instantly the red LED at the bottom of arm head
lights and projects a beam downwards.
c)
Let few minutes pass and then touch the needle holder, it should feel warm (heated).
d)
In the program of calibration services repeat the verification of positions and eventually
correct them.
Now the new arm head has been correctly installed. Any future maintenance will be much easier
as the only part subject to wear and periodic replacement is the "Sampling Tube with Needle
Holder" P/N 08-05029-01 (Figures 5-7 & 5-11), which also incorporates the supply voltage leads
for powering the arm head system. The "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" kit integrates
sampling needle, needle holder, sampling tube with heating circuit and appropriate connectors.
Additional Informative Photographs:
Arm Head (Top View)
Arm Head (Bottom View)
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Arm Head (Side View)
Figure 5-10
Sampling Tube with Needle Holder
P/N 08-05029-01
Figure 5-11
5-2.2. SAMPLING TUBE WITH NEEDLE HOLDER
P/N 08-05029-01 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
In the arm head the only part subject to wear and periodic replacement is the
"Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" P/N 08-05029-01 (Figure 5-12), which also
incorporates the supply voltage leads for powering the arm head system. The
"Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" kit integrates sampling needle, needle
holder, sampling tube with heating circuit and appropriate connectors.
To install the arm Sampling Tube with Needle Holder observe the following stepby-step procedure:
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 21
Cover
Left Sampling
Arm, cut 20
cm from this
tube.
Figure 5-13
Sampling Tube with Needle Holder
P/N 08-05029-01
Figure 5-12
Disconnect
Tube & Cable
Figure 5-14
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Figure 5-15
Turn off power to the analyzer and unplug the power cord from the wall
outlet to avoid electric shock.
Loosen (do not remove) the 2 lateral screws from the arm head cover and
carefully remove cover by sliding upwards from the arm head (Fig.5-13).
Gently disconnect the previous "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" tubing
and cable connectors (Figure 5-14). Note that the ISE ARM (on the right
side) cable and tubing connectors have different locations.
Loosen (do not remove) the screw (Figure 5-15) on the needle clamp.
Carefully disconnect tube (Figure 5-16) from the arm head and remove the
defective "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" (Figure 5-17).
Correctly install the new "Sampling Tube with Needle Holder" on the arm
head and firmly secure the needle holder by tightening the clamp screw
(Figure 5-15).
Place the cover on the arm head and gently push down to stop. Ensure
that the sample tube is correctly positioned between the metallic fin and the
appropriate slot on the rear of cover. Securely fasten the two screws on the
sides of the cover (Figure 5-13).
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 21
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-17
NOTE:
The preceding installation procedure is identical for both the sampling and ISE arms (left arm and right arm in
BT 3000 PLUS). To facilitate production the length of sample tube (single plastic tube adjacent to the
electrical connector - Figure 5-12) is identical in both the arms. It is necessary to reduce the length of the
plastic tube of left arm head (for clinical chemistry sampling) by about 20 centimeters prior to connecting it to
the diluter. The length of tube of right arm head (ISE sampling arm) remains unaltered. In the analyzers BT
1000 and BT 2000 PLUS (without ISE sampling arm) the
tube length of sampling arm head must be
reduced by 20 centimeters (Figure 5-12) as
already outlined
5-2.3. ARM CONTROLLER BOARD “L” 15-04765-01 KIT
P/N 11-05248-01 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
(The reference communication is ECN No. 132 dated 12th Jan. 2005)
CAUTION!
It is recommended the analyzer be switched off and the power cord unplugged from the wall outlet prior to
removing the access covers or servicing.
NOTE:
Illustrated instructions may not be the exact representation for the analyzer due to possible design
modifications.
Fig. 5-18
Fig. 5-19
1) Carefully lift off the ISE Module and gently remove the I/O fluid tubes
(Fig. 5-18).
2) Carefully remove the ISE solutions container and the container support
from the ISE compartment(Fig.5-19).
3) Unscrew the 4 socket head cap screws (on the left and right sides) near
the ISE and reagent covers (Figures 5-20 & 5-21).
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 21
Fig. 5-20
Fig. 5-21
Fig. 5-24
Fig. 5-23
Fig. 5-22
4) Take out the cylindrical container (Figure 5-22) and carefully remove
analyzer base cover by gently pulling back as shown in Figure 5-23.
5) Disconnect tube and cable connector of Arm.
6) Unscrew 3 socket head screws, which secure the Sampling Arm located
on the left of analyzer (Fig. 5-24) and lift off arm by slightly tilting it.
Fig. 5-25
Fig. 5-26
7)
Remove the 4 screws that attach the Arm Controller Board to the arm
drive subassembly (Fig. 5-25).
8) Firmly secure the new Arm Controller Board, and verify the presence of
correct microcontroller - µC (Fig.5-26)as follows:
• µC3-ARM-C-XX (P/N 30-05055-01) on the "Angular Position Encoder
Board" P/N 15-04767-01 (board with two encoders).
• µC3-ARMCM-XX (P/N 30-05055-02) on the "Angular Position
Encoder Board" P/N 15-05234-01 (board with one encoder).
9) To reassemble, replace the screws, cables and covers, following the
disassembly procedures in reverse order. Always check all screws for
tightness.
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 21
5-3.
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE REAGENT MODULE
The repair or replacement of the reagent module is relatively complex because of the
necessity to remove many parts before the extraction of whole module. It is important to
turn off power to the analyzer before any repair or replacement. After the repair or
replacement, no mechanical re-calibration is necessary. However, there is the possibility
that the sample arm may require an angular position adjustment through software
program.
The following situations may require service personnel intervention:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Replacement of one or more Peltiers
Replacement of the transmission belt
Replacement of the drive motor
Replacement of the temperature or Hall sensors
For these operations, refer to disassembly procedure and associated photos.
5-3.1. REPLACEMENT OF REAGENT PELTIER MODULES
This operation requires the removal of the front body, computer box, and the front cover.
Refer to the photo sequence in the disassembly procedure. Disconnect all of the
connecting cables, unscrew the 4 mounting screws securing the Peltier module and
remove the module. Turn it upside down and carefully place it on a surface. Unscrew and
remove the two heat sinks. Now, observe the exposed group of Peltiers and the electrical
connections soldered to a PCB. Check for the defective or interrupted Peltier using the
Ohmmeter.
Bear in mind the difficulty of instrumental measurement because of the emission of
residual energy produced from the Peltier. The use of a digital tester may provide a faulty
measurement. It is recommended to verify the inconsistency of an average measurement
rather than the absolute value that is, in theory, approximately 2 Ohm per Peltier.
Generally, a defective Peltier presents a partial interruption with values of some 10
Ohms, which are sufficient to drastically reduce the current flow in the series of Peltiers,
therefore generating a diminished performance of the refrigeration group.
Unsolder the leads of the defective Peltier, unscrew the 2 screws on the metallic disc
securing the Peltier element and remove it. Substitute the damaged Peltier with a new
Peltier module using thermal grease for dissipation. Make sure to take into account the
proper polarity (see Figure 7-1 in Section VII). An incorrect assembly may affect the
system performance. Carefully tighten the screws ensuring that these are not overtightened so as to avoid damage to the ceramic elements of the Peltier. After assembling
all of the devices, it is important to recalibrate the temperature control.
5-3.2. REPLACEMENT
OF
TRANSMISSION BELT
THE
REAGENT
PLATE
For this operation, it is necessary to remove the case, computer box, and the front cover.
Remove the round refrigeration chamber (in aluminum) by unscrewing the 16 mounting
screws. Observe the photo sequence for disassembly details. Loosen the screws of drive
motor assembly plate, located on the top left corner, and slide it slightly inward to loosen
the belt. Remove the damaged belt and replace it with a new belt.
To reassemble, follow the preceding steps in reverse order. Carefully slide the motor
plate outwards to the left to provide the correct tension and tightness to the belt, and then
tighten the mounting screws.
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 9 of 21
5-3.3. REPLACEMENT OF REAGENT PLATE DRIVE MOTOR
The removal operations are similar to the above "Replacement of the Reagent Plate
Transmission Belt". The motor is secured to the plate through 4 screws.
5-3.4. REPLACEMENT OF THE REAGENT TEMPERATURE AND
HALL SENSORS
The removal operations are similar to the "Replacement of the Reagent Plate
Transmission Belt". Two fixing screws on one side secure the rectangular PVC housing of
Hall sensor. The sensor requires precise positioning to correctly couple with the magnet
on the drive pulley. The Hall sensor assembly must come close to the transmission belt,
which interposes between the magnet and the Hall sensor at a maximum distance of
1mm almost grazing the same belt.
The temperature sensor is housed in a rectangular metallic container, which is closely
secured to the bottom of the circular aluminum reagent chamber with a single screw
accessible from the top of the chamber. The Replacement of the temperature sensor
does not require any particular care, except that the two parts must be joined perfectly by
properly tightening the screw. No temperature verification or calibration is necessary.
5-4.
REPAIR/REPLACEMENT - READING STATION MODULE
It is possible to access nearly all the parts of the reading station module for the
maintenance and the repair. The analyzer must be turned off prior to repair or
Replacement. Only in the case of the Replacement of Peltiers (located at the bottom of
module). It will be necessary to remove this module. The following components are easily
accessed without removal of the module:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Replacement of the Peltier
Replacement of Halogen lamp
Replacement of all the tubes of the hydraulic circuit
Replacement or maintenance of diluter
Replacement of washing piston
Replacement and inspection of reading cuvettes
Replacement of photometer
5-4.1. REPLACEMENT OF THE CUVETTE PELTIER
For the Replacement of the Peltiers it is necessary to remove the 3 mounting screws (see
Figure 5-32 entitled "Reading Station - Bottom View") To facilitate the removal of a screw
located inside, it is necessary to remove the front cabinet. It is important to disconnect all
of the cables and tubing before removing the station.
Each Peltier group contains a fan and heat sink and is securely attached with 4 screws to
the base of the station. Coat the new Peltier surface with a thin layer of thermal grease
and secure it to the base of the reading station with 4 screws. Tighten the mounting
screws until they are snug, ensuring that the pressure is applied uniformly. Do not overtighten otherwise the Peltier may get damaged. Ensure leads' polarity is matched
correctly. The incorrect assembly of the Peltier can cause serious malfunction of the
thermostatic system.
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 10 of 21
4
3
1
2
Replacing the Halogen Lamp
Figure 5-27
5-4.2. REPLACEMENT OF THE HALOGEN LAMP
Precautions for handling the halogen lamp:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Always allow the burnt out lamp to cool down.
Never touch the reflector or the lamp with bare fingers. Use a rag when changing.
If the lamp is touched inadvertently during installation, clean the lamp or reflector with alcohol and
dry with a clean, soft cloth before burning. Contamination of the lamp or reflector may reduce lamp
performance.
It is recommended to initially burn the new lamp for about 30 minutes before analyzer operation.
LAMP
LAMP
Rear
Cover
LAMP REMOVAL (Rear Cover)
LAMP REMOVAL (Front Shutter)
Figure 5-28
Figure 5-29
Disconnect the input power before servicing. The replacement of the Halogen lamp can
be done by the removal of the rear panel, or by sliding the transparent shutter front panel
and then removing the access cover from the deck (Figures 5-28 & 5-29).
Release the lamp assembly by gently sliding downwards. Loosen the front screws ❷ in
the socket ❸ and remove the burnt out lamp ❹.
Insert a new halogen lamp fully into the socket and firmly tighten the screws to secure the
lamp. It is recommended to slightly press both of the lamps retaining spring clips ❶
before fitting the lamp. Slide the lamp assembly onto the light cone and orient the lamp
socket in the vertical position as shown in the Figure 5-29.
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 11 of 21
5-4.3. REPLACEMENT OF HYDRAULIC TUBES
There are three tubing and accessory kits for maintenance. A "Quarterly Maintenance Kit"
(P/N 11-05338-01, Figure 30A) for ISE tubing (replaces Bimonthly Maintenance Kit P/N
662.1016), "Six-Monthly Maintenance Kit" P/N 11-05337-01 (Reading Station Figure 30A)
for special tubes exposed to wear and tear, including pump cartridges etc. for an over-all
maintenance, and an annual maintenance kit: "Vacuum Pump Annual Service Kit" P/N
11-05339-01 (for noncurrent Vacuum Pump System P/N 662.0788 and by-products refer to Section 012, Para 12-2.15.1.).
When installing any tubing kit, it is important that the hydraulic circuit is empty. To avoid
any undesired liquid spills, disconnect the external water input before applying any
maintenance kit. Turn on the instrument and perform a washing cycle to evacuate all
liquid in the hydraulic circuit. When changing tubes, follow the illustrative diagrams
(Figures 5-30, 5-30A) on the next pages.
5-4.3.1.
PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBING INSTALLATION
The Biotecnica peristaltic pump uses special tubing with bonded collars (colored). A
correct installation (avoid twisting and kinking) will promote the best possible tube life, so
please ensure that the following guidelines are followed:
1) Remove old peristaltic tubing and discard it.
2) Select the appropriate tubing and insert one of its fixed collars into one of the
appropriate grooves on the pump bracket.
3) Lay the tubing around the pump rollers and stretch the tubing slightly (must not
exceed 1 centimeter max of stretching) and insert the other fixed collar into the
second groove on the collar bracket.
Fixed Collar
1 cm max
Stretching
CAUTIONS:
Groove
Peristaltic Tube
Pump Bracket
a) During installation the tubing should
be stretched slightly (must not exceed
1 centimeter of stretching) to avoid
peristaltic tubing failure or poor tube
life through permanent elongation.
b) Be sure that the tube is not at all
twisted when you place it around
the pump rollers. Twist in the tube
may prevent pumping.
c)
Pump Rollers
PERISTALTIC PUMP
ASSEMBLY
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
To prevent emergency service,
schedule
peristaltic
tube
replacement at regular intervals as
outlined in the manual. Thus,
peristaltic tube replacement during
regularly
scheduled
preventive
maintenance is a must.
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 12 of 21
4
7
2
1
3
6
Washer/Diluter - BT 3000 PLUS
(Reading Station)
NOTE:
4
KITS P/N 662.1016, 11-05219-01 AND
11-05220-01 TABULATED BELOW HAVE
BEEN REPLACED BY THE KITS
11-05337-01, 11-05338-01 SHOWN ON
THE NEXT PAGE 14 OF 21.
5
HYDRAULIC TUBES AND ACCESSORRIES
Figure 5-30
ITEM
QTY
1A
5
6
7
2
1
1
1
ITEM
1
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
ITEM
1
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
QTY
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
ISE Module
BIMONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 662.1016)
DESCRIPTION
Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube ISE
Interconnection Tube for GND/Bypass OR CO2 Electrode
ISE Pump Tube
REF - K Tube Manifold
SIX MONTH MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05219-01)
DESCRIPTION
Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube
Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube ISE
Aspiration Tube for Washing Module
H2O Tube for Washing Module
Peristaltic Pump Cartridge
Interconnection Tube for GND/Bypass OR CO2 Electrode
ISE Pump Tube
REF - K Tube Manifold
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05220-01)
DESCRIPTION
QTY
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1A
Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube
Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube ISE
Aspiration Tube for Washing Module
H2O Tube for Washing Module
Peristaltic Pump Cartridge
Interconnection Tube for GND/Bypass OR CO2 Electrode
ISE Pump Tube
REF - K Tube Manifold
Tubular Filter for Water Container
Sampling Needle
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 13 of 21
4
2
7
1
3
6
Washer/Diluter - BT 3000 PLUS
(Reading Station)
4
CURRENT
MAINTENANCE KITS
5
1A
HYDRAULIC TUBES AND ACCESSORRIES
Figure 5-30A
ISE Module
SIX-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05337-01) # BT 3000 PLUS
(KIT MANUTENZIONE SEMESTRALE cod. 11-05337-01 #BT 3000 PLUS)
ITEM (POS.)
QTY (QTA)
1
1A
2
3
4
-
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
DESCRIPTION (DESCRIZIONE)
Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube
Diluter/Pinch Valve Tube ISE
Aspiration Tube #Washing Module
H2O Tube #Washing Module
Peristaltic Pump Cartridge
Tubular Filter for external water container
Sampling Needle
QUARTERLY MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05338-01) # BT 3000 PLUS
(KIT MANUTENZIONE TRIMESTRALE - cod. 11-05338-01 #BT 3000 PLUS)
ITEM (POS.)
QTY (QTA)
5
6
7
-
1
1
1
1
Section - V
DESCRIPTION (DESCRIZIONE)
Interconnection Tube #GND/Bypass OR CO2 Electrode
ISE Pump Tube
REF - K Tube Manifold
Peristaltic Pump Tube Warning Notice
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 14 of 21
5-4.4. REPLACEMENT OR MAINTENANCE OF DILUTER
Even though it is unlikely that the diluter will require Replacement, its removal for service
is quite simple. Turn off all power to the instrument before servicing. The diluter is
secured through 4 screws on its flange and one cable connector for electrical circuitry.
The maintenance involves yearly cleaning of the piston and the transparent Plexiglas
chamber. To perform maintenance disconnect the fluid tubing. Unscrew the 2 screws
located on the front of the diluter Plexiglas chamber and carefully remove the Plexiglas
chamber exposing the piston. Clean the piston with a soft lint-free cloth. Wash the
Plexiglas chamber and the inside of the O-ring with distilled water. After cleaning, gently
replace the chamber onto the diluter drive. Firmly secure with the 2 screws.
The O-ring (P/N 330.5703) must be substituted every 300,000 cycles. Prior to O-ring
installation, make sure that all surfaces are free of dust, dirt and the like.
5-4.5. REPLACEMENT OF THE WASHING PISTON
Turn off the analyzer prior to replacing the washing
piston. Push the washing piston carriage fully upward to
facilitate the piston removal. Remove all of the silicone
tubes. Gently unscrew the piston from the plunger stem
by turning clockwise (Fig. 5-31). In case of difficulty
(slippery piston, etc.), use the Piston Grip (Fig. 5-34) or
lint-free cloth to improve the grip. Fit the new piston and
finger-tighten firmly by turning counterclockwise until it
is properly seated against the thread shoulder.
Reposition the carriage into its original position. Attach
all tubing to the appropriate connectors.
5-4.6. REPLACEMENT
CUVETTE
OF
WASHING PISTON
READING
Washer Module
It may become necessary to remove the cuvette wheel
Figure 5-31
in order to inspect or replace damaged cuvettes.
Generally this operation is necessary when the following malfunctions occur:
a) Water is present on the cuvette wheel
b) Accidental dropping of foreign matter into the cuvettes
c) Accidental damage of one or more cuvettes
Turn off the analyzer. Push the washing piston carriage fully upward to aid in the cuvette
wheel removal. Unscrew the 6 screws from the cuvette wheel and carefully lift out. Use a
gentle oscillating movement, if necessary, while exercising extreme care to prevent any
damage to the cuvettes. Inspect the cuvette wheel, rotor, and housing for the presence of
any liquid. Clean and dry if necessary. Afterwards, diagnose the cause of the problem.
Do not wash the cuvettes as this operation will result to be complex because of the use of
only distilled water to avoid calcareous build-up. Perform the washing after the cuvette
drying or substitution by using appropriate analyzer functions. The foreign objects or
physical debris inside the cuvettes can also be removed by turning the cuvette wheel
upside-down.
Another solution for cleaning cuvette (analyzer must be turned on) is to use the aspiration
tube of the washing piston (on top of the washing plunger) by inserting it all the way into
the cuvette for few seconds and then manually rotate the cuvette wheel to move to the
next cuvette for cleaning.
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 15 of 21
When replacing the cuvette wheel, position the small guide hole in the cuvette wheel that
coincides with the locating pin on the cuvette rotor.
Gently push the cuvette wheel downward onto the rotor. Fasten the cuvette wheel
securely by screwing the 6 socket head screws back onto the cuvette rotor. To ensure
that pressure is applied uniformly, first tighten all of the screws finger-tight and then
tighten them in a crosswise pattern. Do not use excessive force. Gently push downward
each cuvette until it bottoms against the depth of the rotor. Attach any disconnected
tubing to the appropriate ports. A thorough washing procedure should be performed
through the analyzer program before any testing is performed on the analyzer.
NOTE: Another efficient method for cleaning the cuvettes may be used without removing the cuvettes
plate from its original position. Disconnect the aspiration tube located on top of the washing piston
carriage and insert it into the bottom of the cuvette for few seconds to aspirate any dirt or
contaminants. Repeat this procedure after manually rotating the cuvette wheel to clean off the
desired cuvettes. The high power suction produced by the vacuum pump will quickly eliminate any
dirt or contamination.
CAUTION: It is required that a complete FCC procedure be performed after replacement of one or
more cuvettes. If the removal and replacement of cuvette wheel required no replacement of cuvettes,
only the "zeroing" procedure is required.
5-4.7. PHOTOMETER REPLACEMENT
The box containing the photometer module is mounted on the underside of the base plate
of the light source. Turn off the power to the analyzer before replacing the photometer.
The photometer module can be easily removed by unscrewing the 4 mounting screws on
the base plate. The new generation photometers (since July 2004) are equipped with an
additional connecting cable (having a pare of male/female connectors) for the Reference
Channel (Figure 5-32).
Caution: It is required that a complete FCC procedure be performed after replacement of the
photometer.
5-5
INTRODUCTION TO THE COMPUTER BOX
The LCD Display module (Figure 5-36), with fully integrated touch-screen, is on the front
of the computer box. An on/off switch for the analyzer is located on the bottom left of the
display. The peripherals, CD-ROM player and the floppy disk drive are accessed through
a cover just below the display.
All of the connections to the external peripheral devices are located on the rear of the box
as follows: Parallel port, USB Ports, Serial-Ports, and PS/2 ports for Keyboard & Mouse
The ASUS main-board with a 1 GHz Intel Pentium® III (or more) processor, 128 Mb (or
more) RAM, DVD/CD-ROM player, 10 Gb (or more) hard disk, floppy disk drive, and the
power supply are all located inside the computer box. Product enhancement resulting
from new innovations in technology and from our continuing quality improvement effort
may necessitate changes in this configuration in the future. However, any eventual
changes will be fully compatible with the previous version. A connecting cable composed
of lead conductors of the serial port and the 5-Volt supply interconnects the computer box
and the process electronics.
5-5A
COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD
The Computer Box consists of a LCD display monitor incorporating touchscreen. The
system power on/off switch is located to the left of the monitor. The DVD-ROM and the
Floppy-Disk access door is located below the monitor.
All of the connections to the external peripheral devices are located on the rear of the box
as follows: Parallel port for the printer, Serial-ports, USB ports, PS/2 ports for keyboard &
mouse, CRT port, LAN ports, and Audio port.
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 16 of 21
The following components are located inside the Computer Box:
Mainboard with1 GHz Intel Pentium® III (or more) processor, 128 Mb (or more) RAM,
DVD/CD-ROM player, 10 Gb (or more) hard disk, floppy disk drive, and the power supply.
This configuration is subject to variation because of continuous technological evolutions.
A connecting cable composed of lead conductors of the serial port and the 5-Volt supply
interconnects the computer box and the process electronics.
The Figure 5-37 shows the entire computer box assembly.
5-5.1. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF THE COMPUTER BOX
First, remove the 2 mounting screws on the rear to access the internal parts of the
module. Now, it is possible to open the box from right to left so that the rear of the box is
exposed to the service engineer. One can observe the DVD player, floppy disk drive, and
the hard disk inside the lower opening on the rear of the box.
The following different operations are required for the removal and Replacement of each
particular device:
1) Hard Disk: Remove the mounting screws on the supporting bracket and dislodge
the hard disk driver.
2) DVD & Floppy Disk: Unscrew the appropriate screws on the underside of the box
and remove the DVD or floppy-disk drivers. It is also necessary to remove the
plastic front panel of the LCD display module.
3) Main-board and Peripheral Devices: The main-board (motherboard) is secured to
an "L" shaped metallic bracket. Remove the 4 mounting screws on the rear and
extract the slide. With this operation, it is possible to access the main-board and
all the peripheral devices.
4) TFT-LCD Display Panel:
Remove the plastic front panel. Unscrew the 4
screws on the corners, securing the display, and remove the LCD display panel.
5) Power Supply:
The power supply of the computer is located in the upper
section of the box. To remove the power supply, it is necessary to extract the
supporting bracket of the main-board and then remove the 4 screws securing the
omega shaped metallic bracket.
5-5.1.1.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE
The computer box of analyzer BT3000 PLUS and by-products is designed for long-term
security and reliability and is virtually maintenance-free as long as the user does not
install any third-party application programs. If these applications are installed, then they
may damage the operating system registry and may also cause disastrous consequence
for a computer's hard-drive.
5-5.2. 8-WIRE ANALOGUE RESISTIVE TOUCH-SCREEN
To remove the touch-screen, it is necessary to use a fine blade for lifting away the glassbacking panel from the display. The touch-screen is secured to the LCD panel with a very
fine double-sided adhesive tape.
It is important that the glass-backing panel is precisely centered. Ensure that the active
area of the touch-screen matches the active area of the display. When mounting the
touch-screen, carefully observe the four angles marked on the perimeter as a point of
reference for facilitating the application. The new touch-screen is already equipped with
double-sided adhesive tape.
If necessary, replace the touch-screen driver. It is important to install the driver found on
the CD provided with the new touch-screen monitor. For application, refer to Section XIV,
Paragraph 14-2. Entitled "Computer Module Trouble-Shooting".
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 17 of 21
Cable of
Reference
Channel
Reading Station - Bottom View
Figure 5-32
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 18 of 21
Funnel Cap Opener
(Manutenzione Tappo Imbuto)
P/N 90-05036-01
Serum Plate
(Piatto Sieri)
Funnel
(Imbuto)
FUNNEL CAP OPENER
Figure 5-33
Washing Piston
(Pistone)
P/N 20-05110-01
Grip Sleeve
(Manicotto)
P/N 662.1025
Cleaning Tool
(Specillo)
P/N 03254
Washing Piston Removal & Cleaning
Washing Piston Kit P/N 662.0610
The washing piston (in Teflon) may have occluded holes. Turn off the analyzer prior to changing the
piston as follows:
1) Push the washing piston carriage fully upwards with the thumbs
2) Gently unscrew the washing piston from the plunger stem by inserting the supplied "Grip Sleeve" or
abrasive paper of fine mesh (to avoid slipping) and using light finger pressure clockwise.
3) Clean small holes on the side of the piston using the supplied "Cleaning Tool".
4) Fit the cleaned piston and finger tighten firmly by turning counterclockwise until properly seated
against thread shoulder of the plunger stem. Use "Grip Sleeve" to tighten
Figure 5-34
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 19 of 21
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Figure 5-35
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 20 of 21
Touchscreen
LCD Display
Module
Serial
Board
Cabinet
External
Monitor
Fan
PS/2 Ports for
Keyboard &
Mouse, USB Ports
Power
Supply
Asus
Mainboard
ON/OFF
Switch
Floppy Disk
DVD ROM
Player
Hard Disk
COMPUTER BOX
FIGURE 5-36
LCD DISPLAY
CASING
COMPUTER BOX
WITH INDUSTRIAL
MAINBOARD
FIGURE 5-37
DVD-ROM PLAYER
FLOPPY DISK
SWITCHING
POWER SUPPLY
INDUSTRIAL
MAINBOARD
FAN
HARD DISK
Section - V
Repair or Replacement
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 21 of 21
SECTION - VI
READING STATION
6-1.
GENERAL
The Reading Station is a composite system comprehending the following devices:
1) Heated rotor assembly for reading cuvette.
2) 10-channel stationary Photometer module with additional reference
channel
3) Halogen lamp with dichroic reflector for photometer
4) Stationary cuvette drum with integrated Peltier-based (heating/cooling
element) thermostatic control.
5) Fluidic system consisting of Water (H2O) reservoir, diluter, and washer.
6) Electronic circuits located on the rear of Reading Station
The above-mentioned devices are illustrated in the Figure 6-1 below.
Liquid Sensor
Peristaltic Pump
Water Reservoir
Diluter
Pinch-Valve
Cuvette
Rotor
Assembly
Halogen
Lamp
Pinch-Valve
Washer
Light
Cone
Cuvette
Drum
Quartz
Prism
Photometer
Reference
Channel
READING STATION
Figure 6-1
Section - VI
Reading Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 8
Reference
Channel
Peltier Module,
Heatsink and
Ventilator
PCB Reading
Plate Interface
Drive
Mechanism
READING STATION - BOTTOM VIEW
Figure 6-2
6-2. PHOTOMETER MODULE
The Biotecnica photometer (Figure 6-1) is a patented product and it consists of a small
metallic enclosure containing 10 photometric channels. Each channel has its own
interferential filter, photo diode, and amplifier. Each amplifier has a dedicated trimmer for
gain adjustment as illustrated in the schematic 15-04649-01. The channels amplification
is factory calibrated to adapt the signal levels to the manufacturing tolerances of various
optical components (photodiodes, interference filters etc.). The light beam enters through
the unique port in the photometer enclosure, and after passing through a series of beam
splitters, it reaches all the ten channels simultaneously. The reason for this approach is
the instantaneous processing of numerous signals.
Reference Channel
The reference channel is not inside the photometer box but it is located nearby externally.
It is an amplified photodiode embedded in the cuvette drum (see Figure 6-1 and Figure
6-2) with its cable connected to the photometer for processing by the multiplexer circuit
and A/D converter.
The reference channel provides stability to the transmission signal when the photometric
system is used in the monochromatic mode. When the photometer is selected in the
bichromatic mode e.g. 340/700nm, the reference channel is not utilized as the same
function is accomplished by the 700nm channel.
The Light path
The photometer lamp transmits light beam, which converges on the center of reading
cuvette, and then through the cuvette it is reflected into the photometer module by the 90º
quartz prism located inside the cuvette drum (see Figure 6-1). A small quantity
(approximately 2%) of light flux is captured by the reference photodiode prior to the light
passes through the cuvette.
Section - VI
Reading Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 8
6-2.1. REACTION CUVETTE OPERATING PRINCIPLE
The light is transmitted through the light cone, into the reaction cuvette, and then reflected
into the photometer module by the quartz prism located inside the cuvette system housing.
The UV specific optical glass transparent cuvettes allow transmission of wavelengths down to
340nm. The function of the photometer module is to monitor and measure the color variations
or absorbance values, between different reaction mixtures over a wavelength range from
340nm-700nm. After a reaction cuvette has passed a photometer measuring position and the
reaction mixture has been analyzed, the cuvette moves on towards the washer module where
the single piston drains, rinses, and dries the reaction cuvette for re-use.
6-2.2. LIGHT SOURCE
The photometer light source consists of a 12 Volt, 35 Watt tungsten halogen lamp with
integral dichroic reflector for the dissipation of infrareds. The lamp is secured through the
lamp retaining spring clips on the light cone for easy removal or substitution (see Figure 6-1).
This custom made, UV enhanced, halogen lamp provides a high radiation output in the
340nm UV range throughout its operating life of approximately 2000 hours.
The lamp efficiency is controlled by the analyzer, which detects the radiation insufficiency at
405nm when the optical transmission goes below the 50% of original emission level. Bear in
mind that the acquisition of 100 % is memorized when the "SETLAMP" procedure is
performed after replacing with new lamp.
6-3. READING CUVETTE SYSTEM
The consistent mass of the aluminum cuvette rotor allows for maintenance of temperature
uniformity throughout the 34 cuvette wells (Figure 6-3). The stationary cuvette drum in
aluminum encompassing the cuvette rotor integrates Peltier modules, which thermostatically
maintain the selected temperature. The Peltier modules, relative heat sinks, and the cooling
fans are affixed on the underside of the cuvette drum as shown in the Figure 6-2.
CUVETTE
CUVETTES PLATE
CUVETTE DRUM
ROTOR
MAGNET AND
HALL SENSOR
PELTIER
HEAT SINK
STEPPING MOTOR
FAN
CUVETTES SYSTEM
Figure 6-3
The selected temperature is maintained to within ± 0.1ºC at the base and ± 0.2ºC in the
cuvette wells. The stationary part and the moving part are tightly matched with 0.2mm
spacing in-between. However there is a thermal gradient between the two parts, which makes
it necessary to perform accurate temperature calibrations. The regulation of cuvette
temperature is highly simplified through the software. However it requires an appropriate
thermometer for calibration adjustments. The calibration procedure is outlined in the Section
XIII, paragraphs 13-2. and 13-2.1.
Section - VI
Reading Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 8
PERISTALTIC PUMP
LINEAR ACTUATOR
LIQ. LEVEL SENSOR
WATER RESERVOIR
DILUTER PUMP
DILUTER PINCH
VALVE
WASHER PINCH
VALVE
READING
STATION PVC
PANEL
WASHER
WASHING PISTON
DILUTER/WASHER MODULE
Figure 6-4
6-4. DILUTER AND WASHER MODULE
The upper part of the reading station consists of a PVC panel (Figure 6-4.), which accommodates
the following devices:
1) DILUTER: A 470 µl (Full Scale) diluter pump providing the analyzer with high precision,
reproducibility, and reliability. The stepper motor and the photo-sensor cable is
connected to the Master Power Board (15-04209-01) on the rear of the PVC panel.
2) PINCH VALVE: A pinch valve, peristaltic pump and sample needle, which complete the
sampling system as described in detail in Section VIII entitled, "Sampling Station". The
cuvette washer module positioned in a similar manner to the previous version used on
BT 2000/3000.
3) WASHER MODULE: The washer module utilizes a bi-directional, linear actuator-based
stepper drive mechanism to provide the washing piston carriage rapid linear movement
in up/down directions. The piston has a central bore, three equal openings on the
external hemisphere, and a tapered body for improved cleaning, emptying, and drying of
the cuvettes.
A photo-switch is provided for reset and standby position. The actuator stepper motor
and the photo-switch cable connects to the Master Power Board (15-04209-01) located
to the rear of the PVC panel. These are all managed by the microcontroller µC764.
4) TUBING & CONNECTORS: Most of the in/out fluid tubing has "quick-connect"
connectors that incorporate shut-off valves to facilitate the removal of the reading station
without liquid spills.
5) WATER RESERVOIR: A water reservoir of 55ml capacity has a transparent porthole
and an internal liquid level sensor, which emits yellow light when the fluid reaches the
maximum level. The membrane pump located on the rear of the reading station PVC
panel refills the reservoir. The washing water from the external water supply tank is
aspirated through a transparent tube connected to the rear right side of the analyzer.
A filter attached to the transparent tube in the water supply tank and an additional filter
on the intake of membrane pump removes undesired corpuscles. In case of liquid level
sensor malfunction an emergency overflow tube connected on top of the water reservoir
discharges liquid into appropriate container outside the analyzer. The liquid level sensor
cable is connected to the Master Power Board (15-04209-01), where the microcontroller
(µC 552) monitors the pump through the feedback control with the sensor.
6) PERISTALTIC PUMP: The peristaltic pump is dedicated to supplying the washing water
from the water reservoir to the fluidic circuit, which consists of diluter, pinch-valves,
sampling tube and the sampling needle. During the washing cycle, the pump dispenses
a necessary quantity of water, which flows through diluter, sample tube, sampling
needle, and then finally ends up in the funnel for discharging.
Section - VI
Reading Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 8
6-4.1. DILUTER OPERATING PRINCIPLE
PCB 15-05021-01
Photoswitch
Input/Output
Ports
Linear Slide
DILUTOR
Figure 6-5
Piston
Linear Stepping Motor
It consists of a ceramic piston driven by a linear stepping motor inside a transparent thermoplastic
chamber. It is high-resolution device, which allows fluid displacement of 1/10th of microliter per
step. A driver circuit operating in micro steps actuates the stepping motor. The zeroing of the
piston is realized through photoswitch and a miniature metallic shield. The electro-mechanical
system moves to and fro on a linear bearing slide.
The diluter module is connected to the control electronics on the "Master Power Board" P/N 1504209-01 (located on the rear of the reading station) through a 8-pin connector cable.
The diluter aspirates and dispenses fluid when the pinch-valve is in the closed position. The
washing of the proper fluidic circuit is performed with the pinch-valve in the open position. In the
latter case the peristaltic pump on the right of the diluter is activated to supply the washing water
from the water reservoir to wash the diluter chamber, tubing, and the sampling needle. The
washing water finally ends up in the funnel located on the analyzer deck for discharging.
6-4.2. NEW “NO-PINCH VALVE” (Excerpt from Technical Bulletin No. 9, May 2006)
This component also is being installed from June 2006 onwards.
The new No-Pinch Valves are maintenance-free and the tubes connected to these valves will not
require substitution. However to simplify the in-house processing the current tubing kits have not
been modified. The use existing pinch-valve tubing on the new no-pinch valve will simply require
cutting it into two pieces of appropriate length. Also the tubing maintenance alert messages
(generated by the actual software) should be given consideration only in presence of old pinchvalves. The future software versions of the maintenance program will be modified to distinguish
the type of valves (pinch-valves or no-pinch valves) present in the analyzer.
A kit consisting of electrically compatible new no-pinch valve is available for substitution on the
instruments equipped with previous pinch-valve (will become obsolete after they are out of stock).
The new valve kit will be necessary only in case of damaged or defective valve. If however one
wants to reduce the instrument maintenance, it is suggested to at least substitute the pinch-valve
located below the water reservoir for cuvette washing (see Figure 2). The tubing inserted in this
pinch-valve is subject to failure after prolonged inactivity or wear & tear due to high vacuum level
of washing procedure.
Diluter
Water
Reservoir
NO-PINCH VALVE
Figure 6-5A
No-Pinch Valve #Diluter
P/N 11-05350-01
NOTE: This P/N is also
valid for ISE Diluter
Section - VI
Reading Station
No-Pinch Valve
#Washer Module
P/N 11-05349-01
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 8
LINEAR
ACTUATOR OF
THE WASHER
LINEAR STEPPING
MOTOR OF THE
DILUTER
MASTER LOGIC
BOARD
15-04211-01
MASTER POWER
BOARD
15-04209-01
MEMBRANE PUMP
FOR THE WATER
SUPPLY TO WATER
RESERVOIR
READING STATION - REAR VIEW
Figure 6-6
6-5. ELECTRONICS FOR THE READING STATION SYSTEM
The entire electronics of the reading station, excluding the photometer, is integrated in two
boards located on the rear of its PVC panel: the Master Power Board (15-04209-01) and the
Master Logic Board (15-04211-01). See Figure 6-6.
6-6.
MASTER LOGIC BOARD (15-04211-01).
This board (Figure 6-6) can be considered the heart of the electronic system. This board
accommodates the master microprocessor with a high capacity RAM and EPROM. The
bootstrap of the process program for all of the satellite microcontrollers is executed in this
RAM. This software is resident in the hard disk and can be modified if needed. Another
µC764 is resident on this board and, together with µP552, processes an analog digital signal.
Observing the schematic carefully, the µC552 utilizes the UART for communicating with the
IBM through the MAX232 (U7) via the RS232.
The same µP552 utilizes two analog inputs for reading the temperature of the cuvette plate
and the vacuum level of the vacuum pump system. The U8A temperature chip and U8B
pressure chip amplify the analog signals of the sensors. The µC764 is dedicated to the control
of cuvette plate motor and the linear actuator of the washer module. The U2 chip is a
Programmable Array Logic (PAL) device programmed for generating the complex quantity of
logic gates used for interfacing the photometer preamplifier with the µP552. The µC764 also
uses this gate for connecting to the Master Power Board (15-04209-01) described below.
The U3 chip is an isolated DC/DC converter, which powers the photometer preamplifier. It
regulates +5 Volt DC input voltage into a ±12 Volt DC output voltage.
Section - VI
Reading Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 8
6-7. MASTER POWER BOARD (15-04209-01)
The Main Power Board (Figure 6-6) is the densest board of the analyzer. It accommodates all
the devices required to control the stepping motors, valves, etc. for the reading station.
However, for practical reasons, another µC764 has been inserted to provide temperature
control and regulation for the cuvette plate.
The circuit consists of a comparator connected to the temperature sensor, which is inserted
into the bottom of the cuvette housing. The U8 comparator output, along with the U5 chip,
regulates the switching which generates a variable voltage in the terminals of the Peltier
modules. One section of the comparator controls a relay for inverting the polarity when the
ambient temperature requires momentary cooling of the cuvettes system.
The process just outlined produces a relatively coarse temperature regulation of
approximately ±1°C. The fine regulation of ±0.1°C is performed by the software implemented
in the µP552. When monitoring the temperature of the sensor, the above-mentioned
regulator allows a continuous adjustment of the selected temperature.
6-8. INTERFACE BOARD (15-04270-01)
The ISE sampling arm heater, the cuvette motor, Peltier modules of the reading station
system and their cooling fans, the Hall sensor, and the temperature sensor are all connected
to the Interface Board (Figure 6-2). A bi-color LED indicator is also located on this board to
visualize the hot/cold status.
NOTE:
The Master Logic Board, Master Power Board, Photometer, Halogen Photometric Lamp, Diluter Pump, Peristaltic
Pump or any other device on the reading station can be simply accessed through an appropriate cover on the rear
panel. This access cover has been designed into the system for facilitating the inspection and maintenance
operations. After receiving the information from the central processing unit (IBM), the integrated electronics make
the module an independent intelligent peripheral.
6-9. THE 10-CHANNEL PHOTOMETER
The Biotecnica 10-channel photometer (Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-7) is a discrete device and
has ten channels with interference filters. Each channel has an independent filter, photodiode,
and amplifier. The unique optical system provides for simultaneous illumination of all of the
channels. The electronics circuit is capable of communicating and acquiring signals from 2
channels for bi-chromatic reading.
The 10 amplifiers and as many diodes are visible on the schematic (Figure 6-7). Each
amplifier is equipped with a trimmer for gain regulation. The gain adjustment is necessary for
adapting the signal level to the manufacturing tolerances of optical components. The two
multiplexers, U6 and U7, and their outputs that are connected to the inputs of two A/D
converters, U8 and U9, establish the simultaneous selection of two channels. The conversion
is serial type. The digital impulses pass through the U10 Gate (74LS132) with Smith trigger
function. The two multiplexers are addressed by the µC764 (master logic board) with 4-bit per
multiplexer. The electronic circuit of the photometer is powered by ±12 Volts for the analog
circuits and +5 Volts for the digital circuits. A 16-conductor flat cable is used for connecting
the photometer to the master logic board.
The calibration of each channel is performed in reference conditions (usually at the factory).
The following requirements must be observed for the calibration procedures: clean and
transparent cuvette filled with distilled water, new halogen lamp, and sufficient warm up time.
The diagnostic program can be used for verification and any correction, if necessary. Each
channel must generate an output signal between 4 Volts and 10 Volts (theoretical). The
voltage values are not visible in the diagnostic program, but the integration values are
equivalent if the conversion factors are assumed as reference. In practice, the integration
values should be between 14,000 and 28,000 points for all of the channels. This range takes
into account the tolerances necessary for different lots of lamps and their related exhaustion.
In addition an external photodiode acting as Reference Channel (Figure 6-2) has a range
(unadjustable) of 3000 to 16000 points.
Refer to the diagram of "10-Channel Photodiode Array Photometer" on the next page.
Section - VI
Reading Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 8
SEMI-REFLECTING
MIRRORS
LIGHT-BEAM
INPUT
REFLECTED
LIGHT
INTERFERENCE
FILTERS
PHOTODIODE
DETECTORS
10-Channel Photodiode Array Photometer
Figure 6-7
6-9.1.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE PHOTOMETER
Optics:
Interference Filters:
Photodetectors:
Electronics:
Ten (10) static channels with semireflective mirrors (beam splitters),
with a light input angle of 90°.
340, 380, 405, 436, 478, 510, 546, 578, 630nm at a 8nm hbw and
700nm long wavepass.
Silicon photodiodes for UV and visible detection 310nm-700nm. In
addition a photodiode for reference channel (Figure 6-2).
Ten (10) multiplexed amplifiers and A/D conversion with 22-bit
resolution. The photodiode of reference channel is embedded in the
cuvette drum (Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2.
6-10. FCC PROCEDURE
The FCC (Cuvette Correction Factor) function is essential for correcting the optical path of the
cuvette, which in any case does not exceed the tolerance of ± 3%. After introducing the potassium
bichromate solution in each cuvette and reading the relevant absorbance, the software creates a
correction factor for each cuvette based upon average absorbances. As final result one obtains an
equivalent response in absorbance better than 99%.
The FCC procedure is necessary every time one or more cuvettes are substituted.
After the termination of FCC cycle, the analyzer system sets the transmission of all the
cuvettes at 100%.
Prior to activating the FCC function, prepare reference solution with 4.3 grams of potassium
bichromate powder in 1000 ml of H2SO4 0.1 N. Afterwards dilute this solution 1/100 with H2SO4 0.1
N. The absorbance measurement for this product is 400 units at 340nm. The interference filters
340/700nm are used for the test. During the FCC process the system performs: washing, zeroing,
introduction of bichromate solution, absorbance readings, and the creation of correction factors.
Once the FCC is completed, the system presents simultaneously the absorbance values of all the
cuvettes before correction and the percentages of corrections. The program generates a FCC
error if one or more cuvettes require a correction of more than 3%. In this case, it is recommended
to repeat the FCC procedure to exclude any possibility of other causes. If necessary, substitute the
cuvette.
Section - VI
Reading Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 8
SECTION VII
REAGENT SYSTEM
7-1. GENERAL
The reagent module system incorporates an appropriately insulated reagent chamber (in
aluminum) for reagents refrigeration. The reagent chamber accommodates the rotating reagent
plate (divided into sectors) where trays with wedge-shaped reagent bottles are inserted. Each
reagent tray (removable) can accommodate 5 large wedge-shaped reagent bottles (50ml or 80ml)
snap-fitted with 5 smaller reagent bottles (10ml or 20ml), for a total of 80 reagent bottles.
Two large heatsinks with eight (8) Peltier assemblies are affixed to the underside of the reagent
module. A cross-flow blower located near the heatsinks, removes the air towards outside. An
electronic circuit in feedback with temperature sensor regulates the electronic current of Peltiers
and ventilator, thus realizing the temperature monitoring system. A stepping motor driven beltdrive/pulley mechanism provides rotary motion to the reagent plate.
The temperature uniformity throughout the reagent chamber is maintained at approximately 12ºC.
The temperature inside the reagent chamber is maintained constant up to 26ºC of ambient
temperature. Any increase beyond this ambient temperature value will consequently increase the
reagent chamber temperature considerably.
7-2. REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER - 15-05211-01
(Valid from July 2004 onwards)
The board 15-05211-01 is mainly dedicated to the barcode scanner, stepping motor, temperature
monitoring, and the reset sensor for the reagent plate.
It consists primarily of a µC U3 87LPC767, which controls the actuation of stepper motor
connected to the connector J3.
The stepping motor provides rotary motion to the reagent plate accommodating reagent trays with
reagent bottles. The isolation between the driver A1 (power constituent) and the µC U3 (digital
element) is obtained through the optoisolators U4 and U5 (TLP2630).
The µC U3 (with gates P1.0 and P1.1) and the integrated circuit U6 control the signals from the
barcode module connected to J5.
The Hall sensor is connected to the board through J4. The reagent plate resetting occurs when
the Hall sensor is face to face with its magnet located in the reagent pulley.
The refrigerator temperature control is accomplished through the comparator U7A (MAX492). The
voltage present at pin 1 of the comparator reaches the gate P0.4 of U3 and its value
corresponding to the reagent plate temperature determines the amount of voltage to be supplied to
the Peltier and as well as turning on or off the cross blower fan.
The U7B part of the comparator is dedicated to the control of the safety interlock sensor connected
to J6. This sensor stops the plate movement when the reagent access cover is opened.
The gate P0.7 of µC U3 sends the command bit of optoisolator U8 (TLP521-1). A low logic level of
P0.7 determines the simultaneous opening of the MOSFETs Q1 and Q2 (BUZ111S) and the
consequent inhibition of the peltier modules of the refrigeration system.
The gate P1.6 of U3 controls the high velocity optoisolator U9 (6N136). This optoisolator drives the
digital potentiometers PD1 and PD2. The potentiometers through their ohmic variation determine
the Peltier supply voltage value. An approximate voltage of 26VDC corresponds to the higher
cooling capacity and the approximate voltage of 16VDC corresponds to the lower cooling capacity.
The power supply is interfaced through the connector J2. The NTC1 sensor protects the reagent
controller module against overheating. The high temperature inside the module (>70ºC) produces
a voltage variation on the gate P0.6 of U3. The intervention threshold is fixed at 4.5V. During the
alarm condition the Peltier modules are disabled and an alarm message is displayed on the
analyzer screen.
The gate P0.0 of U3 drives the optoisolator U11 (TLP521-1). The low level logic of P0.0
determines the opening of the transistor Q3 and the power off to the cross blower ventilator. The
operating logic turns the cross blower fan ON or OFF when the reagent plate reaches the preset
temperature (±0.5º) in the analyzer setup to avoid ice formation in the reagent plate with ambient
temperature up to +12ºC (values beyond the operating range).
Section - VII
Reagent Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 5
The glowing LED (DL5) indicates the activation of cross blower fan.
This board, compared to the previous board, has the advantage of functioning also when the
analyzer is in the standby mode, without any supply voltage from the IBM.
The supply voltage for the µC 767 is realized on board through a DC/DC converter, which is
powered by the same source that energizes Peltiers. The temperature sensor is connected to the
gate A/D of the 764 for reading the value in ºC. The temperature monitoring system is controlled
digitally by regulating nominal 24V in the range of 16V to 28 Volts.
Below a certain temperature (approximately 5ºC), it is not possible to further reduce the current of
the Peltiers. Therefore to control the temperature, the operation of cross-blower fan is interrupted
for the time necessary to reset the selected temperature. The temperature is selected in the
instrument setup and the temperature can be set between 5ºC and 15ºC. The set temperature is
maintained reagent chamber base to a tolerance of +/-2°C as long as the ambient temperature
does not exceed the 26ºC. Beyond 26ºC it is possible to have a considerable increase in the set
temperature. If the µC reads a temperature higher than approximately 40ºC, then it interrupts the
current to the regulation circuit assuming that there is a problem in the system. For example a
defective or damaged fan or an exceptionally high ambient temperature (40ºC) may generate an
excessive temperature in the reagent chamber. One can observe in the electrical schematic the
NTC near the power connectors. It has the function of heat sensor, which may be produced by
false contacts in the connections or some other problems in the printed circuit board. In this case
the MOSFET Qx interrupts the Peltier current, when the temperature in the interested zone is
approximately 70ºC.
7-3. REAGENT PLATE CONTROLLER - 15-04313-03
(OBSOLETE - used on Analyzers up to June 2004)
This module designed for reagent plate management is housed in an easily removable metallic
container. The electronic devices on this board have the following functions:
a) Reagent plate drive motor control.
b) Zero position sensor control.
c) Reagent plate temperature control.
d) Barcode reading and interface.
This module is located on the rear of the reagent chamber and is easily accessible for service or
repair through the small panel on the rear of the analyzer.
The Reagents Plate Controller Module (15-04313-03) is controlled by µC87LPC764. This microcontroller manages the stepper motor through two opto-couplers, U3 & U4, which isolates the
power driver A1 from the digital circuit.
The µC764 receives signals from the barcode module through the U5 chip (Max 232). The
reagents chamber temperature is controlled through a U6A comparator and the Q1 transistor. The
control temperature is fixed at about 5°C by using the remote control of the power supply (Lambda
Alpha 400W). The J2 connector connects the power supply to the controller circuit of the reagent
plate. The Q2 transistor functions as a switch to interrupt power supply to the Peltiers through the
µC764 (pin 14) whenever requested by the software. The circuit for the control of the Peltier
voltages has an additional function of interrupting power to the refrigeration system in case the
temperature inside the reagents chamber exceeds 40°C. The circuit, which generates this
function, consists of a U6B comparator and an U7 opto-coupler. The Hall sensor (zero position),
temperature sensor, and the Peltier modules are all located under the reagent chamber.
7-4. REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
The reagents refrigeration system comprises reagents chamber, refrigeration module with the
Peltier modules, conductive spacers, and heat sink, along with the reagent pulley drive assembly.
Section - VII
Reagent Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 5
Peltier Modules
Refrigerator
Interface Board
Insulation
Block
Terminals
Soldering
Details
Heat Sink
Reagent Refrigeration Module
Figure 7-1
7-5. REAGENT & SERUM BARCODES
The available codes for sampling procedure are in the memory in blocks of 5 codes. To insert a
new block (5 codes) it is important to import data using a floppy disk. The following blocks are
available at the present:
CODE39, CODE39 FULL ASCII, CODABAR, CODE128
EAN128, CODE93, PLESSEY, PHARMACODE, EAN13
UPCA, UPCE, EAN13 AddON2, EAN8 AddOn2, UPCA AddOn2
UPCE AddOn2, EAN13 AddOn5, EAN8 AddOn5, UPCA AddOn5, UPCE AddOn5
Reagent Barcode
The main objective of the reagent bottle barcode is the positive identification of the bottle to avoid
position error.
However the barcode can be used only with specific labels produced by the manufacturer of the
reagents.
The installation of the instrument can be configured in the following three different modes of
operation, in agreement between the manufacturer of the analyzer, the reagent supplier and the
client:
1)
2)
3)
Use of reagent bottles without barcode, independent use.
Use of reagent bottles with barcode (analysis code), only for positive identification
of the bottle.
Use of reagent bottles with complex barcode, use of reagents bound by
purchasing agreement.
This mode allows for a barcode with customized reading key. The instrument
doesn't accept bottles having unknown and incoherent barcode symbols, thus
preventing the execution of the tests. The applied algorithm provides for the
analysis code, serial number, type of bottle and the date of expiry of content. The
improper modification of any one of these parameters invalidates its applicability.
There is also a built-in prevention against refilling of previously identified bottle.
NOTE:
Exclusively the Director General of the company manufacturing the analyzer releases additional
informations.
Section - VII
Reagent Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 5
Detent Mechanism
Reagents Tray
Reagent Chamber
Motor Plate
Timing
Belt
Drive
Motor
Reagent Pulley
Barcode
Module
Temp. Sensor
Hall Sensor
Peltier
Module
Heat Sink
Conductive
Spacer
Cross-Flow
Blower
Refrigerator
Interface
Board
REAGENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW
Figure 7-2
REAGENT MOTOR
CONNECTOR
REAGENT
MOTOR
WHITE-BLU
BLUE
WHITE-RED
RED
REAGENTS DRIVE MOTOR
Figure 7-3
Section - VII
Reagent Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 5
Power
Supply
Reagent Temperature
Peltiers,
Air Blower
I2CBUS
Reagent
Hall Sensor
Reagent
Barcode
AUX
Reagent
Motor
REAGENT CONTROLLER MODULE
Figure 7-4
Section - VII
Reagent Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 5
SECTION - VIII
SAMPLING STATION
8-1.
GENERAL
The removable sample plate is protected by a transparent dust cover with various apertures for the
sampling needle entry during operation. The sample plate can be placed in any position because
the home position will automatically be recognized once the reset has been activated.
The primary tubes can be inserted without removing the plate. Place the tube in the position
indicated by the flashing red LED. An optical sensor will differentiate the primary tubes from the
cups used for the samples. A barcode reader automatically identifies the position and the data
concerning the sample.
The two sampling arms are located on the right side of the analyzer deck. On each sampling arm
the stepper motor belt driven mechanism causes the needle to move in up and down linear
motion. Another stepper motor drive a belt driven pulley mechanism which swivels the sampling
arm to the right or left positions across the deck to position the sampling needle for the aspiration
and dispensing procedures.
The left sampling arm can position the sampling needle for aspiration, dispensing, and mixing on
the reagent chamber, serum plate, reaction cuvettes, the wash funnel, and the "home" position.
The right sampling arm can position the sampling needle on the sample tubes of serum plate, ISE
reagent bottles, ISE funnel, and the wash funnel and the "home". It also positions the sample
needle over reaction cuvettes for aspiration, dispensing, or mixing.
Both arms have a built-in facility for the pre-heating reagents through special heating tube. They
also have the capability to measurement of the remaining reagent volume in the bottles through a
built-in liquid level sensor through an Arm Liquid Sensor Emitter (15-05023-01). All other devices,
including, the diluter, peristaltic pumps, pinch valves, serum plate drive motor, sample arm drive
motors, liquid temperature control circuits, and the electronics, are housed inside the analyzer.
The stepper motor for the angular motion of the arm, can generate high frequency oscillations for
mixing. The rapid angular movements providing efficient high frequency oscillations of the
sampling needle, which when immersed in the cuvette can mix the dispensed fluids. The entire
module is an intelligent peripheral slave, which autonomously performs the sampling procedures
after receiving information from the Master Logic Board.
Sensor LED
Sample Needle
SAMPLING ARM WITH HEATER
Figure 8-1
8-2.
SAMPLING ARM MODULE
The sampling arm module is an electro-mechanical system for provides the sampling needle with
vertical (up/down) and angular (swiveling) motion. The Arm Controller Board (15-04765-01)
containing a micro-controller for actuating the stepper motor and is located on the lower section of
this module, near the vertical drive mechanism. The liquid sensor circuit is located inside the
needle head.
Section - VIII
Sampling Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 7
8-2.1. ARM CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04765-01)
The arm controller board is the basic circuit for controlling arm movement. The µC764 controls the
power to the A & B dual-driver for the sampling arm up/down & swivel motions through the optocoupled gates. The "home" or zero position of the sampling arm is realized through a photo-switch
and shutter on the base of the motorized shaft mechanism. An additional sensor module is located
at the upper section of the drive mechanism.
ISE Arm (Right)
Sampling Arm (Left)
SAMPLING ARM MODULE
Figure 8-2
Setscrews
LED
Arm Head
Controller
Board
15-04765-01/02
Needle
Timing Belts
SAMPLING ARM (FRONT)
SAMPLING ARM (REAR)
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
Section - VIII
Sampling Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 7
8-2.2. ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER BOARD (15-05023-01)
It is a microcontroller 764 based small electronic circuit board located inside the arm head. The
8Mhz oscillator of µC764 is used for realizing amplitude modulation of signal transmitted from
needle.
The variation of amplitude generated by the needle contacting liquid is controlled and converted by
the µC764 in a chain of 40Khz impulses through infrared LED and simultaneously the red Led
indicator at the underside of the arm head provides visual repetition of the infrared LED. The circuit
is powered by the 5 Volt generated by a low-dropout linear regulator, which obtains the voltage
from the downstream of supply line coming from the reading station. No calibration is required for
this circuit.
8-2.3. ISE SAMPLING ARM MODULE
The ISE sampling arm module is identical to the preceding sampling arm description. It consists of
a drive mechanism, stepper motors for the angular and up/down motions, the Arm Liquid Sensor &
Emitter Board (15-05023-01), ISE electronics, and arm controller board. Refer to Figure 8-2
entitled "Sampling Arm Module", for the technical information.
8-3.
THE SERUM MODULE
The serum module is made up of the stepper motor drive mechanisms for serum plate movement,
electronics, primary tube sensor with electronics, ISE sensor and electronics, and the Serum Plate
Controller Board (15-04422-01).
The new design of the serum module integrates the entire sampling system into a single module
with the following features:
a) Autonomous testing of the module before incorporating into the analyzer
b) Compact hydraulic circuit providing stabilized flow efficiency
c) Hydraulic circuit hidden from view for safety
d) Technical assistance facilitated by the ability to substitute components with other tested
sampling modules
8-3.1. SERUM PLATE CONTROLLERS
The serum plate controllers are a group of various electronic circuits applied to the removable
sampling module. The main controller circuit is housed in a metallic container located near the
serum chamber. The additional circuits are firmly secured to the rim of the serum chamber. These
electronic circuits perform the following functions:
a) Control of the serum plate stepper motor
b) Acquisition and management of the barcode data of the serum plate
c) Control of the Hall sensor for "home" or zero position
d) Control of sensors detecting primary tube sensor presence
8-3.2. SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04422-01)
This board housed in a metallic container accommodates the µC764, which controls the serum
stepper motor through the U4 and U5 opto-couplers, and the A1 driver. The barcode data is
acquired and processed through the U3 MAX232 chip. The module receives the data from the Hall
sensor at the zero position, connected to J2, as well as the signals from primary tube sensors
incorporated in their independent circuits located on the left and right of the serum chamber.
Section - VIII
Sampling Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 7
SERUM
PULLEY
SERUM
CHAMBER
PRIMARY TUBE
SENSOR (LEFT)
BASE
PLATE
WASHING
FUNNEL
WASHING
FUNNEL
DRIVE
BELT
HALL
SENSOR
SERUM
MOTOR
BARCODE
MODULE
PRIMARY TUBE
SENSOR (RIGHT)
SERUM MODULE - TOP VIEW
SERUM
CHAMBER
BALL - BEARING
HEAD
BASE
PLATE
SERUM
PULLEY
SERUM
MOTOR
SERUM MODULE - FRONT VIEW
SERUM MODULE
Figure 8-5
8-3.3. LEFT SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR
BOARD (15-04280-01)
This supplementary circuit is located on the left of the serum chamber. It accommodates a
noninvasive infrared detector housed in a PVC body, for the detection of the primary tube. This
circuit board is connected to the Serum Plate Controller Board (15-04422-01) through the J1
connector, passing through the another supplementary circuit board on the right. Close by, there is
a Hall sensor module connected to the Serum Hall Sensor Board (15-04282-01) on the serum
plate, which is connected by the J2 connector, to the Serum Primary Tube Sensor Board (1504280-01).
The Hall sensor uses the Smith trigger, while the primary tube sensor uses the U2A-B amplifier in
the A.C mode. The emitter LED EM1 is impulse-driven through the U1C oscillator.
Section - VIII
Sampling Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 7
8-3.4. RIGHT SERUM PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR
BOARD (15-04278-01)
This supplementary circuit is located on the right of the serum chamber. This circuit is identical to
the one outlined in the preceding paragraph, but without the control for the Hall sensor. For
operating characteristics, refer to the preceding paragraph. The J2 connector attaches to the
identical board on the left. The J1 connector interconnects these two identical boards through a flat
cable to the Serum Plate Controller Board (15-04422-01).
BOARD 15-04422-01
I2C BUS
SERUM BAR-CODE
I2CBUS
SERUM MOTOR
VACUTAINER SERUM "R"
8-4.
SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER MODULE
Figure 8-6
BARCODE SCANNER
This is a high quality laser scanning & CCD module (Figures 8-5, & 8-7). It is connected to the
"Serum Plate Controller Module" through the serial port. It can automatically read 6 different types
of codes. It is also possible to reprogram the scanning modules with additional codes during
installation. Bt 3000 PLUS has barcode scanning modules for the reagent module and the serum
module.
Important Notice:
Any modification to the Variable Serial Protocol (refer to paragraph 4-6. "Variable Serial Protocol" in
Section IV) is restricted to qualified personnel only. The Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. guaranties the
correct performance of the internal serial protocol. The responsibility for any malfunction arising out
of any modifications to the scripts of the Variable Serial Protocol rests with the customer.
WARNING
This information regards the setting up of the barcode for sample tubes identification. The reading of
the sample barcode label has the same progression as patient code.
For example: Once a patient code of 15 characters has been entered, then a code of 8 characters
followed by 7 empty spaces to reach the 15 characters is sent.
The code read on the barcode label must have the same sequence 8 + 7 for correct detection.
8-5.
SERUM & REAGENT BARCODES
The available codes for sampling procedure are in the memory in blocks of 5 codes. To insert a
new block (5 codes) it is important to import data using a floppy disk. The following blocks are
available at the present:
CODE39, CODE39 FULL ASCII, CODABAR, CODE128
EAN128, CODE93, PLESSEY, PHARMACODE, EAN13
UPCA, UPCE, EAN13 AddON2, EAN8 AddOn2, UPCA AddOn2
UPCE AddOn2, EAN13 AddOn5, EAN8 AddOn5, UPCA AddOn5, UPCE AddOn5
Section - VIII
Sampling Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 7
Reagent Barcode
The main objective of the reagent bottle barcode is the positive identification of the bottle to avoid
position error.
However the barcode can be used only with specific labels produced by the manufacturer of the
reagents.
The installation of the instrument can be configured in the following three different modes of
operation, in agreement between the manufacturer of the analyzer, the reagent supplier and the
client:
1) Use of reagent bottles without barcode, independent use.
2) Use of reagent bottles with barcode (analysis code), only for positive identification of the
bottle.
3) Use of reagent bottles with complex barcode, use of reagents bound by purchasing
agreement.
This mode allows for a barcode with customized reading key. The instrument doesn't
accept bottles having unknown and incoherent barcode symbols, thus preventing the
execution of the tests. The applied algorithm provides for the analysis code, serial
number, type of bottle and the date of expiry of content. The improper modification of any
one of these parameters invalidates its applicability. There is also a built-in prevention
against refilling of previously identified bottle.
NOTE:
Exclusively the Director General of the company manufacturing the analyzer releases additional
informations.
Section - VIII
Sampling Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 7
SERUM PLATE
MAGNET AND HALL
SENSOR
WASHING FUNNEL
PRIMARY TUBE
SENSOR RIGHT
WASHING FUNNEL
SERUM
CHAMBER
PRIMARY TUBE
SENSOR LEFT
HALL EFFECT
SENSOR
SERUM PLATE
CONTROLLER
MODULE
SERUM
PULLEY
BARCODE
MODULE
SERUM
MOTOR
SERUM MODULE - EXPLODED VIEW
Figure 8-7
Section - VIII
Sampling Station
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 7
SECTION - IX
ION SELECTIVE ELECTRODES (ISE) MODULE
9-1.
GENERAL
The ISE module, located on the right side of the analyzer, is used for the determination of
electrolytes, in human serum and urine. The analysis method is based on the Ion Selective
Electrodes (ISE) technology as the electrodes respond to the ions of the molecules respectively in
conformance with the following equation of NERNST:
E = E0 + RT/Nf log aM+
The BT3000 PLUS processes the electrolytes independently from the clinical chemistry. In fact,
the module has dedicated devices like a sampling arm, diluter, and a hydraulic circuit. The specific
operation method is outlined below.
A sample of serum or urine is aspirated and diluted with buffer solution in the ratio of 1/14 and then
dispensed in the mixing funnel. A peristaltic pump, positioned downstream of the electrodes,
aspirates the solution until the bubble sensor detects an air segment, which indicates the final part
of the solution. The diluted sample remains in the electrodes for a short period of incubation and is
read for four seconds. Afterwards the reference solution is dispensed into the mixing bowl and
follows the preceding routine. The values of baseline potentials are subtracted from the sample
values for zeroing any eventual drift. The system is calibrated using two standards of known
values to obtain a slope. The reference (REF) and buffer solutions (BUF) are concentrated and are
diluted automatically with distilled water in a 1/10 ratio during the sampling phase.
A second arm identical to that utilized on the Sampling Module, is used for the sampling of the
electrolytes (refer to paragraph 2-4.2.). The elaboration of the data can also be performed in an
independent way. The ISE Sampling Arm is located to the right of the Serum Module so that the
aspiration needle can easily draw the Sera, the Standards & the Controls in the serum plate. The
needle also aspirates the cleaning solution, the Pepsin, Buffer, and the Baseline from the
appropriate bottles and funnels of the ISE Module.
The ISE module accommodates the ISE electrodes, electronics, hydraulic circuit, ISE mixing
funnel, bubble sensor, and the pinch valve. The highly integrated single module solution provides
a very compact physical design. The remaining hydraulic circuit is located nearby on the right side
and includes two pinch valves, diluter pump, and two peristaltic pumps driven by a DC motor and a
stepping motor.
During instrument operations, the ISE module is out of the view under the cover of the analyzer.
However, it can be raised upward and removed by disconnecting the peristaltic pump tube, for
inspection or maintenance by the operator or service personnel. This module can be easily be
accessed by lifting the little cover on the right side of the analyzer. The location of the ISE funnel
directly over the electrodes minimizes carryover and residual bubble interference. The ISE
controller board is an intelligent peripheral device. It receives information from the master
processor, and using the program resident in its slave processor all the operations relevant to the
ISE module are performed.
9-2.
SUBASSEMBLIES OF THE ISE MODULE
For the following subassemblies, refer to Figure 9-1, 9-2, 9-3 & 9-4 on the preceding pages.
1)
ISE controller board
15-04320-01
2)
ISE preamplifier board
15-04440-01
3)
ISE interface board
15--04503-01
4)
Diluter pump module
5)
Peristaltic water pump
6)
Waste peristaltic pump
7)
ISE pinch valve
8)
Diluter pinch valve
9)
Bubble sensor
10) ISE mixing funnel
11) Saline solution container (BSS)
12) Buffer solution container (BUF)
13) Reference solution container (RES)
14) Enzyme (Pepsin) solution container (ENZ)
15) Washing Solution container (WAS)
Section - IX
ISE Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 8
Bubble
Sensor
Mixing
Funnel
Tube
Guide
Potassium
Electrode
Controller
Board
Sodium
Electrode
Pinch Valve
Chloride
Electrode
Preamplifier
Reference
Electrode
Vertical
Track Rail
Ground
Electrode
Ise Interface
Board
Bypass or CO2
Electrode
ISE MODULE ARRANGEMENT - FRONT VIEW
Figure 9-1.
Section - IX
ISE Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 8
Bubble Sensor
Electrodes
Cover
ISE Pinch
Valve
REAGENTS HOLDER
Diluitor
Saline Solution Container
Buffer Container
Baseline Container
Pepsin Container
Washing Solution Container
ISE Module - View "A"
Figure 9-2
Mixing Funnel
Peristaltic
Pump
ISE Waste
Peristaltic
Pump for
Washing
Pinch Valve
Dilutor
ISE Module - View "B"
Figure 9-3
Section - IX
ISE Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 8
Electrodes: BY-PASS
or CO2 (Optional)
GROUND Electrode
FRONT VIEW
ISE Module
Electrodes location
Figure 9-4
Section - IX
ISE Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 8
The ISE controller module is a group of electronic devices for the operation of ISE module. The
controller module consists of a metallic container divided in two parts (fixed supporting bracket
integral with analyzer base having two rail tracks and the mobile part with electrodes and
electronics). The mobile part is removable for routine maintenance and servicing by technical
personnel.
The electronic circuit of the ISE module consists mainly of a high impedance preamplifier for the
electrodes, an analog-to-digital converter, and a µC767 for data processing. A µC764 is also
mounted on the same circuit and is dedicated to the control of diluter pump, photo-switch, and the
diluter pinch valve. The separate control of the diluter pump group allows the same diluter pump to
be used as required for serum sampling and diluting.
9-2.1.
ISE PREAMPLIFIER BOARD (15-04440-01)
This ISE preamplifier board is inside a module affixed to the right side of the electrodes and is
connected to the ISE Controller Board through a connector. Three dual-chips (two chips in a single
housing) are mounted on this board. Each chip of the dual-chip is an electrometer and is
connected to the appropriate electrode through a unity-gain as shown on the schematic. On the
same schematic, besides the terminals for the ISE electrodes, there is a terminal for connecting
the ground electrode at reference voltage of 2.5 Volts called the virtual ground. The preamplifier is
powered by a DC/DC ±5 Volt mini-converter located on the controller board.
9-2.2.
ISE CONTROLLER BOARD (15-04320-01)
The controller board is connected to the ISE Interface Board (15-04503-01) at the bottom through
an Euro Connector. When the ISE module is raised for maintenance or service, it is disconnected
electrically from the ISE Interface Board. However, it is possible to use an extension cable to
activate the module for any functional test that is required.
A 7714 chip Analog/Digital converter is located on the controller board. This is a special A/D
converter with filter and amplification functions that are programmable through the micro-controller.
This chip filters and amplifies the analog signals after acquiring them from the preamplifier. It has
24-bit of resolution and can convert weak signals into highly stabile and precision signals. The A/D
converter is controlled by µC767 (U11).
The µC767 (U11), utilizing opto-electronic gates (section B of the Motors Driver 15-04408-01),
drives the stepper motor of the ISE peristaltic pump. Other devices controlled by the microcontroller are the J4 bubble sensor, the U12 temperature sensor, and the ISE pinch valve. The
temperature sensor is used for monitoring the ambient temperature near the electrodes. If there is
an excessive variation of temperature during the test run, a prompt is generated to repeat
calibration.
The second µC764 (U2) controls as follows: the diluter system using the section A of the driver A1,
the reset photo-switch, and the pinch valve of the diluter. The opto-isolated gates that separate
the digital section from the power section are also visible on the schematic.
The following external devices are connected to the ISE module through the ISE interface board
located underneath the module: diluter pump, peristaltic pump, and the pinch valve.
The bubble sensor uses an opto-isolated device as a sensing element. The translucent plastic
tube from the ISE mixing funnel passes through the appropriate channel in the bubble-sensor. The
variations of signals produced by presence or absence of liquid is detected by the µC 767, which
through an appropriate software algorithm signals the presence of bubble.
9-3.
COMMONLY ASKED ISE QUESTIONS
The question and answer list below can assist regarding routine system operation, maintenance
and the appropriate answers with relevant technical procedures. Exercise extreme care to ensure
that the system is regularly provided with properly maintained and care should be taken to avoid
any problems and malfunctions.
Section - IX
ISE Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 8
COMMONLY ASKED ISE QUESTIONS
Questions
Answers
Should the samples be manually
diluted?
Can I test urine samples
automatically and together with
serum?
Which parameters should be set
on the analyzer?
Should I calibrate the analyzer
everyday?
Can the analyzer
unattended?
Do the
easily?
reagents
Can
I
reagents?
How
do
standards?
operate
deteriorate
substitute
I
maintain
similar
the
No. The analyzer performs the dilution automatically.
Yes. It is not necessary to pre dilute the urine sample,
use the same calibration procedure as for serum.
Initially set the date, hour, and the desired
measurement units. Only the concentration values of
standards when the lot has changed.
Yes. The calibration is valid for approximately 4 hours
and the analyzer will prompt the to recalibrate as
required.
Yes. The analyzer can operate incessantly without
problems.
No. Care should only be given to the Buffer when using
the CO2 electrode. It is recommended to close the
buffer container at the end of use to prolong the life.
Overexposure to air by the Buffer will diminish the CO2
slope.
No. The ISE reagents are very specific and substituting
may affect the precision of the analyzer, as well as the
integrity of electrodes.
Close them immediately after the use. Do not
contaminate them! The accuracy of the samples is
dependent upon the quality of the standards. Do not
expose them to the sources of strong light and the
heat.
Can the analyzer suddenly not
produce an ISE result?
Yes, when the reagents are finished.
What has happened if all test
values are high?
Samples may have exposed to air for more than half an
hour on the sample plate or a calibration was
performed with a contaminated standard.
Why is the Cl and CO2 electrode
slopes represented in negative
numbers?
What happened if the Na & K
slopes are negative and the Cl &
CO2 slopes are positive?
Is it normal for the analyzer to
alert the user with messages
like: Reagent Empty, Blocked
Pump, Air in Sample, etc.?
Can the hydraulic circuit occlude
completely?
Can the Ground Electrode
influence the quality of results?
Section - IX
The potentials of the Cl and CO2 electrodes are
inversely proportional to the concentration.
The two standards were placed in the inverted
positions on the sample (serum) plate.
Occasionally It is acceptable. If the system detects a
transiting air bubble in the hydraulic circuit. Certainly a
momentary stop is preferable than an erroneous result.
It is important to perform a prime after replacing
exhausted reagent so that the hydraulic circuit is
completely filled up with fluid. This reduces the
possibility of a bubble formation to minimum.
If maintained properly, the hydraulic system will flow
continuously. If an obstruction should occur, clean the
chloride electrode, with the appropriate tool, first before
attempting to clean any other electrode. In case the
problem persists then replace all the fluidic tubes with a
new tubing kit.
Yes. Even a partial occlusion in the ground electrode
hydraulics may affect all the channels.
ISE Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 8
COMMONLY ASKED ISE QUESTIONS (contd.)
Which actions are necessary
prior to turning off the analyzer?
What are the consequences of
incorrect maintenance?
9-4.
If the analyzer is not to be used for a long period, it is
essential to disconnect all the tubes and leave the
electrodes disengaged in their lodgings. The tubes of
peristaltic pumps should be released from their
supporting brackets and manually manipulated
externally to restore roundness and to avoid sticking.
When the analyzer is going to be used again then
reconnect all the disconnected tubes and recalibrate
the analyzer at least twice. Use new Buffer solution.
Apart from generating erroneous results, it may cause
irreparable damage to the electrodes. Use of incorrect
fluids for cleaning the system may also cause serious
damage to the analyzer. For general cleaning in
extreme circumstances of the ISE funnel, electrodes,
ground electrode, fluidic tubes, etc. use distilled water
and a syringe.
ISE TROUBLE-SHOOTING BT3000 PLUS
(Quick Reference Guide to resolve main problems in ISE Module)
SYMPTOMS
Bubbles in ISE Module
CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Calibration Error.
High values of slope
K > 60, Na > 68 and
unstable values.
Calibration Error
Slope values at the limit of
acceptance.
Inexact values in samples
and slopes.
1)
2)
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
1)
Drift of values
2)
3)
No prime performed after maintenance/service of the
module. Perform prime.
The solution is not aspirated, consequently it remains in
the funnel. Obstruction in the Cl and CO2 electrodes
column. Remove obstruction by observing appropriate
cleaning procedure.
Worn peristaltic pump cartridge. Replace with new
cartridge.
Funnel obstructed. Clean funnel.
Tubing sticking together in pinch-valve. Repair or
replace.
Partially occluded Cl electrode. Clean electrode with
appropriate tool.
A small obstruction in the Ground electrode. Clean
electrode.
Reagent solutions not homogenized during refill. Use
homogenized solution for refilling.
Dirty funnel. Clean the funnel.
New electrodes still in the conditioning phase.
Erroneous STD solutions. Use correct solutions.
Inversion of Baseline with Buffer. Position correctly
Baseline and Buffer.
Empty Reference electrode. Pinch-valve tube problem.
Repair or replace.
Use of contaminated distilled water of the analyzer. Use
non-contaminated distilled water.
Module just reconditioned. Repeat calibration 3 or 4
times.
Deteriorated Reference Electrode. Verify and replace.
The deproteinization of the electrode column has not
been performed. Lack of washing at end of work.
Observe appropriate washing procedure.
NOTE:
If the problem is still not resolved after all the preceding steps, then substitute the preamplifier or the entire
ISE Module to resolve the problem.
Section - IX
ISE Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 8
Bubble Sensor
Mixing Funnel
ISE Pinch
Valve
Electrodes
Cover
Peristaltic
Pump
ISE Waste
Peristaltic
Pump for
Washing
Diluter
No-Pinch Valve
Diluter
(Substitute for
Pinch-Valve)
REAGENTS HOLDER
Saline Solution Container
Buffer Container
Baseline Container
Pepsin Container
Washing Solution Container
ISE Module with No-Pinch Valve
Figure 9-5
Section - IX
ISE Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 8
SECTION - X
COMPUTER BOX ASSEMBLY
Touchscreen
LCD Display
Module
Cabinet
Fan
Serial
Board
External
Monitor
PS/2 Ports for
Keyboard &
Mouse, USB Ports
Power
Supply
Asus
Mainboard
ON/OFF
Switch
Floppy Disk
DVD ROM
Player
Hard Disk
COMPUTER BOX
FIGURE 10-1
TOUCHSCREEN
LCD DISPLAY
CASING
COMPUTER BOX
WITH INDUSTRIAL
MAINBOARD
FIGURE 10-2
DVD-ROM PLAYER
FLOPPY DISK
SWITCHING
POWER SUPPLY
INDUSTRIAL
MAINBOARD
HARD DISK
FAN
Section - X
Computer Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 7
10-1.
ELECTRONICS MODULE
10-1.1. COMPUTER BOX
The LCD Display module (Figure 10-1), with fully integrated touch-screen, is on the front of the
computer box. An on/off switch for the analyzer is located on the bottom left of the display. The
peripherals, DVD/CD-ROM player and the floppy disk drive are accessed through a cover just
below the display.
All of the connections to the external peripheral devices are located on the rear of the box as
follows: Parallel port, USB ports, Serial-ports and PS/2 ports for keyboard & mouse.
The ASUS main-board with a 2.4 GHZ, Intel Pentium® IV processor, 128 Mb RAM, DVD/CD-ROM
player, 20 GB (or more) hard disk, floppy disk drive, and the power supply are all located inside the
computer box. Product enhancement resulting from new innovations in technology and from our
continuing quality improvement effort may necessitate changes in this configuration in the future.
However, any eventual changes will be fully compatible with the previous version. A connecting
cable composed of lead conductors of the serial port and the 5 Volt supply interconnects the
computer box and the process electronics.
10-1.2. MAINBOARD CONNECTORS
PS/2 mouse connector (green) 6-pin.
PS/2 keyboard connector (purple) 6-pin.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) for Data Bus 1 & 2 (black) 2X4 pins.
2 Serial Ports Connector (turquoise green) com1 = 9-pins & com2 = 9-pins.
Parallel Port Connector (purple red) 25-pins Printer.
Automatic turning off of the fan: during this process, the power supply to the fan will automatically
switch to a standby mode. This function reduces both the energy consumption and disturbances in
the system, and this is an important feature in implementing a silent system.
10-1.2.1. COMPUTER BOX WITH INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD
The Computer Box consists of a LCD display monitor incorporating touchscreen. The system power
on/off switch is located to the left of the monitor. The DVD-ROM and the Floppy-Disk access door is
located below the monitor.
All of the connections to the external peripheral devices are located on the rear of the box as
follows: Parallel port for the printer, Serial-ports, USB ports, PS/2 ports for keyboard & mouse, CRT
port, LAN ports, and Audio port.
The following components are located inside the Computer Box:
Mainboard with 1.6 GHz Intel Pentium® Mobile (or more) processor, 256 MB (or more) RAM,
DVD/CD-ROM player, 40 GB (or more) hard disk, floppy disk drive, and the power supply.
This configuration is subject to variation because of continuous technological evolutions.
A connecting cable composed of lead conductors of the serial port and the 5-Volt supply
interconnects the computer box and the process electronics.
The Figure 10-2 shows the entire computer box assembly.
10-1.3. LCD MODULE 8-WIRE ANALOGUE RESISTANCE
TOUCH-SCREEN
The touch-screen interface enables functional operation of the program without the use of an
external keyboard or mouse. The LCD module has a protective surface to prevent damage during
data input or other operations.
Section - X
Computer Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 7
10-1.3.1.
TOUCH-SCREEN DRIVER INSTALLATION
The following procedure outlines the installation steps for the Touch screen driver along with
Controller model SC801U Microtouch:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
Connect the touch-screen for initiating the installation.
Insert the setup CD 30-05325-01 to install the software.
Select the type of installation as Custom.
Click to enable TOUCH MONITOR.
Click to enable CALIBRATION TOOL.
Click to deselect EX II SERIAL TOUCH SCREEN SUPPORT.
Click to deselect EX II SERIAL TOUCHPEN TOUCHS SCREEN SUPPORT.
Deselect SC SERIES SERIAL TOUCH SCREEN SUPPORT.
Deselect IST SERIAL TOUCH SCREEN SUPPORT
RESTART
From the start menu go to: START➨ SETTING ➨CONTROL PANEL ➨ SYSTEM ➨
HARDWARE ➨ DEVICES MANAGER ➨ double click MICE AND OTHER POINTING
DEVICES ➨ double click HID-compliant mouse ➨ DRIVER ➨ UPDATE DRIVER ➨
NEXT ➨ SEARCH FOR A SUITABLE DRIVERS ➨NEXT ➨ click to select SPECIFY A
LOCATION ➨ NEXT ➨ path C:\ PROGRAM FILES\MICROTOUCH\MT 7 ➨ OPEN ➨
OK ➨ NEXT ➨ FINISH ➨ CLOSE ➨ Close all windows ➨ RESTART.
10-1.3.2.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL
The computer box of analyzer BT3000 PLUS and by-products is designed for long-term security
and reliability and is virtually maintenance-free as long as the user does not install any third-party
application programs. If these applications are installed, then they may damage the operating
system registry and may also cause disastrous consequence for a computer's hard-drive.
10-1.4. POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Input Voltage Range - Electrical Specifications
PARAMETER
MIN.
NOM.
MAX
UNIT
V-input Range
95
115/230
245
V-rms
Output Voltage Range - Electrical Specifications
Output Nominal
Voltage Value
Regulation
Ripple & Noise
1
+3.3V
± 5%
2
+5V
3
Output Current
Min.
Max.
50mV
0.3A
16A
± 5%
50mV
2.0A
25A
+12V
± 5%
120mV
0.2A
13A
4
-5V
± 5%
100mV
0A
0.3A
5
-12V
± 5%
120mV
0A
0.8A
6
+5VSB
± 5%
100mV
0A
2A
Note: The Connector meets ATX standard specifications.
Section - X
Computer Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 7
Peak
16A
10-1.5. MAINBOARD LAYOUT CONTENTS
PS/2
T: Mouse
B: Keyboard
VIO
USB1
USB2
LED
DIMM Socket 4 (64/72-bit, 168-pin module)
VIA
VT82C694X
Chipset
USB_PWR0
LINE
OUT
DIMM Socket 3 (64/72-bit, 168-pin module)
JTPWR
DIMM Socket 2 (64/72-bit, 168-pin module)
ATX Power Connector
Socket 370
COM 2
DIP Switches
DIP_SW
LINE
IN
CPU_FAN
MIC
IN
PWR_FAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AUX
FLOPPY
Accelerated Graphics Port
TUV4X
PCI 1
CD1
Secondary IDE
0
Primary IDE
GAME_AUDIO
DIMM Socket 1 (64/72-bit, 168-pin module)
PARALLEL PORT
COM 1
MODEM
PCI 2
VIA
VT82C686A
Chipset
PCI 3
USBPORT
Flash EEPROM
(Programmable BIOS)
MIC2
C-MEDIA
CMI8738
CR2032 3V
Lithium Cell
CMOS Power
PCI 4
USBPWR1
CLRTC
SMB
PCI 5
ASUS
ASIC
WOR
With Hardware
Monitor
CHA_FAN
WOL_CON
Section - X
Computer Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
JEN
Page 4 of 7
External Connectors
1
PS2KBMS
PS/2 Mouse Port Connector (6-pin female)
2
PS2KBMS
PS/2 Keyboard Port Connector (6-pin female)
3
USB
Universal Serial Bus Connectors 1&2 (two 4-pin female)
4
PRINTER
Parallel Port Connector (25-pin female)
5
COM1/COM2
Serial Port Connectors (two 9-pin/10-1 pin male)
6
GAME/AUDIO
Game/MIDI Connector (15-pin female)
7
AUDIO
Audio Connectors (three 1/8" jacks)
Internal Connectors
1
IDELED
IDE Activity LED (2-pin)
2
FLOPPY
Floppy Disk Drive Port Connector (34-1 pin)
3
PRIMARY IDE
IDE Connectors (Two 40-1 pin)
SECONDARY IDE
4
WOL/CON
Wake-On-LAN Connector (3-pin)
5
WOR
Wake-ON-Ring Connector (2-pin)
6
CPU/PWR/CHA/FAN Chassis and CPU Fan Connectors (3-pin)
7
CHASSIS
Chassis Intrusion Lead (4-1 pin)
8
SMB
SM Bus Connector (5-1 pin)
9
IR
Infrared Module Connector (5-1 pin)
10
USBPORT
USB Header (10-1 pin)
11
ATXPWR
ATX Power Supply Connector (20-pin)
12
AFPANEL
ASUS Panel Connector (12-1 pin)
13
MIC2
Internal Microphone Connector (3-pin)
14
CD/AUX/MODEM
Internal Audio Connectors (three 3-pin)
15
PWR. LED (PANEL)
System Power LED Lead (3-pin)
16
SPEAKER (PANEL)
System Warning Speaker Connector (4-pin)
17
MSG. LED (PANEL)
System Message LED (2-pin)
18
SMI (PANEL)
System Management Interrupt Lead (2-pin)
19
PWR. SW (PANEL)
ATX/Soft-Off Switch Lead (2-pin)
20
RESET (PANEL)
Reset Switch Lead (2 pin)
Section - X
Computer Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 7
10-1.6. INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD
FIGURE 10-3 LAYOUT
INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD CONNECTORS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
PCI1
J1
J2
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
USB1
USB2
AUDIO1
IDE1
IDE2
J7
J8
VGA1
LPT1
KB1
MS1
FDD1
PW1
EPCI1
Section - X
Computer Module
PCI CONNECTOR
LAN 10/100
LAN GIGA
SERIAL PORT
SERIAL PORT
SERIAL PORT
SERIAL PORT
USB PORT
USB PORT
AUDIO CONNECTOR
40 PIN EIDE1 CONNECTOR
44PIN EIDE2 CONNECTOR
INVERTER CONNECTOR
LVDS CONNECTOR
CRT CONNECTOR
PARALLEL PORT
KEYBOARD CONNECTOR
MOUSE CONNECTOR
FLOPPY CONNECTOR
ATX CONNECTOR
EPCI CONNECTOR
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 7
10-1.7. NEW COMPUTER BOX, VARIATIONS & OPTIONS
(Excerpt from Technical Bulletin No. 9, May 2006)
Over the years, the Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A., has followed and adapted to its instrumentation new
technological evolutions in electronics as per opportunities offered by the market. However, the continuous and
unforeseeable hardware variations by the suppliers has compelled Biotecnica instruments to acquire and
supply only those products which have guaranteed availability on the market for at least 3 - 4 years.
Industrial technology conceived for long-term stability and availability has been introduced on all the Biotecnica
analyzers from May 2006 onwards. It is reminded that our technical department had announced this transition
to the industrial technology in its Technical Bulletin No.8 issued on March 22, 2006.
NOTE: Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. informs that the obsolete items (ASUS mainboard, Display panel) will be
available for at least 6 months or until these products are out of stock.
MODIFICATIONS: Two components have undergone significant modifications: The Display panel and the IBM
compatible Mainboard.
DISPLAY: The previous model was based on TTL technology. The new display is based on the LVDS
technology.
TOUCH-SCREEN: It became necessary to substitute this device with a new model compatible with the new
board.
MAIN BOARD: The previous ASUS or MSI were mass consumer products, instead the new mainboard is
®
industrial type, which accommodates the recent Intel Pentium Mobile 1.6Mhz microprocessor.
This mainboard has all peripherals onboard with the added advantage of not utilizing devices inserted into
slots. In addition there is also a LAN port.
The availability without any modification of this new hardware packet is guaranteed for minimum period of 3
years in accordance with our suppliers.
See Figure 1 below.
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
An “Access Violation” may be generated in some parts of the previous software versions due to incompatibility
of the new Intel Pentium® Mobile microprocessor installed on the industrial mainboard. Therefore it is highly
recommended to utilize software versions 9.4:xx.v/68 or higher.
FULL OR PARTIAL SUBSTITUTION OF PARTS IN THE COMPUTER BOX
The Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. can guarantee the service and the supply of obsolete spare parts for a
limited period, as already mentioned for a minimum period of 6 months or until the products are out of stock.
After this period or when the products are out of stock, in case of any substitution on older instrument equipped
with commercial board and TTL display, it will be necessary to substitute all the devices. In this case it will be
convenient to substitute completely with new computer box or a dedicated kit.
NOTE:
It is necessary to format the hard-disk (consequent loss of all existing data) after substitution of the ASUS or MSI
mainboard with the new industrial mainboard. It is highly recommended to backup all data on the hard disk prior to
the modification.
After this period or when the products are out of stock, in case of any substitution on older instrument equipped with
commercial board and TTL display, it will be necessary to substitute all the devices. In this case it will be convenient to
substitute completely with new computer box or a dedicated kit.
Biotecnica’s technical staff will provide you with additional information and assist you in specifying the correct materials and
configurations for your applications as you request.
MAINBOARD ASSY
FIGURE 10-4
Section - X
Computer Module
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 7
SECTION - XI
POWER SUPPLY AC/DC MODULE
11-1.
POWER SUPPLY
Lambda CA400 Series
Alpha power supply AC/DC:
Universal Input voltage range:
Frequency:
12MIN, 24D, 24DRP
100 to 240 ~
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Modular configurable single and multiple outputs:
CONFIGURED OUTPUT VOLTAGES
Output Voltages (preset)
Adjustment Range
Output Current
12 Volts
12 Volts
8A
24 Volts
24 Volts
8A
24 Volts
18-29 Volts
8A adjustable
11-1.1.
EMC DIRECTIVE APPLICATION TO THE POWER
SUPPLIES
The EMC directive does not apply to power supplies component. It is impossible for the
manufacturer of the power supply unit to guarantee conformity of the final product to this
EMC directive. The EMC behavior of the power supply can be considerably affected by
the way it is installed in the users system. However, since the power supply is a major
component in the performance of the final product, in regards to this Directive, it is
indispensable that the power supply manufacturer ensures that the power supply enables
the end user to conform to the EMC Directive in the most effective manner.
11-1.2.
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION (PFC)
Certain applications have a legal requirement for harmonic reduction, as found with invitro diagnostic devices. Power Factor Correction provides the advantage of wide range
input, and maximizes the load that can be taken from the main power sources.
11-1.3.
INHIBIT OPTION (INH)
The inhibit option is provided as a board inside the module that can reduce the output
voltage of 12 Volts to less than 0.5 Volts by application of a TTL compatible control
signal. This circuit is inhibited through the reset signal. In this way the voltage supply to
the analyzer lamp is cut off, while interrupting power to the solid state relay located on the
Control Board (15-04431-01), thus interrupting the mains voltage supply to the
peripherals (printer and vacuum pump).
Section - XI
Power Supply
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 1
SECTION XII
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Vacuum Pump System
Always check and empty
the full waste container
and press "Restart" button
Analyzer
Blue Tube
Analyzer
Black Tube
Restart
Waste Probe
To Analyzer
Normal Pressure
Low Pressure
Low-Pressure Alarm
WARNING
1) Read vacuum pump system
instruction and warning
notices carefully
2) Disposable gloves must be worn when
servicing the vacuum pump system
where hands may contact potentially
contaminated waste materials
biotecnica instruments
Figure 12-1
Vacuum Pump System P/N 06-05161-01
for BT3000 PLUS
12-1.
FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
This silent and compact vacuum pump system has been specifically designed for use with BT3000
PLUS type analyzers. It provides for an automatic and safe collection of waste liquids from
analyzer’s reaction cuvettes and sampling needle washing into the external waste disposal
container in lab environment. The system consists of a metallic cabinet containing two membrane
pumps controlled by a microprocessor, electronics, and the electrical and fluidic connections to the
analyzer. The microprocessor manages 3 main functions: pressure measurement, waste container
full check, and pump shutdown. The waste discharge has the following pathway (course):
A)
B)
The liquids aspirated by the pumps from the needle washing funnels (bowls) and the
cuvettes washing through the two tubes (Blue and Black tubes) respectively are
transferred to an internal waste chamber (made of transparent Pyrex). From here
the waste fluid is ejected to the external waste container through the waste probe
equipped with liquid level sensor.
Whenever the external waist container is full the waste-probe liquid level sensor
activated audio/visual alarm alerts the operator and instantly shuts down the pumps.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 21
12-1.1.
SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Pressure:
Three LEDs on the front panel indicate the system vacuum level.
Green LED:
Normal operating vacuum level (approximately –60 millibar).
Yellow LED:
Low vacuum level (below 30 millibar).
Red LED:Vacuum level lower than –15 millibar
Simultaneous Green, Yellow, and Red LEDs:
Indicate high vacuum level (higher than –150
millibar).
All LEDs turned off:
Pumps disabled.
The green LED indicates that the system is functioning properly.
The yellow LED may indicate an operating limit condition, still satisfactory but signalling the
beginning of vacuum level deterioration. The red LED indicates vacuum level failure due to
various reasons.
The simultaneous lighting of Green, Yellow, and Red LEDs indicate excessive vacuum level
probably caused by an occluded waste probe tube (from the vacuum pump system to the external
waste container). If this condition occurs sporadically during washing then it must be considered
normal.
All LEDs turned off condition is reached when the standby time (2 minutes) terminates without
resetting the system (pumps disabled). In this case the green LED of the Restart button flashes in
quick successions.
The green LED also confirms the power on condition of the vacuum pump system. If the green
LED is not lit then this may be due to either the power cordset of the vacuum pump system is
disconnected from the analyzer or the vacuum pump system malfunction.
12-1.2.
DESCRIPTION OF THE BOARD 15-05085-01
(VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM)
The Board 15-05085-01 controls the vaccum pump system operation.
The microcontroller (µC) U2 (87LPC767) in OTP version monitors all the functions of the system. It
controls the signals from level sensor of the waste probe, two pumps in DC, 3-way solenoid valve,
pressure sensor SP1, and generates acoustic alarms at two distinct frequencies.
The connector J1 allows connection to the power supply, which supplies 24Vdc.
The voltage of 5Vdc is obtained from the 24Vdc through the low dropout regulator U1 (L4931
CV50).
The connectors J2 and J3 connect the circuit to the two 24Vdc membrane pumps dedicated to the
aspiration of the waste liquids.
The connector J4 allows connection for the signals from the LEDs, and the maximum level limit of
the waste probe level sensor.
The connector J5 is utilized for transmitting alarm signals to the analyzer (for TARGA BT3000 and
by-products only).
The connector J6 connects the circuit to the 3-way solenoid valve, which deviates waste liquids to
the internal waste bottle in the vacuum pump system when the external waste container is full.
The connector J7 is provided for an eventual pressure measurement device.
The bit P1.7 of the U2 controls the Buzzer BZ1. Depending upon the alarm function, it generates
two distinct audible alarms as follows:
1)
Frequency of 1 beep per second.
2)
Frequency of 2.5 beeps per second.
The green LED diode DL1 is lit in normal operating conditions (pressure > 30 millibar) and is
monitored by the gate P1.4 of the U2.
The yellow LED DL2 lights up when the pressure is in the range of 20 - 30 millibar. This range
indicates pre-alarm condition. The gate dedicated to this is P0.2 of U2.
The red LED diode DL3 lights up to indicate low-pressure alarm condition < 16 millibar. The
command gate is P0.6 of U2.
The MOSFET Q1 is used for supplying or switching off voltage to the two membrane pumps
connected in parallel. The command bit arrives from the gate P1.0 of U2.
The pushbutton SW1 is dedicated to the Restart function of the system. When the green LED
inside the pushbutton is lit, it indicates that the vacuum pump system is turned on. The blinking
green LED in the pushbutton indicates that the system requires restarting.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 21
The gate P0.4 of the U2 controls the Darlington transistor Q2. It activates or inactivates the 3-way
solenoid valve for waste liquids management of external waste container or the internal waste
bottle in the vacuum pump system.
The pressure sensor SP1 supplies a voltage proportional to the operating pressure of the vacuum
pump system. An appropriately amplified signal from the integrated circuit U4 is transmitted to the
gate P0.3 of U2.
12-1.3.
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01
COMPONENT FUNCTIONS
System Overview
This paragraph provides a description of the functions of the main components of the Vacuum
Pump System P/N 06-05161-01.
The Vacuum Pump System consists of four main components inside the cabinet: an AC/DC power
supply with universal input 100-240 VAC and 24VDC output, the Controller Board 15-05085-01,
two membrane pumps, and a 3-way solenoid valve.
CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS:
Pressure monitoring
Only the green LED (DL1) should be lit (indicating nominal operating pressure) during the normal
operation of the vacuum pump system.
The lighting up of yellow LED (DL2) indicates that the operating pressure has gone below 30
millibar (it can be acceptable if this occurred now and then).
If the red LED (DL3) lights up then this indicates that the operating pressure has gone below 16
millibar (inadequate for normal analyzer operation). An audible alarm of 1 beep per second
frequency is generated after 6 seconds.
In particular cases (e.g. when large amount of liquid is aspirated) it is possible that all three LEDs
(on the front panel of the pump cabinet) are lit intermittently. This indicates the presence of high
pressure (more than 150 millibar) in the waste bottle located inside the pump cabinet. If this
persists for more than 10 seconds then the "Restart" pushbutton LED illuminates generating an
audible alarm at the frequency of 2.5 beeps every 10 seconds.
Waste Container control
The waste probe is placed into the external waste container to transfer liquid ejected from the
waste pumps into the container. For safety reasons the waste probe is equipped with a liquid level
sensor, which is activated, when the external waste container is full. In this condition the liquid
level sensor transmits the signal to the microprocessor, thus putting the system in standby mode.
In addition the vacuum pump system generates an intermittent audible alarm of low frequency (1
beep per second), and simultaneously the red LED on top of the waste probe and the LED in the
"Restart" button start flashing. In the mean time the system continues to function for about 100
seconds as the waste liquids are deviated to the internal waste bottle through the 3-way solenoid
valve, thus continuing the waste aspiration function transitorily but the waste flow to external waste
container is stopped. The purpose of this momentary deviation is to avoid any spillage during the
transfer of the waste probe from one waste container to another empty container. After emptying
or substituting the external waste container press momentarily the "Restart" button on the
vacuum pump system front panel to continue the operating procedure and reset the alarm. If the
preceding step is not taken, after approximately 100 seconds the aspiration pumps stop running,
the three LEDs on the cabinet front panel are switched off and an audible alarm of 2.5 beeps per
second frequency is generated. After additional 10 seconds the 3-way solenoid valve is deenergized.
NOTE: The liquid level sensor is magnetically actuated reed switch make and break type.
Vacuum Pump System reset
If due to the above-mentioned reasons the vacuum pump system enters the alarm condition the
"Restart" button LED starts flashing, simultaneously the analyzer enters the standby mode and a
corresponding warning message "LOW PRESSURE" appears on the screen. Empty or substitute
the external waste container and momentarily press the "Restart" pushbutton to reset the vacuum
pump system. The vacuum pump system starts functioning and the internal waste bottle is
emptied. After reaching the correct operating pressure all the normal operating controls and
alarms are restored.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 21
12-1.4.
INSTALLATION & OPERATION
1)
Connect the Blue and Black waste tubes from the right side of the analyzer to the
appropriate quick connect on the vacuum pump cabinet front panel.
3) Connect the Waste Probe electric cable (liquid level detector) and the drain tube of to the
vacuum pump cabinet front panel.
4)
Insert the Waste Probes in authorized external waste container.
5)
Plug the power cordset to power inlet on the rear of vacuum pump cabinet and then into
one of the accessory power connectors on the analyzer rear panel.
6)
Now the system is fully installed and ready for operation.
7)
Switch on the analyzer. The vacuum pump will start running
NOTE:
The vacuum pump system power inlet on the rear has no ON/OFF switch. The system turns ON and OFF simultaneously
with the analyzer. The vacuum Pump System is equipped with a universal power supply of 100 to 240 Volt AC, 50/60 Hz
similar the power supply of BT3000 PLUS analyzer.
12-1.5.
MAINTENANCE AND CARE
This compact pump system is virtually maintenance-free and offers continuous duty collection of
waste liquids outside the analyzer. Does not require inconvenient peristaltic pump cartridge and
filter changes. The theoretical operating life of the pumps is between 4000 to 5000 hours, after that
the service technician should substitute the pumps.
WARNING
a)
DISPOSABLE GLOVES MUST BE WORN WHEN SERVICING THE VACUUM PUMP
SYSTEM WHERE HANDS MAY CONTACT POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED WASTE
MATERIALS.
b)
THE SAFE DISPOSAL OF THE WASTE MATERIALS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF
THE USER. INSURE THAT THE DISPOSAL OF WASTE CONTAINER FLUIDS IS
DONE ACCORDING TO ALL APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS.
12-1.6.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING
TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE
SYMPTOMS
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
The vacuum pump is silent and
"Restart" green LED not lit.
Audible
alarm
of
intermittent
frequency, some flashing LEDs and
the instrument in standby mode.
Audible Alarm of intermittent
frequency with the LED on the
waste probe lit.
Damaged Unit
Smoke, strange odor or noise
Section - XII
a) No power to the system. Power cord
disconnected. Connect the power cord.
b) Blown fuse/s. Replace with appropriate fuses
as marked.
Indicates vacuum level variation due to leakage in
the hydraulic circuit connection/s. Ensure that the
waste tubes (blue and black tubes connecting
vacuum pump to the analyzer) are firmly connected.
During the analyzer operation this phenomenon may
be considered normal, as there may be sudden
variations in the vacuum level during emptying of the
reading cuvettes.
External waste container full. Empty the external
waste container and press “RESTART” button on the
vacuum pump cabinet to continue the operating
procedure and to reset the alarm.
The unit has suffered severe shock such as being
dropped. Do not use the unit. Consult your nearest
sales/service office regarding repair.
Stop using the unit immediately and disconnect the
power supply. Consult your dealer regarding repair.
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 21
ANALYZER
Black Tube
Blue Tube
Vacuum Pump
System
Power Cord
Aspiration Pump
Waste Probe
Internal
Waste Chamber
External Waste
Container
Fluidic Pathway
Figure 12-2
DRAIN TUBE CONNECTOR
ELECTRIC CABLE
LEVEL
SENSOR
RED LED
Waste Probe (P/N. 07-05165-01)
Figure 12-3
12-1.7. SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
The following is listing of subassemblies and individual parts, which are available for field
replacement:
PART NO.
06-05161-01
07-05165-01
08-05162-01
15-05085-01
20-05145-01
330.6312
330.6338
330.6400
330.7175
330.9099
DESCRIPTION
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (COMPLETE) FOR BT3000 PLUS
WASTE PROBE
VACUUM PUMP ASSY
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD
INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER (TRANSPARENT GLASS)
POWER ENTRY MODULE
FUSE 250 VOLT, 0.5 AT
MAIN POWER SUPPLY CORDSET
POWER SUPPLY
3-WAY SOLENOID VALVE
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 21
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 662.0788 & BYPRODUCTS
(OBSOLETE)
No longer in production
12-2. INTRODUCTION
This compact and silent waste suction unit has been specifically designed for use with the BT3000
PLUS chemistry analyzer where continuous elimination of liquid is required to be automatic
removal of waste. The gauge-controlled suction can reach a maximum vacuum of -400 mbar. It
produces low-noise level while maintaining strong suction capabilities. It provides for an automatic
and safe collection of waste liquids from to the external waste disposal containers in laboratory.
Whenever the external waist container is full the waste-probe liquid level sensor activates a low
frequency audio/visual alarm and instantly shuts down the peristaltic pump. The vacuum pump
stops running, if any of the internal waste collection chamber is full and remains in the standby
mode until the waste containers are emptied and the alarm reset.
The suction unit cabinet accommodates two inner waste collection chambers of approximately
300ml capacity each. The vacuum to the waste chambers is aspiration of waste liquids from
analyzer is provided by the vacuum pump. The waste liquid, aspirated from the analyzer is
collected in these waste chambers. Simultaneously, two high throughput peristaltic pumps are
used to transfer the waste liquid to the external waste containers through external waste probes,
thus preventing secondary contaminant exposure. The peristaltic pump features a removable and
disposable cartridge that is pre-loaded with special Pharmed tube.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 21
12-2.1. VACUUM GAUGE
The vacuum status is clearly indicated on the front panel vacuum gauge.
12-2.2. VACUUM LEVEL REGULATOR
The pump circuit incorporates an automatic vacuum level regulator, which is factory set at -400
mbar (-40 kPa, -300 mm Hg, -11.8 in Hg). The vacuum regulator monitors the vacuum level and
automatically adjusts it when the vacuum level rises above the desired point, in the event of
clogged filter or any other system occlusion. By using the vacuum regulator the risk of a pump
failure due to excessive is eliminated, extending the pump life and ensuring high performance.
12-2.3. HYDROPHOBIC FILTER
A disposable hydrophobic filter protects the vacuum pump from contamination If the filter becomes
clogged it may be replaced any time. The hydrophobic filter captures superfine particles, bacteria,
condensate, and any liquid that may contaminate or damage the pump.
12-2.4. CAUTION!
SHIPPING RETAINER FOR THE VACUUM
PUMP SYSTEM
To protect the vacuum pump from vibration and impact during shipment, it comes installed with a
clamping device. When you unpack your vacuum pump system, make sure to remove two transit
screws (colored red) at the bottom of cabinet to release the vacuum pump. Running the pump with
the transit screws installed will cause an increased noise level during operation and may damage
internal mechanisms.
12-2.5. INSTALLATION PROTOCOL
Refer to Figure 12-4 entitled "Vacuum Pump System Installation" before attempting to install the
analyzer. Install all electrical cables and tubes as follows:
1) Remove the transit screws at the bottom of the pump cabinet.
2) Connect waste tubing from the right side of the analyzer to the appropriate quick
connect connectors on top of the vacuum pump cabinet.
3) Connect the liquid level detector cables and the drain tubes of Waste Probes to the front
panel of the vacuum pump.
4) Insert the waste probes in the appropriate external waste containers.
5) Plug one end of the power cord to the power inlet on the vacuum pump cabinet and the
other end to the accessory power connectors on the analyzer rear panel.
12-2.6. QUICK START-UP
1)
2)
3)
Switch on the analyzer. The vacuum pump will start running.
Maximum operating vacuum is preset at –400 mbar ± 10%.
The vacuum level during unit's normal standby/operating mode may vary between –100
mbar (-75 mmHg) to -300 mbar (-225 mmHg). In case the vacuum level drops below –
100 mbar then refer to Paragraph 12-2.14. entitled "Trouble-Shooting Guide".
Note: The waste probe LED and audible alarms keep you aware of the unit’s status as follows:
a)
b)
c)
st
1 alarm (Beep of 1-second frequency):
The LED on the waste probe will be lit. The external waste container is full. Empty it. In the mean time vacuum
pump continues to function without blocking the analyzer for about 4 minutes as the waste chamber inside
vacuum pump system is being used. It is important to press the “RESTART” button on the vacuum pump
cabinet to continue the operating procedure and to reset the alarm.
nd
2 alarm (Beep of 0.5 second frequency):
The LED on the waste probe will be lit: This alarm is activated when the external waste container is not
emptied and the waste chamber inside the vacuum pump system is full. A signal is sent to the analyzer to
interrupt the operating functions with a "Waste Bottle Full" message.
The “Waste Bottle Full” message will stop analyzer function. Once the cause of the message is remedied, the
command “Start Another Tray“ can be selected to carry on the operating procedure with the analyzer.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 21
12-2.7. CARE AND MAINTENANCE
For this care and maintenance section, refer to Figures 12-5, 12-7, and 12-9. It is highly
recommended to replace the Peristaltic Pump Cartridge P/N 330.9088 and the Hydrophobic Filter
P/N 662.0807 every 6 months.
!
a)
b)
CAUTION
HIGH VOLTAGE INSIDE! HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. PUMP
WIRING IS LIVE. DISCONNECT INPUT POWER (POWER CORD)
BEFORE SERVICING. NEVER OPERATE WITHOUT SECURE
GROUND CONNECTION. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY CAUSE
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY.
THE VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM MUST NOT BE DISMANTLED OR
REPAIRED BY ANYONE WHO HAS NOT BEEN QUALIFIED TO DO
SO BY THE MANUFACTURER. INCORRECT WORK MAY CAUSE
FIRE OR IRREPARABLE DAMAGE TO THE VACUUM PUMP
SYSTEM.
12-2.8. FUSE REPLACEMENT FOR MAIN POWER INLET MODULE
The main power inlet module has a built-in fuse holder and two fuses of 250 Volt, 2AT (P/N
330.6340) for 230 VAC pump or 250 Volt, 4 AT (P/N 330.6342) for 115 VAC pump. Fuses protect
the system against power surges or overload by interrupting power. Replace fuse/s as marked on
the rear panel. To replace a fuse proceed as follows:
1) Disconnect the power cord. Remove the fuses by gently extracting the fuse-holder with
a tool. The fuse-holder has two grooves on the sides for tool accessibility only.
2) Discard the old fuses and replaces with new fuses that matches the selected voltage
rating indicated on the back panel label. Insert the fuse-holder into the compartment and
push until the latch snaps back into position.
12-2.9. FILTER REPLACEMENT
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Disconnect the power cable.
Loosen the cover screws and remove cover.
Remove the filter tubing (blue) from the waste chamber and the vacuum pump quick
connects. Discard the filter.
Install a new filter by connecting longer tubing (filter outlet) to the quick connect on the
vacuum pump. It is important that the arrow indicator (→) on the filter point towards the
air intake of the pump.
Connect the shorter feed tubing to the quick connect on the waste chamber. Install the
cover and tighten screws.
NOTE: The hydraulic circuit, inside the pump cabinet, accommodates quick-connect fittings for the reliable
connection and the prevention of accidental release. The approved tubing for quick-connect must always be cut
clearly at 90° angle. To connect or disconnect observe the following simple steps:
a)
b)
To connect simply push tubing into the collar past the O-ring to the internal tube stops.
To disconnect press collar against the fitting body and slide out tubing.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 21
12-2.10. PERISTALTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
The peristaltic pump features removable cartridge pre-loaded with special Pharmed® tube. To
replace cartridge proceed as follows:
1) Remove both ends of the peristaltic tubing with elbow inserts from the quick-connect
couplings. Remove elbow inserts.
2) Squeeze the locking catches and remove the defective cartridge and discard it.
3) Introduce elbow inserts into the pump tubing. Place the new cartridge on the drive shaft
and gently press to snap fit.
4) Carefully connect the pump tubing to both quick-connect on the front panel. The pump is
now ready for operation.
NOTE: The disposable cartridge is based on snap-fit principle. As the cartridge is put in place and locked, the
three rollers within the cartridge engage the unit's drive shaft. To connect coupling simply plug insert into body.
The fitting halves lock in place instantly with an audible "click", which assures a reliable and leak-free connection.
To disconnect the fitting halves, simply press the thumb latch (lever) on the coupling body and the coupling
halves separate.
12-2.11. VACUUM REGULATION PROCEDURE
The vacuum limit valve is located on the internal right waste chamber. This modulating valve
protects the pump from “maximum vacuum” (the highest vacuum the pump can attain when the
pump inlet is closed). In the event of clogged filter or any system occlusion, the vacuum regulator
eliminate possible trouble or burnout caused by tentative overload. The valve maintains a constant
predetermined vacuum level and will automatically respond to any rise of vacuum level above the
valve setting. The following procedure should be observed when calibrating the vacuum limit
valve:
1) Disconnect the power cable. Disconnect the waste tubes with elbow inserts (Blue and
Black) from the quick-connect couplings on the right side of analyzer.
2) Loosen the cover screws and remove cover. Turn on vacuum pump system.
3) Loosen the lock nut securing the vacuum regulating cap (this is the vacuum regulator
located on the right chamber).
4) Carefully turn the vacuum regulator cap clockwise or counterclockwise until the vacuum
gauge needle points to the recommended set point –400 mbar (-40 kPa, -300 mm Hg,
11.8 inch Hg, -5.8 PSI) The preset vacuum level clearly reflects the vacuum level
existing in the suction line.
NOTE: To reduce the vacuum level, turn the regulator cap counterclockwise. To increase the vacuum level, turn
the regulator cap clockwise. When adjusting valve, make no more than one turn of the cap at a time and observe
the vacuum level closely to prevent over-shooting the specified setting. As much as 1 minute may be required for
the new balance to take place after the adjustment is made.
Tighten the lock nut against regulating cap while firmly holding the cap in position. Connect waste tube to the rear
of analyzer. Start the Vacuum Pump System and verify proper operation.
12-2.12. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The fluids aspirated from the analyzer are separated according to degree of contamination into 2
separate channels. Basically the blue tube evacuates minimally contaminated fluids while the
black tube evacuates highly contaminated fluids. The internal waste chamber receives the fluid
and is not emptied by the peristaltic pump until the rising liquid level (few centimeters) actuates the
bottom liquid level sensor.
The liquid level sensor controls the peristaltic pump until the liquid level returns to the minimum
position. The liquid level sensor is used for operating the peristaltic pump when necessary.
The liquid level sensor located on the top of waste chamber is for signaling any system error. If the
peristaltic pump were to malfunction, the waste chamber would continue to fill up until the liquid
overflows into the vacuum pump. To prevent this from happening, the upper liquid level sensor is
actuated. This disables the system by turning off the vacuum pump. Instantly an audible alarm is
activated, with intermittent acoustic signals of high frequency.
The waste probe transfer the liquid ejected from the peristaltic pumps into the external waste
containers. For safety reasons each waste probe is equipped with a liquid level sensor which is
activated when the external waste container is full. In this situation, the vacuum pump system
generates an intermittent audible alarm and a visual red LED would be lit on top of the waste
probe is lit.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 9 of 21
12-2.13. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION BOARD (15-04541-01)
The board 15-04541-01 controls and monitors the whole vacuum pump system. The µC764, in the
OTP version, controls all the functions of the system. In addition this micro-controller controls the
signals of the liquid level switches, activates the peristaltic pumps and generates acoustic alarms.
The J1 connector is used to connect the power supply to obtain 24 VDC. The reduction to 5 VDC
voltage is derived from 24 VDC supplied through the U1 voltage regulator (LM7805). The J2
connector is used to connect the circuit to the liquid level sensors inside the two waste chambers.
The rising level float switch is connected in OR. When the liquid level inside the waste chambers
reaches the high actuation level (upper liquid level switches), the associated liquid level switches
from closed to open. In case the liquid level in the waste chamber is below the low actuation level,
the bottom float switches from open to closed contacts.
The Q1 and Q2 transistors are the power drivers of the peristaltic pumps. The J3 connector
permits connection to the main AC power. The vacuum pump is connected to the J4 connector.
The J5 connector is used to connect the circuit to the peristaltic pumps, waste probes, and the
"Restart" push button.
The various gates of the integrated U3 circuit (ULN2803) control the following functions:
•
The U3A gate activates the red LED (visual alarm) on the Waste Probe-2.
•
The U3B gate activates the red LED (visual alarm) on the Waste Probe-1.
•
The U3C gate activates acoustic alarm through BZ1 buzzer.
•
Gates U3D, U3F, and U3H control the relay K1 to turn off power to the vacuum pump in
case of error in the system.
The jumpers 1, 2, and 3 allow the utilization of the electronic circuit in the following mode:
a)
b)
c)
Jump 1 shorted for BT3000 PLUS; open for BT3000 and by-products.
Jump 2 shorted for BT3000 PLUS; open for BT3000 and by-products.
Jump 3 shorted for BT3000 PLUS; open for BT3000 and by-products.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 10 of 21
12-2.14. TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE
SYMPTOMS
A 1-second audible with the
LED on the waste probe lit.
Waste Bottle Full message.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1. External waste container full. Empty the
external waste container and press
“RESTART” button to reset.
2. Remedy the causes of alarm and then enter
the command “Start Another Tray“ to carry
on the operating procedure with the
analyzer.
NOTE: The vacuum pump continues to function
without blocking the analyzer for about 4 minutes as
the waste chamber inside vacuum pump system is
being used. It is important to press the “RESTART”
button on the vacuum pump cabinet to continue the
operating procedure and to reset the alarm.
A 0.5-second audible with the
LED on the waste probe lit.
The vacuum level below
–100 mbar (-75 mmHg)
The external waste container is not emptied and
the waste chamber inside the vacuum pump
system is full. In this case a signal is sent to the
analyzer to interrupt its functions. Empty the
external waste container. Press the “RESTART”
button to reset the alarm.
1. In the normal operating conditions the
vacuum range may vary between -100 mbar
(-75 mmHg) to -300 mbar (-225 mmHg). The
vacuum level below -100 mbar (-75 mmHg)
indicates leakage in the hydraulic circuit.
Ensure that the waste tubes (the blue &
black tubes connecting vacuum pump to the
analyzer) and the exhaust tubes in the
analyzer are firmly connected.
2. Partially occluded hydrophobic filter located
inside vacuum pump system. Replace with
Part No. 662.0807.
Caution: Always install filter with the flow (flow
directional arrow pointing towards the pump)
entering the vacuum pump from the waste chamber
side.
Damaged Unit
The unit has suffered severe shock such as
being dropped. Do not use the unit. Consult
your dealer regarding repair.
Liquid such as water has been Stop using the unit immediately and disconnect
sucked into the vacuum pump the power supply. Consult your dealer regarding
repair.
Smoke, strange odor or noise Stop using the unit immediately and disconnect
the power supply. Consult your dealer regarding
repair.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 11 of 21
12-2.15. SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
The following is listing of subassemblies and individual parts, which are available
for field replacement:
PART NO.
11-05260-01
11-05339-01
15-04541-01
330.6312
330.6340
330.6342
330.6400
330.7175
330.9088
330.9622
330.9623
330.9624
330.9625
330.9649
330.9659B
662.0777B
662.0777C
662.0788
662.0788A
662.0788B
662.0788E
662.0806
662.0807
662.0808
662.0808A
662.0810
662.0831
662.0831A
662.0831C
662.0831D
662.0831E
662.0831F
662.0831G
662.0831H
662.0832
662.0832A
662.1015
DESCRIPTION
ANTI-CONDENSATE KIT (VAC PUMP)
VACUUM PUMP ANNUAL SERVICE KIT
VAC.PUMP SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
POWER ENTRY MODULE WITH FUSES (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
FUSE 250 VOLT, 2 AT ( 230 VAC VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM)
FUSE 250 VOLT, 4 AT ( 115 VAC VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM)
MAIN POWER SUPPLY CORDSET
POWER SUPPLY (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
CARTRIDGE # PERISTALTIC PUMP (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
COUPLING BODY WITH SHUTOFF VALVE - FRONT PANEL (FIG. 12-5.)
ELBOW FITTING FOR PERISTALTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE(FIG. 12-7.)
COUPLING BODY STRAIGHT THROUGH FRONT PANEL (FIG. 12-5.)
SINTERED BRONZE SILENCER (FIG. 12-5.)
COUPLING INSERT FOR WASTE PROBE - FRONT PANEL (FIG. 12-5.)
VACUUM REGULATOR (FIG. 12-5.)
VACUUM PUMP 115 VAC WITH FITTINGS (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
VACUUM PUMP 230 VAC WITH FITTINGS (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (COMPLETE SYSTEM WITH 2 WASTE
PROBES– 230 VAC
WASTE PROBE-1 (FIG. 12-8.)
WASTE PROBE-2 (FIG. 12-8.)
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (COMPLETE SYSTEM WITH 2 WASTE
PROBES– 110 VAC
"RESTART" PUSH BUTTON (NOT WIRED)
HYDROPHOBIC FILTER ASSEMBLY #VAC PUMP (FIG. 12-5.)
PERISTALTIC PUMP - LEFT (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
PERISTALTIC PUMP - RIGHT (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
VACUUM GAUGE ASSY (FIG. 12-5., 12-7.)
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY/BOARD 15-04541 (FIG. 12-9.)
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLIES (FIG. 12-9.)
FEMALE FISCHER CONNECTOR KIT (FIG. 12-9.)
"RESTART" PUSH BUTTON KIT (FIG. 12-9.)
GROUNDING CABLE FOR VAC PUMP (FIG. 12-9.)
GROUNDING CABLE FOR POWER INLET (FIG. 12-9.)
GROUNDING CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY (FIG. 12-9.)
GROUNDING CABLE FOR PUMP COVER (FIG. 12-9.)
THE INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER-LEFT (FIG. 12-5., 12-6.)
THE INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER-RIGHT (FIG. 12-5., 12-6.)
VACUUM REGULATOR ASSY (FIG. 12-5, 12-7)
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Prior to any internal repairs or transportation, continue pressing the
“RESTART” button until the waste chamber inside the cabinet is completely emptied
(approximately 30 seconds) and the pump beeps continuously.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 12 of 21
12-2.15.1. ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT P/N 11-05339-01
11
8
8
10
Vacuum Pump System # BT3000 PLUS
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (P/N. 11-05339-01) #BT3000 PLUS
KIT MANUTENZIONE ANNUALE (cod.11-05339-01) # BT3000 PLUS
ITEM (POS.)
8
10
11
QTY (QTA)
2
1
2
Section - XII
DESCRIPTION (DESCRIZIONE)
Pump Cartridge #Vacuum Pump System
Silencer #Vacuum Pump System
Hydrophobic Filter #Vacuum Pump System
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 13 of 21
12-2.16. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Technical Specifications
Main Voltage.......................... 230 VAC, 50 Hz or 117 VAC, 60 Hz (As per Clients
disposition)
AC-DC Power Supply
Input Voltage Range:.............. 100-240 VAC, Switched Mode
Input Frequency:..................... (AC) 47-63 Hz
Output Voltage Range:............ 24VDC ± 10%
Operating Temperature
0 to +50°C
Vacuum Pump
Pump Type:............................ Linear-motor driven free piston, oil-less
Rated Voltage:........................ 230VAC 50 Hz or 115VAC 60 Hz (As per Clients
disposition)
Operating Vacuum ± 10%:...... Varies between -100 mbar (-75 mmHg) to -300 mbar
(-225 mmHg).
Vacuum Level:....................... Automatically regulated by Vacuum Limit Valve factory
set at -400 mbar (-300 mmHg). The valve is located
downstream of the Hydrophobic Filter.
Attainable Vacuum (Max):....... -800 mbar, -80 kPa, -600 mmHg, -23.6 in. Hg
Peristaltic Pump
Drive:....................................... Direct Current Motor 24 VDC
Motor Speed:.......................... 3000 RPM
Flow Rate:............................... 110 ml/min
Tube Material and Bore:......... Pharmed; Bore: Ø3.2 mm
Transmission:......................... Friction transfer at minimal speed directly onto the rollers.
Media:..................................... Analyzer waste
Life Expectancy:...................... NOTE: It is recommended that the Pump Cartridge be
changed every 6 months.
Hi-Lo Level Sensor:.............. Liquid Level Float Switch with hermetically sealed
magnetic Reed Switch and permanent magnet.
Filter:...................................... Disposable hydrophobic/bacteria filter
Life expectancy:...................... NOTE: It is recommended that the filter be changed
every 6 months.
Dimensions (Approx.)
Height:..................................... 310 mm (12.2 inches)
Width:...................................... 230 mm (9.1 inches)
Depth:...................................... 420 mm (16.54 inches)
Weight:.................................... 15 kg (33.1 lbs)
EMC:....................................... Meets EN 55011, EN 50082-1 For conducted and
radiated emission.
Electrical Standards:............. Conforms to Council Directives 98/79/EEC of 27 October
1998.
Warranty:................................ 1 year including parts and labor, excluding Consumables
The Biotecnica Instruments reserves the right to alter technical specifications without prior notice.
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 14 of 21
12-2.17. CLEANING OF THE HYDROPHOBIC FILTER
(Vacuum Pump System #BT3000 PLUS)
Normally during the routine maintenance, the hydrophobic filter, located inside the
vacuum pump system, is replaced approximately every 12 months.
Sometimes the filter may become occluded after a short period of time or suddenly.
These occlusions are generally caused by the presence of excessive foam formed in the
waste liquid by agitation. This can happen if an excessive amount of surfactant detergent
is used in the washing liquid or reagents containing too much surfactant. Even if there is
a waste chamber in the vacuum pump system to attenuate the problem, the foam may
overflow from the waste chamber into the hydrophobic filter, before the liquid level
detector turns off the vacuum pump.
Observe the following procedure to resolve this problem:
1)
2)
3)
4)
When the external waste container is full, the system generates an audio-visual
alarm. The operator must intervene soon to avoid overfilling of internal waste
chamber causing foam to overflow into the filter.
Regeneration of the filter through cleaning. This operation is possible if the filter
is occluded recently and has not exceeded its current operating life. In practice
an old filter with membrane occluded by dried up residues, must be substituted.
Disconnect the power cable. Remove the cover from the vacuum pump system.
Remove the filter tubing from the internal waste chamber and the vacuum pump
quick connects (metallic). Turn the filter upside down with the flow arrow
indicator (⌦) on the filter (Fig. A) must point upwards. Remove the vent cap
(Fig. A) at the bottom of the filter and drain any liquid inside the filter. Use a
plastic pipette on the top (opposite to flow arrow indicator) to blow out any liquid
or wet residues from the clogged filter membrane. Now about 90% of the filter
efficiency must have been restored. Best results can be obtained by using
compressed air in place of the pipette.
Replace vent cap (Fig. A) and tighten it. Install the filter and the vacuum pump
system cover and tighten screws.
Apply Plastic Pipette or Compressed Air
Figure A
Vent Cap
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 15 of 21
TRANSPARENT TUBE
ANALYZER
H2O BOTTLE
BLACK TUBE
BLUE TUBE
POWER SUPPLY CABLE
VACUUM GAUGE
REMOVE TRANSIT SCREWS AT
BOTTOM
BLUE TUBE
PERISTALTIC PUMP
BLACK TUBE WASTE PROBE 2
EXTERNAL WASTE CONTAINER
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM
Installation
FIGURE 12-4
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 16 of 21
Coupling Insert
P/N 330.9649
Waste Chamber (L)
P/N 662.0832
Waste Chamber (R)
P/N 662.0832A
Hydrophobic Filter
P/N 662.0807
Coupling Body with
Shut Off Valve
P/N 330.9622
Coupling Body
Straight Through
P/N 330.9624
Power Entry Module
P/N 330.6342
Coupling Body with
Shut Off Valve
P/N 330.9622
Power Supply
P/N 330.7175
Restart
Push Button
Controller Board
P/N 15-04541-01
Vacuum Gauge
P/N 662.0810
Vacuum Pump
P/N 662.0777C (230 Vac)
P/N 662.0777B (115 Vac)
Silencer
P/N 330.9625
Vacuum Regulator
P/N 330.9659B
Peristaltic Pump - Left
P/N 662.0808
Peristaltic Pump - Right
P/N 662.0808A
Pump Cartridge
P/N 330.9088
SPARE PARTS FOR MAINTENANCE & REPAIR
Figure 12-5
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 17 of 21
Waste Chamber
(Left)
P/N 662.0832
Waste Chamber
(Right)
P/N 662.0832A
WASTE CHAMBERS LEFT & RIGHT
Figure 12-6
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 18 of 21
POWER ENTRY
MODULE WITH
FUSES
CONTROLLER BOARD
P/N 15-04541-01
ELBOW FITTING
P/N 330.9623
PERISTALTIC PUMP - LEFT
P/N 662.0808
PERISTALTIC PUMP - RIGHT
P/N 662.0808A
POWER SUPPLY
P/N 330.7175
PUMP CARTRIDGE
P/N 330.9088
VACUUM
REGULATOR
ASSY NOT
INCLUDED
VACUUM GAUGE
P/N 662.0810
VACCUM
REGULATOR ASSY
P/N 662.1015
VACUUM PUMP 115 VAC
P/N 662.0777B
VACUUM PUMP 220 VAC
P/N 662.0777C
DETAILS OF SOME SPARE PARTS
Figure 12-7
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 19 of 21
Visual LED
Level Detector
WASTE PROBE (P/N 662.0788A & B)
Figure 12-8
SPARE CABLES FOR VACUUM PUMP
Figure 12-9
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 20 of 21
Always connect the tubing to the
analyzer. Do not use the Vacuum
Pump System and Waste Tube with
any other fluid source; direct
suction of liquid from any container
or cleaning of any laboratory
spillages. The unauthorized use
may result in serious injury to the
user and permanent damage to the
Vacuum Pump System.
Always unplug the power
cord from the unit before
performing any installation
or maintenance procedure
NO
NO
Remove Transit
Screws at the
bottom before
operating.
NO
NO
Do not ever leave the
Waste-Probe on the floor or
outside its external Waste
Container
during
the
analyzer
operation
or
standby. The Waste-Probe
must always be kept on the
Waste Container to avoid
waste liquid spillages.
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM WARNINGS!
Figure 12-10
Section - XII
Vacuum Pump System
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 21 of 21
SECTION - XIII
MEASUREMENTS & CALIBRATIONS
13-1.
INTRODUCTION
The BT3000 PLUS chemistry analyzer has a general diagnostic program exclusively for the
technical assistance personnel. The access to this program is protected by a password and it
requires absolute familiarity with the analyzer as a prerequisite.
The following functions can be performed in this program:
1) Verification of operation and stability of the photometer.
2) Testing hydraulic functions including sampling, washing, and emptying of
cuvette.
3) Verification of ISE module operation.
4) Verification and programming of the barcode.
5) Program of stress.
6) Cuvette temperature calibration (manual & automatic).
7) Reagent chamber temperature calibration (fixed or variable).
To access the diagnostic program, click on the “Analyzer” button, and then click
on the “General Diagnostic” button for displaying the “General Diagnostic” page.
Now click on the desired functions.
13-1.1.
PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS
The calibration consists of amplification adjustments of each channel so that these are appropriate
to variables present in the photometer. The interference filters and the semi-reflecting mirrors may
have tolerances of ±30%, which must be compensated to avoid saturation of the amplifiers.
The calibration procedure for amplifications remains the same whether it is performed with the
photometer test box or directly on the analyzer. A photometer supplied by the QC with attached
test report, may show different amplification values on the analyzer where it will be installed. This
is due to the sum tolerances of the entire optical system: halogen lamp and quartz prism light
guide. However, any slight deviation is tolerated if the values are within the specified limits. Optical
conditions for calibrations and reading of values are as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Reading station fully tested and electro-mechanically functional
Cuvettes calibrated and properly cleaned as per specifications
Distilled water, in all the 34 cuvettes (300 to 600µl)
Lamps tested as laid down in the specifications (see specification label)
Warm up period of at least 5 minutes to allow the system to reach steady state
Specifications are valid for the BT3000 PLUS with a reading cycle of 1.5 seconds and 34-cuvette
plate. The average value of signal for all the channels is 24,000 points (recommended value for
calibration). Limit values of signals for all the channels are from 14,000 to 30,000 points.
The reference channel has a wide excursion range of correct value from 3500 points to the 16000
points without any adjustment controls.
NOTE:
An average value of 24,000 points is recommended as the halogen lamp progressively burns out
(exhausts). After about 1,500 hours of burning the lamp may reach a minimum acceptable value limit
of 14,000 points.
The acceptable minimum and maximum values have the following implications:
●
Below 14,000 points the photometric resolution tends to reduce progressively to
about 2,200 points of optical density.
●
Beyond 30,000, towards 35,000 points, the amplifiers tend to saturate and disturb
the linearity of photometer also at lower values of optical density.
Section - XIII
Measurements & Calibrations
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 8
13-1.2.
PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Select a pair of sequential filters (i.e. 340nm/380nm) using diagnostic program. Execute a reading
of the 34-cuvette plate and observe the values of integration. If necessary, adjust the trimmer
corresponding to each channel, clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to decrease the
measured values. At each adjustment perform reading of the 34-cuvette plate for verification.
Select the next pair of interference filters, (i.e. 405/436nm) and repeat the preceding operations.
Continue this until terminating with the last pair of 630nm/700nm filters. The calibrations can also
be performed in the random mode.
13-1.3.
VERIFICATION OF EVENTUAL PROBLEMS DURING
THE READINGS
The verification of the photometer requires the following; selection of filters 1 and 2, the filling of
one or more cuvettes, the gain reading of the amplifier of desired channel, the reading of offsets of
all the channels, the reading of the absorbance in mono and bi-chromatic modes, zeroing the
absorbance of all the cuvettes, sample one cuvette using the reagent number 1 and serums
number 1 and then read its absorbance value.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Click on the “Select Filter” and select the 2 filters.
Click on the "Read zero filter" to have the transmission values in the dark of
channel 1 & channel 2 amplifiers. The values should be between 0 and 390.
Values higher than that may cause problems in the photometer electronics or
produce an incorrect mechanical calibration of cuvette tray (i.e.: light passage in
the cuvette during reading in the dark).
Fill all the cuvettes with water by first clicking the "Cuvette" button and then the
"Wash and fill up" button. It is possible to perform additional controls after the
cuvettes have been filled.
It is possible to read the absorbance and the relevant values of the amplifiers
on all the cuvettes by simply clicking the "Read" button. The sequence of the
values has the following meaning:
Cuvette
1st Chan.
2nd chan.
mAbs x 1
mAbs x 2
# cuv.
rel. gain
rel. gain
abs (filter 1)
abs (F1-F2)
Es.1
18,000
18,900
300
100
Selected Filters:
340nm/630nm
The above example shows that the cuvette #1 (with H2O) has an absorbance of 300 mABS at
340nm and an absorbance of 100 mABS in bi-chromatic reading at (340-630nm). The relative
gains of the channels #1 and #2 should have the values between 14,000 and 28,000 when all the
cuvettes are filled up with distilled water.
If the zeroing of the absorbance is desired then click on "Zeroing" button, if necessary click a
couple of times. When performing the a sample and read process using reagent in position #1 and
sample in position #1, click on the "Sampling" button and select the appropriate method "Normal
Sample" or "Sample Starter".
In the "Normal Sample" mode a sequential sampling is carried out with the same needle, first
reagent and then serum. The volume of the reagent is fixed at 300µl, while the volume of the
sample is selectable from 0 to 27ml. Take into consideration that the instrument restores the
stoicometric ratio when the volume of the sample has been selected. If 3µl of serum is chosen,
then the reagent volume becomes 297µl. After the sampling, it is possible to read the absorbance
values of the sample directly in the mono or bi-chromatic mode using previously mentioned
commands. The "Sample Starter" mode is similar to the preceding method except the sample,
which is dispensed subsequently by the second sampling arm. The sampling test is always carried
out in cuvette #1.
Section - XIII
Measurements & Calibrations
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 8
13-2.
CUVETTES
SPECS
CALIBRATION
AND
TEMP.
CONTROL
The calibration involves adjustment of the temperature sensor to manufactures specifications. A
LM35 chip, with tolerance of ±1°C, is used as the sensing element and is located inside a metallic
housing.
Operative conditions for correct temperature calibration inside the cuvettes are as follows:
●
●
●
●
Ambient Temperature: 18°C to 32°C
Analyzer turned on for at least 20 minutes to reach steady state
All 34 cuvettes filled with 300µl to 600µl volume of distilled water
A certified electronic thermometer with micro-probe with at least 0.1°C
resolution
Keep in mind that a thermometer probe of 2 to 3 mm diameters, equipped with a K type
thermocouple, when immersed in the cuvette, produces an instantaneous temperature drop of
about 0.2°C.
We advise against the use of thermometers of medium to large dimensions to avoid incorrect
measurements because of difficulty of inserting the probe and for the necessity of performing
measurements quickly. Do not perform measurements or calibrations if the cuvettes have been
filled with distilled water without waiting for necessaryl 20 minutes warm-up period
13-2.1.
CUVETTE TEMP. CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Prior to proceeding with calibrations, set the cuvette temperature at 37ºC in "ANALYZER SETUP"
page.
Manual temperature calibration
The manual temperature calibration adjustments are made through trimmer located on the
"MASTER LOGIC BOARD" (on the rear lower part of the reading station).
Automatic temperature calibration is possible in the software version 7.2 onwards, refer to
instructions.
Enter the service page and select the icon "Check Temperature". The cuvettes plate stops
temporarily. Immerse the temperature measurement probe in an easily accessible cuvette. Gently
shake the probe with rotational movement (for mixing) at the bottom of the cuvette to quicken the
measurement.
After measuring and noting the correct and stable value, stop the operation. Do not exceed 45
seconds of measurement time to avoid that irregular heating underneath affect the temperature of
the rotating plate. The temperature monitoring system functions correctly, only when the metallic
mass of the cuvettes rotor makes cyclical motion. After making a correct measurement, note down
the measurement value, remove probe from the cuvette and click on the button, which appeared
previously "Push Button...". The plate starts rotating clockwise and counterclockwise in the
alternative manner, instantly the temperature is displayed in real time just below the commands
line. The displayed temperature value should be identical with previous value measured with the
probe.
If necessary, adjust the TR1 trimmer on the Master Logic Board (15-04211-01) to match the value
measured by the thermometer probe. Make this adjustment in the shortest time possible. The
value of temperature measurement should not be necessarily 37°C as it is automatically corrected
when exiting the service page. For example, the measurement of cuvette temperature by
thermometer in a motionless plate is equal to 35.9°C. The measurement displayed on the monitor
in the "Check Temp" function with plate rotating alternatively between clockwise and counter
clockwise directions is 36.5°C. Adjust the trimmer TR1 until the temperature of 35.9°C is displayed
on the monitor. Exit service page of "Check Temp".
After the settling time of a few minutes, the monitor should display the correct temperature with
fluctuation of ±0.2°C.
Automatic temperature calibration, only with software 7.2 onwards.
An appropriate thermometer is necessary (as indicated previously) to perform a valid calibration.
With the instrument in steady state condition and the cuvettes filled with water, enter the diagnostic
page (Analyzer > Diagnostic > General Diagnostic > Mechanics). Select "Mechanics" and click
"SET TEMPERATURE".
Section - XIII
Measurements & Calibrations
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 8
Select "Temperature Calibration" in the next window. This is a step by step guided procedure.
Insert the certified thermometer probe tip into the cuvette and after 45 seconds read the
measurement value. Write the exact temperature measurement value (including decimals) by
using mouse and the keyboard. After this operation is terminated the instrument will assume the
set value after couple of minutes.
It is possible to view on the display the measurement value of temperature in the cuvette. Some
times one can observe the temperature fluctuations of +/-0,2°C, caused by the automatic
corrections of feedback circuit. However the real variations in the cuvette are much less because
of the considerable mass of the cuvette system components.
NOTE:
Verify the following parameters for an accurate calibration:
1)
The water must be poured into the cuvette at least 10 minutes before the calibration.
2)
The ideal ambient temperature should be between 20ºC and 26ºC.
3)
The precision thermometer probe must be of miniature size. The instruments for measuring
temperature such as thermometer having glass tube with mercury or alcohol are not
suitable for this purpose.
4)
The trimmer used in manual calibration adjustments is not required in the automatic
calibrations. Therefore this trimmer must not be adjusted during or after the automatic
calibration.
13-3.
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM CALIBRATION AND SPECS
The thermostatic control system of the reagent chamber consists of a refrigeration system based
upon Peltier modules, which are affixed underneath the circular aluminum chamber. This system
maintains reagents at low temperature. The system has refrigeration limits when the ambient
temperature exceeds 28ºC, consequently the reagent chamber temperature increases beyond the
preset temperature. The electronics of the temperature regulation is inside the "REAGENT
CONTROLLER" board.
A reagent controller board was produced up to July 2004, which had fixed regulation of
temperature. The controller used an approximate value of 5ºC as reference. After 15th July 2004,
a new controller board was introduced in the production, giving the user a facility to select
temperature between 5ºC and 15ºC.
13-3.1.
REAGENT CONTROLLER P/N.15-04313-03 (OBSOLETE)
Unadjustable temperature at 5°C (installed prior to July 2004)
The control is realized by varying the Peltier supply voltage from 16 to 28 volt approximately
through a feedback system between the temperature sensor LM35 (located under the aluminum
chamber) and the 400 Watt power supply. The comparator (chip U6B) changes the state, when by
system fault a temperature exceeding 43ºC is read. In this case the switch (MOSFET Q2)
interrupts voltage to the Peltier modules. If one desires to interrupt the refrigeration through Setup
Analyzer then the same MOSFET disconnects the system through software.
When the ambient conditions exceed the extreme operating conditions (18ºC and 32ºC) the
system limits are evident. Particularly, the ice formation in the reagent chamber is possible below
18ºC and beyond 28ºC the preset temperature value of 5ºC starts rising.
13-3.2.
REAGENT CONTROLLER BOARD P/N 15-05211-0
Temp. adjustable from 5°C to 15°C. (installed from July 2004 onwards).
This electronic circuit as compared to the previous circuit allows the refrigeration chamber to reach
lower temperatures (below 10ºC). In addition the user can select the desired operating
temperature in the setup. The real value of the selected temperature will be displayed on the
analyzer display.
The temperature sensor is read by the µC U3 767, which in turn proportionally regulates the
voltage of the 400W power supply. Because of the limited excursion of the regulation under a
certain temperature value, the µC 767 interrupts the operation of the cross blower fan to avoid
excessive decrease in temperature. The final regulation is optimized between 8°C to 28°C (+/1,5°C) of ambient. When the room temperature exceeds the 40ºC, this circuit also interrupts the
system for defect.
Section - XIII
Measurements & Calibrations
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 8
A supplementary safety circuit consisting of a NTC (NTC1), located near the power connector J2,
completely cuts off voltage to the Peltiers. The purpose of the circuit is to detect temperatures
higher than 75ºC on the printed circuit, possibly caused by the false contacts in the connections.
This circuit also functions with the analyzer in the sleep mode, thus assuring the selected
temperature.
13-4.
BARCODE CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS
The calibration involves the aligning of the barcode scanner beam in the precise direction
corresponding to the reagent bottle and the sample tube in the serum plate. The mechanical
adjustment should be performed with the aid of the diagnostic program. The barcode module
should also be programmed for the special reading of up to five types of barcode labels.
13-4.1.
PROGRAMMING OF SERUM/REAGENT BARCODE
Click on "Mechanics" button to access the barcode diagnostics program. The available functions
allow the user to verify and optically align the scanner beam on the reagent and sample barcode
labels. It is also possible to read the information of the barcode label if it is present.
The mechanical alignment can be carried out by repeatedly clicking on the desired sample or
reagent barcode button. It is possible to precisely align the scanner beam on the barcode label
after loosening the mounting screws. The barcode controller can also be programmed in the
diagnostics program by using a specific floppy disk available upon request.
13-4.2.
BARCODE - MECHANICAL CALIBRATION
In the same "Mechanics" page, select the desired barcode scanner to be calibrated mechanically.
Click the desired function laser scan command button "Read Barcode on Reagent" or "Read
Barcode on Serum". Verify that the scanner beam is precisely centered on the barcode label of the
reagent bottle or the sample tube in the serum plate. It is possible to correctly align the barcode
modules by loosening the mounting screws. After the alignment, fasten the screws. Refer to
Paragraph 13-6. entitled "Primary Tube Sensor Calibration and Specifications" for the final
verification of the correct operation of the barcode module.
13-5.
ISE MODULE CALIBRATION AND SPECIFICATIONS
The calibration involves the adjustment of sensibility threshold of bubble sensor and the
verification of correct operation of the hydraulic circuit and electronics.
The bubble sensor calibration should be performed by measuring the voltage of the electronic
photo-switch with an empty and a full fluid tube inside. The difference between the two
measurement values must be of at least 0.5 Volts.
The diagnostic program for the I.S.E module, allows verification of the drift of the electrodes, the
efficiency of the hydraulic circuit and the bubble sensor. It does not allow the calculation of slope
and therefore the real efficiency of the electrodes.
The commands are as follows: "ISE Module Prime", "Read ISE", "Fill Up ISE", "Empty Out ISE",
and "Read Sensors".
The first command "ISE Module Prime" is essential for setting bubble sensor sensitivity threshold,
when accessing the diagnostic program for the first time. The command, “Read ISE” reads
potentials of all the electrodes in mV. The potential of the REF electrode is displayed separately in
the upper section of the screen. The clicking of the “Fill up ISE” button performs a baseline
sampling followed by a reading. Reading repeatedly with “Read ISE” it is possible to observe the
potential and therefore the drift.
The expected values should be between +500mV and -500mV. The REF should have a value
between 2.2 Volt to 2.9 Volt. The values other than the expected values may indicate an improper
flow in the electrodes or in the worst case a defective electronic circuit. A typical example of
electrodes malfunction is encountered when handling the electrodes during the maintenance. One
can inadvertently touch the gold-coated contact pin of the electrode, causing an electrostatic
charge in the electrode. In this case, it is possible to observe the continuously changing values of
the potential.
Section - XIII
Measurements & Calibrations
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 8
To verify the efficiency of the bubble sensor, click on "Read Sensors" button to display the fluid
tube "Full Value" and "Empty Value" in volts. The difference between the two values should be
higher than 0.5 Volts for the correct operation of the sensor. A difference of less than 0.5 Volt
indicates that the optical sensor has not detected sufficient variation between air and liquid. This
may be due to fluid being stationary in the segment of tube across bubble sensor or the tube has
lost its original transparency.
Finally, the command "Empty ISE" is a useful option for emptying the ISE mixing funnel.
13-5.1.
ISE BUBBLE SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
To calibrate the ISE bubble sensor, proceed with the following:
a) Click "Analyzer".
b) Click "Diagnostic".
c) Click "General Diagnostic".
d) Click "ISE MODULE". Place a bottle containing Baseline on the small tray in the ISE
module and click "ISE Module Prime" and wait for the termination of prime cycle.
e) Click "Read Sensor", and wait for the values (Full Value and Empty Value) to appear
automatically on the screen. The difference between the two values should be more
than 0.5 Volt.
NOTE:
The measurement value generated by sensor for tube filled with Baseline (Full Value), must be
between 3 Volts (minimum) and 4.2 Volts maximum. If otherwise, then lift out the ISE module from
its track rail (even with the analyzer turned on) and turn the TR1 trimmer adjustment screw
clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the voltage. See Figure 1.
THE TRIMMER TR1 IS
LOCATED ON THE REAR
OF ISE MODULE, JUST
BEHIND
THE BUBBLE
SENSOR
ISE MODULE
Figure 1
f)
g)
Put back the module in its place and press the key F5 to perform a general reset.
Repeat the preceding steps (for tube filled with liquid) until the desired values are
obtained.
NOTE:
In case the delta results are below the threshold of 0.5 Volts, this may be due to incorrect
observation of calibration procedure, or malfunction of hydraulic circuit or photo-switch.
Section - XIII
Measurements & Calibrations
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 8
13-5.2.
ISE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT VERIFICATION
It is very important to control the flow of liquids in the hydraulic circuit. During the prime function,
the Baseline must completely fill up the Reference electrode, thus keeping the hydraulic circuit full
and without air bubbles - starting from the "Y"-connector to the ground electrode.
CAUTION!
Any interruption in the flow of liquid causes air bubbles and affects measurement of potentials of all the
electrodes.
Enter the "Utility" page and click on the icon "Prime ISE". After the prime function terminates,
gently lift out the ISE module and observe if the hydraulic circuit is full. Put back in place the ISE
module and press F5 to reset.
13-5.3.
ISE ELECTRODES POTENTIAL VERIFICATION
It is possible to make a precise measurement of the electrodes potential through Diagnostic
program.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Prior to verification, the ISE system must be primed.
After entering the diagnostic page concerning the ISE, click "Fill Up". In this operation the
Reference Solution fills up all the electrodes including the reference electrode. After the sampling
read the potentials by clicking on the "Read ISE". After some seconds the monitor displays the mV
measurement values of 4 selected electrodes. The electrode potential is expressed in Volts and is
displayed on the upper part of the screen.
The expected values for Ref, Na, K, Cl and CO2 electrodes should be within the range -400mV to
+400mV. If the values do not correspond then there is a probability that a hydraulic circuit problem
did not let the solution correctly fill up the electrodes. Note that, if the electrodes are empty, they
can assume any potential value. It is also possible that only the REF electrode is empty. In this
case, it will affect the level of the other electrodes. Verify the correct operation of peristaltic pump
for emptying and the pinch-valve tubing.
Other situations that may cause a malfunction of ISE module are as follows:
1) One or more electrodes out of range because they were subjected to electrostatic
discharge during handling
2) Defective preamplifier
3) Incorrect reference solution
NOTE: The reading of potential does not indicate any exhaustion or expiration of an electrode. The
electrode's efficiency is verified only through the SLOPE performed by a calibration and the performance
characteristics listed in the package insert.
For additional details refer to ISE troubleshooting.
13-6.
ISE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT VERIFICATION
The calibration consists of sensitivity threshold adjustment of electro-optical system (LED and
photodiode). The optical element exploits the principle of reflection. The infrared light beam
emitted by LED is reflected back from the primary tube and received by the photodiode sensor
element. One can proceed with calibration after placing three 10mm diameter primary tubes with
appropriate adapter in a triangular configuration (i.e.: in positions 02, 03, 29 on the serum plate.)
There are two primary tube sensors. The one on the left of serum chamber detects the presence
or absence of primary tubes appropriate to the left sampling arm. The one located on the right of
serum chamber detects the presence or absence of tubes pertaining to the right sampling arm
used for aspiration of serum for ISE, starter and dilution. The sensitivity threshold should be
adjusted in such a way that the primary tube sensor detects only the primary tube and not the
interference from the adjacent tubes.
A green LED located on top of the detecting circuit provide the user with a visual indication of the
sensitivity threshold monitoring for distinguishing the primary tube. The removal of front casing is
necessary for making any adjustment or service.
As a first step use unlabelled 10mm tubes for calibrating in worst conditions. Manually rotate the
serum plate with slow motion so that the three primary tubes #02, 03, and 29 sequentially move
past the primary tube sensor. Bear in mind that the waste funnel is the reference point of the
sensor located on the same axis. Observe that with each primary tube moving past the primary
tube sensor turns on and off the green LED.
Section - XIII
Measurements & Calibrations
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 8
A sensor with an excessive sensibility does not distinguish the spacing between the primary tubes
and on the contrary it may not detect the presence of a tube particularly the one located on the
inner circle further away.
The sensitivity is adjusted through trimmers TR1 located on the boards 15-04280-01 and 1504278-01. Turning the trimmer adjusting screw clockwise increases the sensitivity and turning it
counterclockwise decreases the sensitivity. Keep in mind that the analyzer must always function
with labeled tubes therefore it is preferable to adjust calibration to lower sensitivity rather than to
higher sensitivity.
The final test is performed by fully scanning the serum plate and by inserting at least six tubes with
barcode labels. Placing three tubes in triangle formation in positions #02, 03, and 29. Now place
three tubes in positions #15, 16, and 42. Once completed, go to the "Patient Entry" page and enter
"Options" to start "Scan Tray-All". At the end of scanning, if the primary tube sensor has correctly
tracked the presence of all the six tubes, then their barcode numbers should be visible in the
patient page. This means that the primary tube sensor and the barcode scanner have functioned
properly.
If scanning problems occur, the following two types of error messages may appear:
a)
b)
13-7.
"Label Not Found in Pos.28": all primary tubes have been detected. The barcode
scanner has not read the barcode label correctly because it is defective.
Barcode numbers of 5 primary tubes displayed, instead of 6 tubes. The primary sensor
has not detected the remaining one primary tube. Verify the mechanical calibration of
the serum plate and ultimately the sensitivity of the optical detection circuit.
ISE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT VERIFICATION
This program performs a limitless cycle of mechanical stress on the analyzer. Generally this
program is used for verifying the efficiency of replaced mechanical devices after service and
repair.
Section - XIII
Measurements & Calibrations
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 8
SECTION - XIV
TROUBLE - SHOOTING
14-1.
INTRODUCTION
Any investigation of malfunction, which might occur, must begin with verification of power supply
and the ambient conditions. During troubleshooting the following parameters for correct analyzer
operation must be verified:
Power Supply:
Ambient Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
100 – 240~, 50/60 Hz
18°-32°C
10% - 90% RH non-condensating
In case the parameters do not correspond to the indicated range of values, then observe the
following procedures and the appropriate corrective actions. Prior to servicing the BT3000 PLUS
chemistry analyzer, switch off the instrument and disconnect the power cordset.
14-1.1.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING CUVETTE TEMPERATURE
CUVETTE TEMPERATURE
SYMPTOMS
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Cuvettes do not reach
operating temperature of
30°, 32° and 37°C or
unstable temperature.
1)
2)
3)
14-1.2.
Ambient temperature out of limits. Reenter ambient
temperature limits 18°- 32°C.
Defective electronic circuit causing unstable temperature or
for temperature to exceed maximum limits. Replace the
temperature sensor or the master power board or the chip
µC764. Refer to "Measurement and Calibration"
procedures for the reading station outlined in the Section
XIII to find out the defective device. After replacing the
temperature sensor, there may be temperature fluctuation
of ± 0.5°C. In this case make adjustments as per calibration
procedure.
A defective Peltier module will cause temperatures to be
lower or near ambient temperature. Check if there are one
or more defective Peltiers. Even one defective Peltier can
stop the temperature monitoring system.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING REAGENT CHAMBER TEMP.
REAGENTS CHAMBER TEMPERATURE
SYMPTOMS
The base of the reagent
chamber does not reach
the set lower temperatures
(5°-15°C) or some times
seems to be heating. In
some cases excessive
cooling with ice formation.
Section - XIV
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1)
2)
3)
Defective Cross-flow blower causing high temperature.
Verify and replace if necessary.
Interrupted Peltier causing refrigeration failure. Verify and
replace defective Peltier.
Defective temperature sensor or reagent control board
causing overheat or ice formation. Verify and replace the
defective part.
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 11
14-1.3.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS
SYMPTOMS
1) The analyzer turns off
suddenly without any
apparent reason. The
vacuum pump system
makes unusual noises.
2) UPS (if installed)
generates
continuous
alarms.
3)
The
analyzer
generates
random
resets of mechanical
devices or the software.
14-1.4.
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1)
2)
3)
Power supply problems: defective main power, power cord
not properly connected, UPS connected incorrectly. Get
your main power line checked and repaired by a competent
electrician. Connect power cord correctly.
Main power line generating high surge voltage due to lack of
ground connection. Request your electric company to verify
and repair the line if necessary.
Defective UPS or discharged batteries. Disconnect UPS
temporarily to verify if it is causing the problem If necessary
substitute with new UPS. Try to recharge the batteries or
substitute them. Bear in mind that the UPS supplied with the
instrument is universal type and it cannot be used in
extremely critical situations where the electrical lines are
subject to large surges. In such cases it is recommended to
use a more sophisticated UPS (i.e. NOBREAK, etc.)
TROUBLE-SHOOTING POWER UP PROBLEMS
POWER UP PROBLEMS
SYMPTOMS
After turning
analyzer,
happens.
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
on the
nothing
1) No power due to various causes. The monitor is off; only the
After turning on, the
program
loading
(bootstrap)
by
the
computer is interrupted
and
the
computer
blocks. Turning off the
computer with the push
button
becomes
necessary.
1) The analyzer has been turned off incorrectly through main
The instrument or one of
its peripheral devices
does not turn on
Section - XIV
refrigerator fan can be heard. Verify all the connections and
the correct operation of the UPS.
2) The computer has not been turned on through its push button.
Press push button to turn on the computer.
3) Hardware problem: defective motherboard or power supply.
After verifying, repair or replace.
switch or sudden main power line interruption with consequent
damaging of some files. Wait for the disks verification to be
performed automatically by the system. Verify any errors in the
hard disk. Contact the service engineer for any problems.
2) Hardware conflict between the system peripheral devices or
damaged peripheral device. The peripheral device must be
reconfigured or substituted in case of damage. Contact service
engineer.
Verify that the UPS group is turned on, the electrical cables are
correctly connected and check the fuses. If fuses need
replacement then observe the following procedure:
1) Turn off the instrument by pressing the main switch on the rear
panel and unplug power cord.
2) Extract the fuse-holder (located above the main switch on the
rear panel) by gently opening the latch with a tool. Discard the
old fuses and replace with new fuses, which match the
selected voltage rating indicated on the rear panel label. Insert
the fuse-holder into the compartment and push until its latch
snaps back into the position (see Fig. 3, Chapter B).
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 11
14-1.5.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING THE MOUSE AND KEYBOARD
THE MOUSE & KEYBOARD
SYMPTOMS
The system performs the
boot
correctly,
the
analyzer logo appears
and seems to be ready,
but the cordless keyboard
and mouse do not work.
14-1.6.
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1)
2)
The RF Receiver cable disconnected from the rear panel.
Check and correctly connect the cable.
Exhausted batteries in the keyboard or the mouse.
Substitute the batteries with the analyzer power on; press
the devices button to put them in communication (setup).
The sequence is: RF Receiver, keyboard and the mouse.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING RESET ERRORS
Reset Errors: Serum Plate/Reagent Tray/Diluter/Arm
SYMPTOMS
The analyzer after routine
boot displays an error
message about one of the
following modules:
• Reset error of serum
plate
• Reset error of reagent
tray
• Reset error of diluter
• Reset error sampling
arm etc.
Diluter blocked:
Diluter functions but does
not reset:
Section - XIV
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1)
2)
Inadvertent accidental blockage by operator of one or
more modules. For correct operation perform a general
reset (F5 or Reset Icon).
If the problem persists the problem may lie in the
mechanics or electronics of one of the modules. The
defective module seems to be operating but an error
message appears.
NOTE: To diagnose a mechanical or electronic problem is quite
simple. Generally speaking a mechanical defect produces a partial
movement in the device and careful observation of the mechanism
during operation one can easily identify the problem. The electronic
problems are related to motor drivers and the position sensors. In case
the device is functional but does not stop in correct position, the
problem in the reset sensor. Depending upon the module it may be a
photo-switch or Hall sensor. These specified problems might associate
to diluter, reagent tray, serum plate, cuvettes plate, and the washing
piston. If the device makes no movement then there is a defective
circuit of the power driver or a defective motor. Consideration should
be given to the fact that all modules have the same basic structure:
motor, driver, position sensor and the micro-controller. The service
operations for resolving the problem are deliberately confined to the
substitution of the defective devices already mentioned. In case the
service engineer is unable to resolve the problem, the whole electronic
circuit of the module can be substituted. It is important to verify that the
devices are properly connected and that the cables and connectors
are free of defects.
It is also important to try to distinguish the hydraulic problems from
those of electronics as regards analyzer malfunctions. Any improper
evaluation of problems may lead to inadmissible loss of time. Outlined
below are some procedures for quickly locating the problems.
DILUTER
Defective motor, driver, micro-controller, connecting cable, or
PCB. Repair or replace.
Defective photo-switch, micro-controller, connecting cables, or
PCB. Repair or replace. In case the Diluter is damaged or
defective then it should be completely substituted.
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 11
Reset Errors: Serum Plate/Reagent Tray/Diluter/Arm
SYMPTOMS
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Sampling arm moves
vertically without resetting:
SAMPLING ARM
Defective Hall sensor or positioned incorrectly. Repair or
Replace
Sampling Arm blocked:
Defective driver or interrupted motor. Bear in mind that the arm
does not make angular (swivel) motion until after the vertical
reset. To verify the correct functioning of the three arm sensors
(Hall sensor for UP/DOWN motion, Liquid Sensor, Photo-switch
for angular motion) observe the three corresponding LEDs
located on a small PVC bracket near the arm shaft. If the arm is
moved up/down manually, the upper LED lights to indicate the
correct functioning of the Hall sensor. The touching with a
finger of the arm needle will light the middle LED. Swiveling the
arm to the left or right will light and switch off the lower LED.
Repair or replace defective motor or driver.
Zero position calibration of
the sampling arm not
maintained in successive
resets:
The upper part of the arm (needle head) has loose screws and
is not secured to shaft properly. Dirt in the Zero position photoswitch or the photo-switch shutter. Tighten the screws. Clean
with a brush the photo-switch or the shutter.
The arm needle holder
does not heat up:
Interrupted heater circuit inside the sampling arm, in this case
the liquid sensor functions as the LED lights up just by the bare
touch of the finger. On the other hand if the LED does not light
up then the electrical circuit is interrupted at the source. Verify
the power supply starting from the source, the Master Power
Board 15-04209-01. If the arm is damaged or defective then it
is recommended to substitute it completely.
The serum plate rotates
during reset and stops at
an incorrect position with
a screen message "Reset
Error...":
The tray does not stop at
the container number 1
position and issues an
error message "Reset
Error...":
Section - XIV
SERUM PLATE
Most likely the Hall sensor malfunction. The magnet on the
upper rim of the serum plate is not properly aligned with the
Hall sensor. Defective Hall sensor or connecting circuit
interrupted. No rubber mat over the rotating serum base. In the
absence of rubber mat the magnet position is displaces a few
millimeters downwards thus causing misalignment with the Hall
sensor. Other various causes: Magnet detached from the plate
or defective electronic circuit (Board 15-04282-01 & Board 1504422-01). The serum plate resets correctly but does not
respect the positions and the sampling needle descends in the
wrong positions. Most likely the serum plate slips on the rubber
mat during rotation. Remove and wash the rubber mat with a
neutral soap and water. If the problem persists then the causes
may be as follows: Transmission problem with one of the
following devices: Timing Belt, motor, driver and Control Board
(15-04422-01).
1)
2)
REAGENT TRAY
Defective Hall sensor or the sensor out of range from
magnet. Repair or replace.
Defective belt drive, stepping motor, driver, or Control
Board 15-05211-01. Repair or replace.
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 11
14-2.
COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE-SHOOTING
The diagnosis of computer system malfunction should be quite simple, as the problem generally
occurs during the powering up of the analyzer. The most frequent problems are generally the loss
of files or a hard disk malfunction. Statistically these problems almost always are caused by
incorrect operations as follows: Turning off the analyzer incorrectly, using back-up disks that is
infected with a virus, incorrect use of the computer, etc.
14-2.1.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING THE COMPUTER MODULE
COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE SHOOTING
SYMPTOMS
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
The analyzer starts up but
no LCD display.
1. Probably a defective VGA driver or incorrect connection of
the LCD display. Check on the rear of display that the lamp
is lit. Check that the VGA board is properly inserted into the
slot of mainboard. Make sure that all the cables of display
including the inverter cables are properly connected. If
necessary replace VGA Board.
2. The inverter of the display lamp power supply defective or
incorrectly connected. Check that the inverter cable is
correctly connected. If necessary replace inverter.
NOTE: It is also possible to connect an external CRT monitor to identify the
problem.
The
touch-screen
functions now and then
only in some zones of the
screen.
Dirty screen, defective touch-screen driver, or defective serial
port where the driver is connected.
Gently clean the LCD display screen with a soft lint free cloth
moistened with an appropriate neutral detergent and delicately
wipe to dry up. Check that the flat cable of touch-screen is
properly connected to the driver. If necessary replace driver or
serial port.
After loading Windows,
the loading of the process
program starts and is
visible on the progression
bar.
The
progression
bar
inactive, followed by an
error
message
"Impossible
to
Reset
Analyzer". All electromechanical
devices
remain motionless.
1. No communication between the computer and the process
electronics. Check that the flat cable across IBM and the
Main Logic Board (on the rear of the reading station) is
properly connected.
2. Defective RS-232 serial communication port of the computer
or the micro-controller. Check and replace if necessary.
3. Defective Main Logic Board. Verify and replace if necessary.
No
communication
between the analyzer and
the host computer.
Defective relevant serial ports or interrupted connecting cable.
Verify and replace serial port. Check that the interface cable is
correctly connected.
NOTE: If the interface with the host computer is done for the first time then
there may be a software problem. To avoid software problems, use specific
software protocols for verification of communications.
Section - XIV
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 11
14-2.1.1.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL
The computer box of analyzer BT3000 PLUS and by-products is designed for long-term security
and reliability and is virtually maintenance-free as long as the user does not install any third-party
application programs. If these applications are installed, then they may damage the operating
system registry and may also cause disastrous consequence for a computer's hard-drive.
14-2.2.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING THE BOOTSTRAP
BOOTSTRAP - COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE SHOOTING
SYMPTOMS
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
After
turning
on
the
computer the bootstrap
process interrupts and
displays an error message:
“NTLDR not found press
any key to restart".
There is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive of the computer.
Remove floppy disk and press any key.
During
the
bootstrap
process, an error message
appears on the screen:
“Disk boot failure, insert
System Disk and press
Enter"
1. Hard disk cable disconnected. Connect the hard disk cable
properly.
2. Damaged or unformatted hard disk. If necessary, replace the
hard disk. Format the hard disk.
3. Incorrect configuration in BIOS setup. Verify the STANDARD
CMOS SETUP and particularly the configuration of the Hard
Disk.
NOTE: Guidelines for installation of the operative system or the
application programs on the BT3000 PLUS (complete reinstallation
and/or substitution of hard disk and/or replacement of
motherboard) is required for motherboards of new generation.
4. Configure the startup sequence in BIOS setup with CD-ROM
drive as the first peripheral, the hard disk as second
peripheral and the floppy disk drive as the third peripheral.
Caution! After installation of the Windows® 2000 PRO operative
system, restore the original BOOT configuration.
5. Install Windows 2000 PRO by starting the computer with the
CD and carefully select FAT32 as file system. Insert the user
name, organization name and the password: <<administrator
enzo>>.
6. Enter Control Panel - System - Hardware and then Device
Manager to verify the correct installation of all the devices.
Eventually remedy the causes of any conflicts and if
necessary, install an appropriate updated driver for any
unidentified device (Audio, additional serial port, and touchscreen etc.).
7. Install application software of the external peripherals (i.e.
printer, UPS, etc.)
8. Install application software of BT 3000 PLUS.
Section - XIV
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 11
BOOTSTRAP - COMPUTER MODULE TROUBLE SHOOTING
SYMPTOMS
CAUSES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
After power on and during
the bootstrap process,
password request window
appears on the display.
Enter Control Panel - Users and Passwords – remove the "X"
mark from the box corresponding to the <<User must enter
name and password to use this computer, and to change
passwords and other settings>>.
Possible problems during
reinstallation of hardware
devices (i.e. additional
serial
boards,
touchscreen etc.)
Correct drivers have not been installed. Previously a board by
another manufacturer was installed and is still present in the
system even if physically disconnected.
14-3.
Note: In the case of serial board, two new gates COM3 and COM4 are
assigned to replace COM5 and COM6. In such a case it is necessary to
enter the Advanced Settings of the appropriate serial communication
port and modify it manually.
UNRELIABLE RESULTS OF ANALYSES
General Considerations:
Any errors by the operator in application of method, use of appropriate reagent, or a sample of
unknown origin are excluded a priori.
14-4.
METHOD FOR VERIFICATION OF PHOTOMETRIC
INSTABILITY
It is possible to make quick verification of photometric stability by using the general diagnostic
program, excluding sampling problems.
Fill up (in "Photometer" mode) all the cuvettes with H2O through appropriate command. In case of
hydraulic defects, manually fill the cuvettes. Select a pair of interference filters, where 700nm filter
is always selected as the second filter. Perform a zeroing and then the consecutive readings, while
observing the stability of absorbances of all the cuvettes (last column on the right). Normally the
values should be around +/- 1 point. Repeat a few times after short interval of some minute to
insure long-term stability of readings.
If considerable variations are observed in a short period of time, then instability in the photometric
lamp is to blame. If the instability regards one or more cuvettes, then it is likely that there are
foreign debris or moving corpuscles inside. In this case remove the foreign debris or corpuscles by
using the aspiration tube of the washing piston plunger (located on the upper end of the piston
plunger).
To verify the photometric instability (relevant only to the photometer), execute the command
"Reading" followed by "read zero filter". The offset values of all the channels will be displayed. The
values should be stable and within the range of 0 to 150 points. If otherwise then one should
suspect the infiltration of water in the photometer caused by a defect in the hydraulic circuit. In this
case one should assume that the water might also have seeped into the cuvette rotor. In this case
it will be necessary to completely remove the cuvette plate and rotor, and then thoroughly dry the
whole system including the cuvettes.
14-5.
VERIFICATION OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION
The hydraulic circuit consists of the diluter, peristaltic pumps, and pinch valves. The instrument
detects any malfunction of the preceding devices during power on. Appropriate alarms indicate the
type of problem: dilutor reset error, collapsed or sticking tube in pinch-valve, water lacking etc. The
messages are generated during test runs for lack of water and the dilutor reset error.
Section - XIV
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 11
The poor reproduction of results is generally caused by an imprecise aspiration of sample or
reagent, insufficient vacuum level for the reading cuvette washing and drying. In the first case
verify the correct operation of the dilutor, correct alternating motion of the piston and the absence
of air bubble in the exposed hydraulic circuit. As regards the cuvette washing and drying phase,
verify the water consumption necessary for the washing of 34 cuvettes. To verify the water
consumption place the water intake tube (from the external water supply container) in a graduated
beaker or cylinder filled with at least 500 ml of distilled water and launch the function "Wash
Cuvette". At the end one should observe a water consumption of at least 150 ml, which is
equivalent to 4,5 ml per cuvette. Any lack in amount of water consumption may depend on scarce
vacuum level or a partial occlusion in the washing piston.
A frequently neglected additional cause of photometric instability is due to the poor overall
maintenance of the analyzer. Particularly the irregular routine washing of the cuvettes may cause
a progressive contamination the cuvettes through deposits, which are difficult to eliminate.
Just consider a gradual stratification of reagents on the inner surfaces of the reading cuvette, their
gradual release during tests and the possible consequences. In such cases it is of utmost
importance to perform a thorough washing by using hydrochloric acid 0,1N (instead of routine
washing solution) and leaving it inside the cuvette for at least 5 minutes. Then follow up with a
standard H2O wash. After having given consideration to the preceding circumstances, an error
may emerge during the photometric zeroing phase caused by variable conditions of
transparencies of cuvettes during the washing progression. Therefore perform a "SETLAMP" to
restore the reference conditions and then a "Zeroing " or "Photometer zeroing".
14-6.
ISE TROUBLESHOOTING
If the routine maintenance is performed regularly, the ISE module functions correctly. The most
common problems encountered in the ISE Module are as follows:
a)
b)
c)
a)
Calibration errors.
Unreliable sample results with flags.
Error messages of air bubbles.
CALIBRATION ERRORS
The causes may be due to various reasons and can be diagnosed through close examination of
mV values of slopes.
Typical values of calibration potentials in mV:
std low =
std high =
-8 mV
+22 mV
Na
std low =
std high =
-10 mV
+ 5 mV
difference 15mV (slope 63 mV)
Cl
std low =
std high =
+6 mV
-4 mV
difference 10mV (slope 50 mV)
CO2
std low =
std high =
+4 mV
-6 mV
difference 10mV (slope 32mV)
K
difference 30 mV (slope 57 mV)
The above-mentioned values are indicative and may deviate due to the wear and tear of the
electrodes.
A positional error or an incorrect concentration of reagents may determine a considerable variation
of potentials and slopes.
The mV values (in brackets) in the calibrations printout can give additional indications,
which are useful for the diagnostics.
For example:
Std low
-8mV
Std high
+22mV
(-208 -200)
(-178 -200)
One can observe in the above example the Baseline value (-200), which must be always included
between two Std values. In fact the value -200 is between the two values -208 and -178.
Section - XIV
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 11
Various combinations of error
►
►
Inversion of Buffer / Baseline
Considerable increase of potentials (up to 100mV), decrement of slopes.
Insertion of identical reagents: Buffer / Buffer or Baseline / Baseline.
The potentials are almost within norms but there is considerable decrement of slopes.
In the above items, the Baseline values shown in the preceding example shall not be
coherent.
b)
OBSTRUCTIONS CAUSED BY PROTEINS IN ELECTRODES CL &CO2
After approximately 150 to 200 samples, the Cl & CO2 electrodes may be periodically obstructed.
In this case, one observes an increase in the slopes of K & Na, and decrement in the slopes of Cl
& CO2. Follow the instructions for the cleaning of electrodes.
A partially occluded Ground electrode may also cause a similar error.
Generally, the obstructions are caused by the foreign matter and not by protein. Carefully
observe the cleaning procedures as outlined in the Figures 14-1 and 14-2 on the ensuing
pages.
NOTE:
A prolonged obstruction of the Cl electrode may progressively obstruct the electrodes below it (CO2 and Bypass). For
cleaning these electrodes, use syringe for the CO2 and the cleaning tool on the Bypass as shown in the Figure 14-2.
c)
BAD RESULTS OF SAMPLES:
Generally, this phenomenon occurs during sampling but it may take place afterwards.
Observe the above-mentioned diagnostic procedures.
d)
ERROR MESSAGES, AIR BUBBLES, FLAGS
During a calibration or a run an error message "Air bubbles" may appear. The error may be
momentary and not appear afterwards. In this case, it means a casual formation of bubbles. If it
persists then it may be due to problems of hydraulic nature.
a)
ISE funnel takes long time to empty. It may be caused by defective or worn peristaltic
pump for draining or an obstruction in the electrodes stack. Repair or replace.
b)
Prime operation failure. The Prime also calibrates the bubble sensor. Check that prime
is performed properly.
c)
Collapsed tube in the ISE pinch-valve. The Baseline solution doesn't enter the
Reference electrode and the funnel doesn't empty. The Reference electrode is filled
during the prime. Check and correct.
e)
RESULTS WITH FLAG "D"
During the reading, the flag "D" on one or more electrodes indicates a drift of potential greater than
2 mV. The phenomenon may be determined by one of the following causes:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Defective electrode.
Electrode to be reconditioned.
Partial occlusion of the electrode.
Incorrect reagents.
No washing after a consistent run.
Correlation with general problems already explained.
Section - XIV
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 9 of 11
NOTICE
CHLORIDE ELECTRODE
NEEDLE TOOL P/N 03254
It is often possible to extend the life of a chloride electrode by using the supplied
CHLORIDE ELECTRODE NEEDLE TOOL.
1)
Grasp the NEEDLE TOOL as shown. Gently insert the tip of the needle tool
into either end of electrode. Keeping your fingers off the opposite end of
electrode, slowly but firmly push the needle straight through the electrode's
inner core until the needle tip appears at the other end of the electrode (be
careful not to bend the needle inside the electrode). Wipe off any debris on the
needle tip and gently pull the needle back out of the electrode. Wipe off the
needle and remove any debris or moisture from the electrode surface.
CHLORIDE ELECTRODE
NEEDLE TOOL
2)
Reinstall the electrode into the electrode housing in the correct order.
3)
Install the electrode housing into the analyzer. Connect tubing and prime the
ISE module completely. If the electrode's performance does not improve,
contact your local Technical Support.
WARNING
NEEDLE TOOL can damage all other electrodes (K, Na, CO2, REF). Do
not use!
Chloride Electrode Cleaning Procedure
Figure 14-1
Section - XIV
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 10 of 11
NOTE:
FOR CONVENIENCE SAKE, IT IS IMPORTANT TO DETACH THESE
ELECTRODES IN SMALL GROUPS FROM THE REST TO AVOID
POSSIBLE ACCIDENTAL DAMAGE WHEN HANDLING A LONG
STRING OF ELECTRODES. OBSERVE THE CLEANING PROCEDURE
OUTLINED HERE FOR OTHER ELECTRODES.
GND
Electrode
REF
Reference
Electrode
BI-DISTILLED
WATER
CLEANING TOOL, P/N 03254
REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS IN
THE FIGURE 1
REFERENCE
SOLUTION
Cl
Na Sodium
Chloride
Electrode
Electrode
CO2
CLEANING PROCEDURE
Carbon
Dioxide
1) Carefully insert the tip of 5ml - 10 ml syringe
filled with appropriate solution onto the top duct
of electrode assembly as shown.
2) Inject solution until all the solution is forced
through interconnecting bores of the electrodes
and flows out from the bottom electrode, thus
thoroughly removing any contamination.
K
REF
Reference
Electrode
WARNING
a) PUSH THE PLUNGER ONLY TO EJECT THE
SOLUTION. DO NOT PULL THE PLUNGER TO
ASPIRATE
THE
SOLUTION
INSIDE
ELECTRODES.
THIS
WILL
CAUSE
IRREPARABLE
DAMAGE
AND
CONTAMINATION
TO
THE
POTASSIUM
ELECTRODE WITH Cl OR CO2 PARTICLES.
b) DO NOT USE PLASTIC STRING FOR CLEANING
THE REFERENCE OR Na ELECTRODES AS IT
MAY DAMAGE THE ELECTRODES INTERNALLY
ISE ELECTRODES CLEANING PROCEDURE
Figure 14-2
Section - XIV
Troubleshooting
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Potassium
Electrode
Page 11 of 11
SECTION XV
BT 3000 PLUS
SPARE PARTS FOR REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
THE FOLLOWING IS LISTING OF SUBASSEMBLIES AND INDIVIDUAL PARTS,
WHICH ARE AVAILABLE FOR FIELD REPLACEMENT. INDIVIDUAL PARTS OTHER
THAN THOSE LISTED SUCH AS MECHANICAL PARTS, FASTENERS ETC. ARE
PROVIDED ONLY AS PART OF SUBASSEMBLY. THIS WIDE SELECTION OF SPARE
PARTS ALLOW THE SERVICE ENGINEER TO TAILOR CONFIGURATIONS TO
SPECIFIC REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TO PROVIDE
REPAIR FLEXIBILITY. PLEASE ASK IF YOU REQUIRE OTHER ITEMS NOT LISTED
HERE, AS THIS MAY BE POSSIBLE.
15-1. READING STATION MODULE SPARE PARTS
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
02634
READING CUVETTE
02765
LAMP RETAINING SPRING CLIP
03-04442-05
READING STATION - BT3000 PLUS
06-04433-01
MASTER LOGIC MODULE
07-04334-03
CUVETTE ROTOR HUB ASSY
08-04347-01
TEMPERATURE & HALL SENSOR ASSY
08-04533-01
CUVETTE MOTOR ASSY
08-04695-01
QUARTZ PRISM WITH LENS ASSY
08-04981-02
PELTIER FAN ASSY
08-05132-01
REFERENCE DIODE
11-04779-01
CUVETTE PLATE WITH 34 CUVETTES
11-05083-01
CUVETTE FAN KIT
11-05136-01
MASTER POWER BOARD KIT
11-05137-01
MASTER POWER MODULE (ex 06-04434-01)
11-05209-01
CARTUCCIA POMPA PERISTALTICA (ex 330.9072)
15-04270-01
P.C.B. - READING TRAY INTERFACE
30-04570-01
CUVETTE PELTIER - A
30-04570-02
CUVETTE PELTIER - B
330.5708
"O"-RING FOR CUVETTE
330.8688
TIMING BELT 150 TEETH FOR CUVETTE MOTOR
330.9321
TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP 12V, 35 WATTS, 9°
330.9334
SOCKET FOR HALOGEN LAMP
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 1 of 10
WASHING MODULE
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
07-04850-01
WASHING MODULE ASSY
08-04405-01
WASHER PINCH VALVE ASSY (N.C.)
08-04569-01
PERISTALTIC PUMP ASSY FOR DILUTER
08-04572-01
FLUID CHAMBER PUMP
08-04573-01
STEPPING LINEAR ACTUATOR WASHING SYSTEM
08-04574-01
SAMPLING PINCH VALVE ASSY (N.C.)
08-04929-01
LIQUID SENSOR #WASHING STATION
11-04778-01
WASHING PISTON&PLUNGER ASSY
11-05046-01
DILUTER PUMP KIT (EX 08-04568-01)
15-04651-01
P.C.B. - OPTOCOUPLER
330.5664A
PISTON SEAL
330.5703
O-RING FOR DILUTER
662.0610
WASHING PISTON KIT (ex 02586)
PHOTOMETER
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
04051
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 700 NM
330.9336
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 340 NM
330.9337B
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 380 NM
330.9338
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 405 NM
330.9339
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 436 NM
330.9340
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 478 NM
330.9342
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 510 NM
330.9344
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 546 NM
330.9345
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 578 NM
330.9347B
INTERFERENTIAL FILTER 630 NM
662.1017
FLAT CABLE 16-16C FOR PREAMPLIFIER
06-05133-01
PHOTOMETER – COMPLETE (ex 662.1018)
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 2 of 10
15-2. REAGENT/REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SPARE
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
03275
REAGENT PULLEY WITH MAGNET
06-04435-03
REAGENT CONTROLLER MODULE
08-04537-01
CROSS BLOWER FAN ASSY
08-04633-01
REAGENT MOTOR ASSY
08-04699-01
REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 1-8)
08-04699-02
REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 9-16)
08-04699-03
REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 17-24)
08-04699-04
REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 25-32)
08-04699-05
REAGENT BOTTLES TRAY (MARKED 33-40)
11-04892-01
REAGENT BELT/PULLEY KIT (EX 330.8668)
11-05043-01
REAGENT HALL/TEMPERATURE SENSOR KIT (EX 08-04539-02,
08-04540-03)
11-05155-01
REAGENTS REFRIGERATION ASSY
11-05227-01
REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE BOARD KIT (ex 15-04680-01)
12-04578-01
REAGENT CABLE
12-04711-01
REAGENT CONTROLLER CABLE
330.4605
PELTIER MODULE FOR REAGENTS
330.5709
"O"-RING Ø50.47 X 2.62
330.9351
BARCODE READER
15-3. SERUM MODULE SPARE PARTS
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
02350
SERUM PULLEY
02444
ANTISKID MAT FOR SERUM PLATE
04-04445-04
SERUM MODULE COMPLETE
06-04486-01
SERUM CONTROLLER MODULE
07-04893-01
SERUM PLATE WITH TUBE ADAPTERS
08-04349-01
SERUM MOTOR ASSY
08-04490-01
TENSION PULLEY SERUM
08-04681-01
SERUM PLATE COVER
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 3 of 10
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
11-05044-01
WASHING FUNNEL
11-05152-01
FUNNEL CAP WITH O-RING
12-04536-01
FLAT CABLE FOR PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "RIGHT"
12-04538-01
FLAT CABLE FOR PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR "LEFT"
12-04714-02
SERUM CONTROLLER CABLE
15-04278-01
PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR (RIGHT)
15-04280-01
PRIMARY TUBE SENSOR (LEFT)
15-04282-01
HALL SENSOR ASSY #SERUM
15-04408-01
MOTOR DRIVER BOARD
20-04249-01
SERUM CHAMBER
20-04962-01
TUBE ADAPTER BUSHING #SERUM PLATE
20-04985-01
BOTTOM TUBE SPACER FOR SERUM PLATE
90-05201-01
FUNNEL CAP OPENER (TOOL)
330.8665
TIMING BELT 400 TEETH FOR SERUM PLATE DRIVE PULLEY
330.9351
BARCODE READER WITH CABLE
15-4. SAMPLER ARM SPARE PARTS
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
03196A
DAMPER KIT
06-04436-03
LEFT SAMPLING ARM COMPLETE WITH ENCODER
06-04437-03
RIGHT ISE ARM COMPLETE WITH ENCODER
06-04872-01
LEFT SAMPLING ARM (WITH ENCODER) WITHOUT ARM HEAD
06-04873-01
RIGHT SAMPLING ARM (WITH ENCODER) WITHOUT ARM HEAD
07-04438-02
ARM HEAD WITH HEATER ASSY
08-04733-01
ARM SWIVEL MOTOR ASSY
08-04891-01
ARM UP/DOWN MOTOR ASSY
11-05248-01
ARM CONTROLLER BOARD "L" 15-04765-01 KIT
15-04408-01
MOTOR DRIVER BOARD
15-04765-01
P.C.B. - ARM CONTROLLER (LEFT ARM)
15-04765-02
P.C.B. - ARM CONTROLLER (RIGHT ARM)
15-04767-01
P.C.B. - ENCODER
20-04148-01
THUMB SCREW FOR NEEDLE
330.8694
TIMING BELT 80
330.8695
TIMING BELT 150
662.0629A
CLEANING TOOL FOR ARM NEEDLE
662.1011
SAMPLING NEEDLE
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 4 of 10
15-5. ISE MODULE SPARE PARTS
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
03011
ISE PERISTALTIC PUMP ROTOR #08-04658-01
03254
CLEANING TOOL FOR CHLORIDE ELECTRODE
06-04655-01
ISE MODULE WITH ELECTRODES
07-04665-01
PREAMPLIFIER MODULE
08-04358-01
RESET SENSOR
08-04574-01
ISE DILUTER PINCH-VALVE ASSY (NC)
08-04656-01
ISE 2-WAY PINCH-VALVE ASSY
08-04657-01
DILUTER PERISTALTIC PUMP
08-04658-01
ISE PUMP MOTOR
08-04659-01
ISE LAMP ASSY
08-04760-02
ISE PERISTALTIC PUMP TUBE #03011
08-04978-01
FLUID DISTRIBUTOR MANIFOLD
11-05046-01
ISE DILUTER PUMP KIT (EX 08-04568-01)
11-05135-01
ISE CONTROLLER BOARD KIT
12-04713-01
ISE INTERFACE CABLE
12-05045-01
EXTENSION CABLE FOR ISE DILUTER
15-04408-02
MOTORS DRIVER BOARD #ISE
15-04503-01
ISE INTERFACE BOARD
20-04483-01
ISE FUNNEL
20-04484-01
PLATE FOR REAGENT BOTTLE
30-04763-01
ISE FILTER ASSY
330.5703
O-RING FOR DILUTER
330.9072
CARTRIDGE FOR DILUTER PERISTALTIC PUMP #08-04657-01
662.0705
ISE GROUND ELECTRODE
662.0710
REFERENCE ELECTRODE
662.0711
SODIUM (Na) ELECTRODE
662.0712
POTASSIUM (K) ELECTRODE
662.0713
CHLORIDE (Cl) ELECTRODE
662.0716
CO2 ELECTRODE
662.1024
ISE DISCHARGE ASSY
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 5 of 10
15-6. COMPUTER BOX
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
06-04379-02
COMPUTER MODULE
06-04379-03
COMPUTER MODULE
07-04487-01
MAINBOARD IBM PENTIUM WITH RAM, PROCESSOR AND FAN
07-04487-03
INDUSTRIAL MAINBOARD (MOTHERBOARD)
08-04594-01
IBM COOLING FAN
08-04738-02
LCD DISPLAY MODULE COMPLETE WITH TOUCH SCREEN
08-04738-03
LCD DISPLAY MODULE COMPLETE WITH TOUCH SCREEN
11-05030-01
POWER SUPPLY 300W WITH BRACKET for Pentium IV board only
12-04584-01
IBM SUPPLY CABLE
12-04593-01
ON/OFF PUSHBUTTON ASSY
12-04740-01
POWER SUPPLY CABLE #TOUCH SCREEN
12-04741-01
CABLE FOR TOUCH SCREEN
12-04877-01
EXTENSION CABLE FOR TOUCH SCREEN
330.2144
HARD DISK DRIVE
330.2150
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 3.5" 1.44 MB
330.2153
DVD/CD-ROM PLAYER
330.2167B
FLAT CABLE 40-40-40 (for connecting DVD/CD ROM Player and
Hard Disk to Mother Board)
330.7172
IBM POWER SUPPLY FORTRON 200W for Pentium III board only (old)
330.7173
POWER SUPPLY FORTRON 300W for Pentium IV board only
330.7235A
CPU COOLING FAN for Pentium III board only (old)
330.7260
DIMM 128 Mb (RAM) for Pentium III board only (old)
330.7281
DDR 256 Mb (RAM) for Pentium IV board only
330.9390
TOUCH SCREEN
330.9390A
CONTROLLER FOR TOUCH SCREEN
330.9391
LCD DISPLAY 12.1"
330.9391A
INVERTER FOR LCD DISPLAY
330.9391B
CABLE FOR LCD INVERTER
330.9393
TOUCH SCREEN
330.9393A
CONTROLLER FOR TOUCH SCREEN
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 6 of 10
15-7. CONSUMABLES
PART NO.
392
393
943
944
947
DESCRIPTION
SURFACTANT WASH CONCENTRATE 2X50 ml
CUVETTE WASHING SOLUTION 1 LITER
ISE LOW CALIBRATOR 2 x 20 ml
ISE HIGH CALIBRATOR 2 x 20 ml
ISE STARTER KIT - 600 TESTS:
Buffer Conc., Reference Conc., Washing Solution, Enzymatic Solution, ISE
Calibrator Low, ISE Calibrator High
03254
11-05209-01
11-05219-01
CLEANING TOOL FOR CHLORIDE ELECTRODE
PERISTALTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE (ex 330.9072)
SIX-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (TUBING & ACCESSORIES)
(For analyzer with new Vacuum Pump System P/N 06-05161-01/02/03)
11-05220-01
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (TUBING & ACCESSORIES)
(For analyzer with new Vacuum Pump System P/N 06-05161-01/02/03)
11-05337-01
11-05338-01
330.5703
330.5810
330.5811
330.5820
330.5823
330.9321
330.9614
330.9615
662.1002
SIX-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (The Current Kit )
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT
(The Current Kit )
O-RING FOR DILUTER
ELBOW FITTING 2.38mm (READING STATION)
ELBOW FITTING 3.2mm (READING STATION)
STRAIGHT FITTING 2.24mm (READING STATION)
ELBOW FITTING 1.58mm (READING STATION)
HALOGEN LAMP 12V/35W FOR PHOTOMETER
TUBULAR FILTER FOR H2O TUBE
H2O FILTER FOR WATER PUMP (REAR OF READING STATION)
SIX-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (TUBING & ACCESSORIES)
(For analyzer with Vacuum Pump System - "OBSOLETE" P/N 662.0788/C/D/E/F)
662.1009
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT (TUBING & ACCESSORIES)
(For analyzer with Vacuum Pump System - "OBSOLETE" P/N 662.0788/C/D/E/F)
662.1010
662.1011
662.1016
667.1040
667.1080
667.1083
667.1084
667.1085
667.1086
WASTE CONTAINER (10 LITERS CUBITAINER)
SAMPLING NEEDLE
BIMONTHLY MAINTENANCE KIT (ISE TUBING)
SERUM CUP 2 ml
50 ml BOTTLE WITH SCREW CAP
REAGENT CONTAINER 80 ml
REAGENT CONTAINER 50 ml
REAGENT BOTTLE 20 ml
REAGENT BOTTLE 10 ml
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 7 of 10
15-8. ELECTRONICS HARDWARE
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
08-04546-01
LAMP FAN ASSY
08-04747-01
FLUID DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD (REAR PANEL)
12-04712-01
I2CBUS CABLE
15-04431-01
PERIPHERAL INHIBITION BOARD
15-04661-01
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE BOARD
330.2057
CORDLESS KEYBOARD/MOUSE KIT
330.2132
UPS 1100 VA
330.2165
PRINTER CABLE
330.2172
PRINTER FOR BT 3000 PLUS
330.6338
FUSE 250 VOLT, 0.5 AT
330.6340
FUSE 250 VOLT, 2AT
330.6342B
FUSE 250 VOLT, 8AT
330.6391
POWER CORD
330.6400
POWER CORD FOR PERIPHERAL DEVICES
330.6450
POWER ENTRY MODULE WITH SWITCH
330.7171
LAMBDA POWER SUPPLY (400W)
330.7220A
MAGNET FOR HALL SENSOR
330.7235A
CPU COOLING FAN
330.9321
TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP 12V, 35 WATTS, 9°
15-9. VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM SPARE PARTS
(REFER TO SECTION XII FOR PRODUCT ILLUSTRATIONS))
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 06-05161-01/02/03
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
06-05161-01
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (COMPLETE) FOR BT3000 PLUS
07-05165-01
WASTE PROBE
08-05162-01
VACUUM PUMP ASSY
15-05085-01
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD
20-05145-01
INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER (TRANSPARENT GLASS)
330.6312
POWER ENTRY MODULE
330.6338
FUSE 250 VOLT, 0.5 AT
330.6400
MAIN POWER SUPPLY CORDSET
330.7175
POWER SUPPLY
330.9099
3-WAY SOLENOID VALVE
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 8 of 10
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM P/N 662.0788/C/D/E/F (OBSOLETE)
PART NO.
08-04716-01
08-04734-01
08-04735-01
11-05260-01
11-05339-01
15-04541-02
330.6312
330.6340
330.6342
330.6400
330.7175
330.9088
330.9614
330.9622
330.9623
330.9624
330.9625
330.9649
330.9659B
662.0777B
662.0777C
662.0788
662.0788A
662.0788B
662.0788E
662.0806
662.0807
662.0808
662.0808A
662.0810
662.0831
662.0831A
662.0831C
662.0831D
662.0831E
662.0831F
662.0831G
662.0831H
662.0832
662.0832A
DESCRIPTION
H2O TUBE WITH FILTER
BLUE TUBE FOR WASTE
BLACK TUBE FOR WASTE
ANTI-CONDENSATE KIT (VAC PUMP)
VACUUM PUMP ANNUAL SERVICE KIT
VAC.PUMP SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD
POWER ENTRY MODULE WITH FUSES
FUSE 250 VOLT, 2 AT (230 VAC VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM)
FUSE 250 VOLT, 4 AT (115 VAC VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM)
MAINS POWER SUPPLY CORDSET
POWER SUPPLY
CARTRIDGE # PERISTALTIC PUMP
TUBULAR FILTER FOR H2O TUBE
COUPLING BODY WITH SHUTOFF VALVE - FRONT PANEL
ELBOW FITTING FOR PERISTALTIC PUMP CARTRIDGE
COUPLING BODY STRAIGHT THROUGH FRONT PANEL
SINTERED BRONZE SILENCER
COUPLING INSERT FOR WASTE PROBE - FRONT PANEL
VACUUM REGULATOR
VACUUM PUMP 115 VAC WITH FITTINGS
VACUUM PUMP 230 VAC WITH FITTINGS
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (WITH 2 WASTE PROBES– 230 VAC)
WASTE PROBE-1
WASTE PROBE-2
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM (WITH 2 WASTE PROBES– 110 VAC)
"RESTART" PUSH BUTTON (NOT WIRED)
HYDROPHOBIC FILTER ASSEMBLY
PERISTALTIC PUMP - LEFT
PERISTALTIC PUMP - RIGHT
VACUUM GAUGE ASSY
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY/BOARD 15-04541-02
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLIES
FEMALE FISCHER CONNECTOR KIT
"RESTART" PUSH BUTTON KIT
GROUNDING CABLE FOR VAC PUMP
GROUNDING CABLE FOR POWER INLET
GROUNDING CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY
GROUNDING CABLE FOR PUMP COVER
THE INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER-LEFT
THE INTERNAL WASTE CHAMBER-RIGHT
(Schematics on the Last Pages of this Manual)
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 9 of 10
15-10.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Please contact Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. for any configuration or
special requirement not covered in this manual. For technical or
ordering assistance start w ith our convenient ordering check list
located in the above paragraph. For further assistance, don't hesitate
to
call
the
Biotecnica
Instruments
S.p.A.
or
your
local
sales/representative office.
To obtain accessories/spare parts, address order or enquiry to your
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. sales/service representative or to
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A. and supply the follow ing Informations:
a) Instrument Model and Serial Number
b) Quantity of parts desired
c) Part Number
d) Description
Biotecnica Instruments S.p.A.
Phone: +39 06 411 2316
Via Licenza,18
Fax: +39 06 410 3079
00155 - Rome (ITALY)
E-mail: bt@biotecnica.it
NOTE:
DUE TO IMPROVEMENTS IN DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS,
PRODUCTS MAY DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM THE PREVIOUS DESCRIPTION.
SOME
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
THE BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO
MAKE CHANGES IN DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS WITHOUT NOTICE.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO PROVIDE ACCURATE
TECHNICAL AND PRODUCT INFORMATION. THE BIOTECNICA
INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. DISCLAIMS RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY ERROR
OR OMISSION REGARDING TECHNICAL AND PRODUCT INFORMATION
PRESENTED IN THIS SERVICE MANUAL.
© 2003 BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A., ROME,
ITALY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HEREIN AND NO PORTION OF THIS SERVICE
MANUAL MAY BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE PRIOR CONSENT IN
WRITING OF THE BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
Section XV
Spare Parts
BT3000 PLUS-Service
Page 10 of 10
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04209-01--F-- MASTER POWER-(BT3K+) .vcd 1/31/2005
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04211-01--D--MASTER LOGIC-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
C:\Documents and Settings\Fabio\Documenti\Documenti Preliminari\Piani Montaggio PM\15-04211-01--E--MASTER LOGIC-(BT3K+).VCD 7/22/2005
E:\Programmi\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-04211-01--F--MASTER LOGIC-(BT3K+).vcd 4/10/2006
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04270-01--D--READING PLATE INTERFACE.vcd 5/25/2004
C:\Program Files\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-04278-01--E--SERUM VACUTAINER-R-(BT3K+).VCD 2/24/2005
C:\Program Files\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-04280-01--E--SERUM VACUTAINER-L-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).vcd 2/24/2005
MONTARE IL SENSORE A FILO CON IL BLOCCHETTO PVC
E RIEMPIRE IL FORO CON COLLA BICOMPONENTE.
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04282-01--C--SERUM HALL SENSOR-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).vcd 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04313-03--B--REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04320-01--C--ISE CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04422-01--B--SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04431-01--B--PERIPHERALS DISABLE(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04440-01--A--ISE PREAMPLIFIER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04503-01--B--ISE INTERFACE-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04541-01--B--VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04649-01--C--PREAMPLIFIER.VCD 7/8/2004
E:\Programmi\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-04649-01--D--PREAMPLIFIER.VCD 11/21/2006
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04651-01--A--PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).vcd 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04661-01--B--POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04680-01--B--REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04765-01--C--ARM L CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04765-02--C--ARM R CONTROLLER-(BT3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04767-01--A--ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-04902-01--B--LIQUID SENSOR-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-05021-01--A--DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/25/2004
E:\Programmi\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-05021-01--B--DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 5/26/2006
C:\Documenti\Documenti Preliminari\Piani Montaggio PM\15-05023-01--B--ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER-(BT1K-2K+-3K+).VCD 11/4/2004
J:\Piani montaggio\15-05085-01--D--VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER.vcs.VCD 10/11/2004
C:\Program Files\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-05211-01--B--REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER(BT3K+).VCD 3/31/2005
J:\Piani montaggio\15-05234-01--A--ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER(BT1K-2K-3K+).vcd 1/27/2005
C:\Program Files\OrCAD\DESIGN\15-05234-01--B--ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER(BT1K-2K-3K+).VCD 2/28/2006
C5
470u/35V
F2
3A
+5VP
+
R2
2K7
+5VD
R3
330
VFB
12
TP5
0.22u
L1
C7
R6
10K
C8
220p
C40
C13
R4
330
C11
1u
TEMP
TEMP
C14
+
R16
+
+5VD
0.1u
R63
27K
R8
16K9
C41
JP1
ON
4K7
+5VD
+5VD
+5VP
DGND
PGND
PGND
DGND
VPP
C32
0.47u
+5VP
+5VD
R10
560
+5VP
R9
560
R53
10K
27
U2
TLP2630
MOTOR A
C28
+ 47u/16V
U15
TLP2630
CLK A
24
CLK B
20
R49
560
7
2
PTC8
0.9A
CLK
L2
R70
4K7
4
6
STRB B 19
3
STRB B
R36
100
+5VD
RST
DGND
VPP
PTC6 1.2
2
J8
DILUTER
VALVE 1
1
2
VD1
AMP 2/D
R43
10K
8
1
7
DATA B 21
R A
4
5
16
+5VD
DATA
STRB A
C35
0.47u
15-04408-01
8
9
10
MOTOR B
11
R39
10K
24
20
STRB B 19
D4
C.C.
C.C.
1
2
R18
120/3W
PTC1
1.2
4
PS 3
PD 2
RST
P16
P17
R40
10K
AMP 2/D
PGND
10
D2
C.C.
C21
VCC
15
XT2
7
XT1
6
GND
5
0.1u
J10
DGND
Y1
18.432MHz
V1
SCL
SDA
RST
C.SEN
CLK
DATA
STRB A
L.SENS
C22
22p
C23
22p
STRB B
TEMP
DGND
AGND
C/F
C/T
INH/T
PS
LIV.
C17
10n
DGND
13
25
12
24
11
23
10
22
9
21
8
20
7
19
6
18
5
17
4
16
3
15
2
14
1
R38
560
D25 M/90°
PGND
R60
4K7
J12
R61
1
2
+D
+E
D
E
R37
560
8
7
MASTER
LOGIC
DGND
+5VD
C25
+ 47u/16V
U17
TLP2630
ARM
LIQUID
SENSOR
t
R67
N.M.
R68
N.M.
+5VP
R B
CLK B
P00
P01
P02
P03
87LPC764
Q4
N.M.
R47
2.2 1/2W
CLK A
U18
N.M.
3
+5VD
D3
J13
+5VD
3
R46
1.2 1/2W
J11
+5VD
1
20
19
18
LIQUID
SENSOR
AMP 4/D
TIP127
R22
68/6W
SCL
6
STRB A 25
4
5
6 MOTOR A
7
4
2
1
DATA A 23
PTC7
N.M.
N.M.
P11
P04
P10
1
R44
10K
1
2
3
4
2
15
22
R66
R41
560
t
14
R42
560
2
28
C24
+ 47u/16V
U16
TLP2630
P14
11
17
12
P05
P06
P07
+
+5VP
C34
0.47u
PGND
2
1
2
3
4
AMP 2/D
t
DGND
9
U12
VD 8
C27
47u/35V
1
CUVETTE
CUVETTE
CUVETTE
CUVETTE
1
R59
4K7
DILUTER
PUMP
1
2
DGND
C20
22p
17
SCL
12
A 2
R45
1.2 1/2W
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
J7
PD
t
Q2
L3
FD1
J3/1
J3/2
J3/9
J3/10
PGND
PTC5 1.2
2
SDA
DGND
Q5
BC237
S GND 18
26
C36
0.1u
R48
2.2 1/2W
1
Q3
IRF540
C19
22p
R35
100
Q6
IRF540
5
C37
0.1u
13
R65 4K7
VPP
DGND
27
REFIL
PUMP
1
2
J9
PGND
PGND
J6
PS
VPP
+5VP
1
MOTOR B
10
3
C43
0.1u
FUNNEL
PUMP
1
2
R29
560
8
9
11
+
J5
AMP 2/D
PTC4
1.2
AMP 2/D
PGND
1= ALL.
WASHER
MOTOR
100
AMP 2/D
VD2
9
ULN2003A
PTC3
0.9A
PINCH
VALVE 1
1
2
V1
t
1
8
C26
47u/35V
PGND
C15
1u
+5VD
PGND
DGND
+
J4
PTC2 1.2
2
DGND
SDA
AMP 4X2/D
K
1
2
16
VPP
GND
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
16
15
14 PS
13 PS
12 PD
11
10 PS
16
14
13
WASHER
PUMP
8
2
R50
10K
R B
R69
10
C44
10n
15
13
11
9
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
PGND
t
R28
10K
J14
LIV.
PUMP
LED
PUMP
DGND
AUX
K1 E1
K2 E2
K3 E3
K4 E4
U10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+5VD
15-04408-01
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PD 2
4
6
V1 8
V1
V2
PS
PS
PD
VD
PS
C33
0.47u
VPP
R20
N.M.
A1 C1
A2 C2
A3 C3
A4 C4
16
14
12
10
AR2
4K7
C/T
+5VP
7
R24
220
1
3
5
7
INH/T
6
R25
4K7
PGND
5
5
DGND
+5VD
1K
VPP
+5VP
TLP521-4
R64
N.M.
STRB A
3
5
AMP 4X2/D
WASTE
PROBE
R23
4
RH
1W
1
DILUTER
1
R62
6
STRB A 25
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R19
4K7
PGND
DS2890
TR1
6
4
3
U11
7
3
DATA
U13
TLP521-1
R12
10K
R21
4K7
+
4
2
2 C/F
R15
10K
C16
47u/16V
8
2
1
R55
1.8 1/2W
J2
R51
560
8
7
DATA B 21
R A
2
FD1
R52
560
3
R17
1K
AR1
1K
t
R54
10K
DATA A 23
R56
1.8 1/2W
R57
220
MOLEX 2X8/90°
t
C42
0.1u
14 15
22
28
PGND
R58
15K
R14
10K
1
C29
+ 47u/16V
U14
TLP2630
1
Q1
TIP122
R31
5K6
C38
0.47u
47u/35V
A 1
4
R11
4K7
+5VD
F3
3A
R13
390
U6
VPP
GREEN
1
DL3
YELLOW
PGND
+5VD
READING PLATE
INTERFACE
2
DL2
ORANGE
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TLP521-1
DL1
C30 +
MOTORE CUVETTE
MOTORE CUVETTE
AGND TEMP.CUV.
AGND
OUT TEMP.CUV.
+ TEMP.CUV.
+5VD
+VENT.PELT.
VPP
PELTIER
PELTIER
J3/9 MOTORE CUVETTE
J3/10 MOTORE CUVETTE
DGND HALL CUV.
DGND
OUT HALL CUV.
+ HALL CUV.
+5VD
GND VENT.PELT.
PGND
PELTIER
PELTIER
8
1
16
VPP
4K3
SB540
C9
22n
4
6
R7
47K
+
J3
J3/1
J3/2
9
K1
RT42
D1
C10
1u +
TP6
13
11
SS
INH
5.1V
OUT
OUT
2
3
+
2n2
MOLEX 5X2/90°
9
R32
C31
47u/16V
+
C12
BOOT
3x100u/35V
TP4
VPP
SDA
SCL
C6
47u
35V +
PGND
VPP +5VD
VCC
OSC
L4973-3V3
17
DGND
RST
U3
CMP
PGND
1
2
3
4
5 +24V
6 +24V
7 +5V
8
9
10
1
R5
22K
VCC
10
C4
47u
16V
+
C3
0.1u
8
SYNC
7
3A
16
C2
0.1u
F1
11
J1
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
+
C1
100u
35V
TP3
VPP
3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
TP2
+5VP
VO
2
TP1
E.G.
VI
4
5
6
13
14
15
1
150 3W
C39
10n
18
U1
L4931CV50
R1
1
GND
VPP
E1
220
CLK
DGND
1
2
3
4
WASHER
RESET
AMP 4/D
4
6
3
STRB B
5
AMP 4/D
S GND 18
3
26
12
PGND
17
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
E.M.
A3
1189
DATE
MASTER POWER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04209-01
November 23, 2004
H
SHEET
1/1
5V1
R10
J1
DGND
R11
100
P13
P12
P11
P10
L.SENS
I/O
I/O
STRB B
LAV.
59
56
32
29
F0
F1
F2
F3
CH1
45
54
30
27
F0
F1
F2
F3
CH2
20
66
70
VF1
VF2
VFR
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
WR
RD
CSROM
CSRAM
RDRAM
A15
ALE
PSEN
38
48
33
39
34
17
47
31
70LJ84
ISPE
SDI
SDO
U11
LM79L12CZ
OUT
IN
C33
0.1u
OUT
IN
U12
L4931CZ120
7
-VOUT
5
0V
6
+VOUT
8
SYNCOUT
14
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
36
VSS
37
VSS
AVDD
+AVREF
61
59
EW
AVSS
-AVREF
6
60
58
+
+
C12
0.1u
1u
DGND
R20
1K
AGND
U10
LM385
2.5V
1
R3 3K9
2
3
U8A
MAX 492
AGND
TEMP
+2.5V
R4 3K9
+
TP4
DGND
A(0..14)
C17
10u
C23
R7 2M2
C30
0.1u
AGND
0.1u
D(0..7)
SP1
R5 3K9
A15
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
U5
55C256
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
/CE
/OE
/WE
VDD
20
22
27
28
VSS
14
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
DGND
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
28
VDD
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
14
VSS
CE
OE
VPP
+5VD
+5VD
C10
0.1u
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
C11
0.1u
DGND
RS232
TR1
2K
+2.5V
C31
+
0.1u
R8 15K
A(0..14)
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FLAT 10/90°
C19
+5VD
AGND
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
27
20
22
1
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
7
6
5
U8B
MAX 492
+
R6 3K9
R9
2M2
AGND
4
3
2
1
5Psi
+2.5V
AGND
+5VD
T. AMB.
R17
68
U6
27C256
C26
0.1u
+
OUT
U9
-
C7
22uF
LM35CZ
+
C27
1u
2
AGND
SYNCIN
DCPO20515DP
PASQUALINI
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PREAMPLIFIER
DGND
22uF
DRAWN BY
J2
FLAT 16/D
4
C2+
C15
22uF
CTS
RTS
C16
0.1u
C+
P3.7
J4
TX
RX
DSR
1
31
C2-
5
UP552
1
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
R2OUT
T2IN
V-
3
P3.6
P5.0
P5.1
P5.2
P5.3
P5.4
P5.5
P5.6
P5.7
R2IN
T2OUT
GND
8
7
15
C1-
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
P4.0
P4.1
P4.2
P4.3
P4.4
P4.5
P4.6
P4.7
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4
P1.5
P1.6
P1.7
30
PWM1
PWMO
C14
2
13
14
1
+
0V
U4
D(0..7)
+5VD
VS
RST
DGND
23
25
44
42
61
1
22
43
64
GND
GND
GND
GND
SCLK
MODE
PAL1032
DGND
VDD
15
5
4
V+
R1IN
T1OUT
4
21
65
41
INT
37
11
58
69
35
12
28
57
F0
F1
F2
F3
VCC
VCC
DGND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
U2
U3
+5VD
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
SMD
C4
2u2/10V
(SMD)
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
C34
2u2
10V
+
DZ1
5V1
2
9
10
6
VCC
RIOUT
T1IN
8
55
50
51
52
+
CUV.
+5VD
XT1
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C.SENS
CLK
DATA
STRB A
CLK
SENS
STB
DIR
26
60
46
FLT
MOT
STP
36
14
16
13
35
CTS
RTS
PSEN
STADC
EA
U1
87LPC764
+5VD
C32
0.1u
L2
C9
22p
DGND
R21
10K
C5
10uF
C6
10uF
C20
10uF
DGND
P04
P05
P06
P07
17
16
14
13
C3
22p
16
12
11
RX
TX
24
25
26
27
28
29
47
3
49
5
Y1
P3.0
P3.1
P3.2
P3.3
P3.4
P3.5
Y2
ALE
C2
22p
+
XT2
48
VSS
14.7456MHz
22p
DGND
L1
C8
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
R19
2 X 560
R22
560
34
DGND
L4
+5VD
P2.0
P2.1
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
P2.6
P2.7
XTL1
6
DGND
+
XTL2
7
-
TP3
R18
C28
22uF
+
15
0.1u
P00
P01
P02
P03
DGND
L3
C13
22uF
-
VDD
+
P14
P15
P16
P17
R15
100
DGND
+5VD
+
1
20
19
18
DGND
10n
C/T
R12
100
U7
MAX232
18.432MHz
C29
10n
10n
INH/T
+5VD
C1
8
4
3
2
C24
C/F
R2
1K
R13
100
TP1
C25
R1
1K
100
DGND
R16
100
R14
4K7
9
10
11
12
C22
22p
1N4148
+
D25 F/90°
C21
22p
+5VD
+
13
25
12 SCL
24 SDA
11 RST
23 C.SEN
10 CLK
22 DATA
STRB A
9
21 L.SEN
8
20
STRB B
7
TEMP
19
6
AGND
18 C/F
5 C/T
17 INH/T
TP2
PS
4
+5VD
16
3
15
2
C18 +
14
1
22uF
MASTER
POWER
D1
DZ2
V1
PROGRAMMER
J3
N.M.
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
E.M.
A3
1168
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
MASTER LOGIC
REV.
SE-04211-01
June 01, 2004
F
SHEET
1/1
R2
1K
INH/T
C/T
DGND
R13
100
R11
100
P13
P12
P11
P10
TP1
DGND
LAV.
59
56
32
29
F0
F1
F2
F3
CH1
45
54
30
27
F0
F1
F2
F3
CH2
20
66
70
VF1
VF2
VFR
DGND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
WR
RD
CSROM
CSRAM
RDRAM
A15
ALE
PSEN
38
48
33
39
34
17
47
31
U2
70LJ84
ISPE
SDI
SDO
P3.6
UP552
31
P3.7
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
36
VSS
37
VSS
C6
10uF
L2
C33
0.1u
OUT
+
+
+12V
+5VD
IN
U12
L4931CZ120
-VOUT
5
0V
6
+VOUT
8
SYNCOUT
14
VS
6
60
58
C12
0.1u
1u
A(0..14)
DGND
4
C2-
C2+
AGND
R3 3K9
AD822
1
U8A
U10
DZA
5V1
LM385
2.5V
TP4
2
3
+2.5V
R4 3K9
+
+12V
AGND
AGND
TEMP
C17
10u
C23
R7 330K
0.1u
AGND
0.1u
D(0..7)
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
U5
55C256
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
/CE
/OE
/WE
VDD
20
22
27
28
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
14
DGND
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
28
VDD
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
14
VSS
CE
OE
VPP
+5VD
+5VD
C10
0.1u
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
C11
0.1u
DGND
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
27
20
22
1
AD822
7
U8B
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
SP1
R5 3K9
6
5
+
R6 3K9
DZB
5V1
R9
330K
AGND
4
3
2
1
5Psi
AGND
+2.5V
+12V
AGND
+5VD
T. AMB.
R17
68
U6
27C256
+
OUT
U9
C26
0.1u
-
+
LM35CZ
C27
1u
C7
22uF
2
AGND
SYNCIN
DCPO20515DP
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
PASQUALINI F.
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PREAMPLIFIER
DGND
R20
1K
DRAWN BY
J2
FLAT 16/D
RS232
TR1
2K
+2.5V
C31
+
0.1u
R8 15K
1
+
0V
EW
AVSS
-AVREF
C30
+5VD
U3
7
61
59
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FLAT 10/90°
C19
+5VD
A(0..14)
U11
LM79L12CZ
OUT
IN
C32
0.1u
AVDD
+AVREF
C15
22uF
CTS
RTS
C16
0.1u
22uF
AGND
VSS
C5
10uF
1
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
D(0..7)
DGND
L1
P5.0
P5.1
P5.2
P5.3
P5.4
P5.5
P5.6
P5.7
R2OUT
T2IN
V-
C+
30
PWM1
PWMO
R2IN
T2OUT
GND
8
7
15
J4
TX
RX
DSR
1
U4
DGND
23
25
44
42
61
GND
GND
GND
GND
SCLK
MODE
PAL1032
DGND
RST
C14
2
13
14
4
21
65
41
INT
37
11
58
69
35
12
28
57
F0
F1
F2
F3
VCC
VCC
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
CUV.
1
22
43
64
C4
2u2/10V
(SMD)
VDD
15
5
4
V+
R1IN
T1OUT
8
SMD
2
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
L.SENS
I/O
I/O
STRB B
+
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
XT1
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
55
50
51
52
CLK
SENS
STB
DIR
26
60
STP
46
DGND
C.SENS
CLK
DATA
STRB A
+5VD
C34
2u2
10V
+
DZ1
5V1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
5
U1
87LPC764
+5VD
36
14
16
13
35
9
10
6
VCC
RIOUT
T1IN
C1-
C9
22p
DGND
R21
10K
FLT
MOT
DGND
C20
10uF
DGND
P04
P05
P06
P07
17
16
14
13
10n
C3
22p
CTS
RTS
PSEN
STADC
EA
5
Y1
Y2
16
12
11
RX
TX
24
25
26
27
28
29
47
3
49
C2
22p
P3.0
P3.1
P3.2
P3.3
P3.4
P3.5
3
22p
+
XT2
P4.0
P4.1
P4.2
P4.3
P4.4
P4.5
P4.6
P4.7
34
ALE
VSS
14.7456MHz
48
C8
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4
P1.5
P1.6
P1.7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
R22
560
P2.0
P2.1
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
P2.6
P2.7
P00
P01
P02
P03
TP3
R19
2 X 560
+5VD
+
XTL1
6
DGND
-
XTL2
7
+
15
0.1u
R15
100
10n
C28
22uF
-
VDD
+
1
20
19
18
DGND
C24
C13
22uF
+
P14
P15
P16
P17
18.432MHz
C29
10n
R18
U7
MAX232
+5VD
C1
8
4
3
2
R16
100
+5VD
R12
100
9
10
11
12
C22
22p
C25
L4
R1
1K
100
DGND
L3
R14
4K7
+
D25 F/90°
C21
22p
1N4148
+
13
25
12 SCL
24 SDA
11 RST
23 C.SEN
10 CLK
22 DATA
STRB A
9
21 L.SEN
8
20
STRB B
7
TEMP
19
6
AGND
18 C/F
5 C/T
17 INH/T
TP2
PS
4
+5VD
16
3
15
2
C18 +
14
1
22uF
+5VD
C/F
5V1
R10
J1
MASTER
POWER
D1
DZ2
V1
J3
N.M.
PROGRAMMER
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY.
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
MENCHINELLI V.
MENCHINELLI V.
E.M.
01221
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
MASTER LOGIC
REV.
SE-04211-01
July 22, 2005
G
SHEET
1/1
D1
DZ2
+5VD
V1
C/F
5V1
1N4148
R10
J1
C21
22p
C/T
R13
100
R11
100
+5VD
R12
100
9
10
11
12
DGND
P13
P12
P11
P10
C22
22p
TP1
U7
MAX232
+5VD
DGND
10n
L.SENS
I/O
I/O
STRB B
21
65
41
INT
35
12
28
57
37
11
58
69
F0
F1
F2
F3
VCC
VCC
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
DGND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
WR
RD
CSROM
CSRAM
RDRAM
A15
ALE
PSEN
38
48
33
39
34
17
47
31
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
CUV.
LAV.
U2
70LJ84
59
56
32
29
F0
F1
F2
F3
CH1
45
54
30
27
F0
F1
F2
F3
CH2
20
66
70
VF1
VF2
VFR
ISPE
SDI
SDO
DGND
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
36
VSS
37
VSS
DGND
C33
0.1u
C6
10uF
L2
+
+
OUT
IN
+12V
U12
L4931CZ120
-VOUT
5
0V
6
+VOUT
8
SYNCOUT
14
VS
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
C2+
C2-
C+
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RS232
FLAT 10/90°
C19
0.1u
DGND
+5VD
C12
0.1u
TR1
2K
R8 15K
R20
1K
AGND
+2.5V
C31
+
1u
R3 3K9
AD822
1
U8A
U10
DZ3
5V1
LM385
2.5V
2
3
AGND
TEMP
+12V
R4 3K9
+
TP4
A(0..14)
DGND
C17
10u
C23
R7 330K
0.1u
AGND
0.1u
D(0..7)
SP1
R5 3K9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
/CE
/OE
/WE
VDD
20
22
27
28
U5
55C256
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
14
DGND
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
28
VDD
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
14
VSS
CE
OE
VPP
+5VD
+5VD
C10
0.1u
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
C11
0.1u
DGND
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
27
20
22
1
AD822
7
U8B
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
6
5
+
R6 3K9
DZ4
5V1
R9
330K
4
3
2
1
5Psi
AGND
+12V
AGND
AGND
+5VD
T. AMB.
R17
68
U6
27C256
+
OUT
U9
C26
0.1u
1
+
-
+
0V
DGND
22uF
C30
+5VD
U3
7
CTS
RTS
C16
0.1u
C15
22uF
A(0..14)
U11
LM79L12CZ
OUT
IN
C32
0.1u
6
60
58
R2IN
T2OUT
GND
8
7
15
TX
RX
DSR
AGND
VSS
C5
10uF
EW
AVSS
-AVREF
C14
AGND
DGND
L1
61
59
2
13
14
D(0..7)
23
25
44
42
61
GND
GND
GND
GND
SCLK
MODE
PAL1032
1
22
43
64
C4
2u2/10V
(SMD)
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
AVDD
+AVREF
UP552
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
55
50
51
52
I.CLK
SENS
STB
I.DATA
26
60
C.SENS
O.CLK
O.DATA
STRB A
+
P3.7
1
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
R19
2 X 560
36
14
16
13
FLT
MOT
STP
46
DGND
R18
SMD
+5VD
31
P5.0
P5.1
P5.2
P5.3
P5.4
P5.5
P5.6
P5.7
R2OUT
T2IN
V-
J4
V+
R1IN
T1OUT
4
R21
10K
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
C34
2u2
10V
+
DZ1
5V1
PWM1
PWMO
U4
P3.6
4
5
C24
DGND
RST
30
U1
87LPC764
TP3
VDD
15
5
4
VCC
RIOUT
T1IN
8
P04
P05
P06
P07
DGND
2
9
10
6
PSEN
STADC
EA
+5VD
XT1
CTS
RTS
47
3
49
DGND
35
16
12
11
RX
TX
24
25
26
27
28
29
+
17
16
14
13
C3
22p
ALE
VSS
R15
100
5
C9
22p
C20
10uF
Y1
C2
22p
Y2
48
P00
P01
P02
P03
P3.0
P3.1
P3.2
P3.3
P3.4
P3.5
C1-
22p
+
XT2
3
34
P2.0
P2.1
P2.2
P2.3
P2.4
P2.5
P2.6
P2.7
1
20
19
18
DGND
14.7456MHz
P4.0
P4.1
P4.2
P4.3
P4.4
P4.5
P4.6
P4.7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
C8
+5VD
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4
P1.5
P1.6
P1.7
XTL1
6
R22
560
DGND
0.1u
+
XTL2
7
-
15
+
VDD
18.432MHz
C29
10n
10n
C28
22uF
-
P14
P15
P16
P17
+
8
4
3
2
R16
100
C13
22uF
+
C1
C25
L4
R2
1K
100
DGND
L3
R1
1K
INH/T
D25 F/90°
MASTER
POWER
R14
4K7
+
13
25
12 SCL
24 SDA
11 RST
23 C.SEN
10 CLK
22 DATA
STRB A
9
21 L.SEN
8
20
STRB B
7
TEMP
19
6
AGND
18 C/F
5 C/T
17 INH/T
TP2
PS
4
+5VD
16
3
15
2
C18 +
14
1
22uF
LM35CZ
C27
1u
C7
22uF
2
AGND
SYNCIN
DCPO20515DP
+5VD
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI F.
J3
N.M.
MENCHINELLI V.
PROGRAMMER
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY.
MENCHINELLI V.
E.M.
MASTER LOGIC
SIZE
APPROVED
PREAMPLIFIER
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DGND
J2
FLAT 16/D
01242
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04211-01
April 11, 2006
H
SHEET
1/1
MOTORE CUVETTE
MOTORE CUVETTE
AGND TEMP. CUV.
OUT TEMP. CUV.
+ TEMP. CUV.
+ VENT. PELT.
PELTIER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MASTER POWER
MOTORE CUVETTE
MOTORE CUVETTE
DGND HALL CUV.
OUT HALL CUV.
+ HALL CUV.
GND VENT. PELT.
PELTIER
MOTORE CUVETTE
MOTORE CUVETTE
MOTORE CUVETTE
MOTORE CUVETTE
R1
68
NTC1 N.M.
1
2
1
2
FAN PELT.
R4
1
C1
1u
C2
0.1u
+ TEMP. CUV.
+ HALL CUV.
OUT TEMP. CUV.
OUT HALL CUV.
GND TEMP CUV.
GND HALL CUV.
C3
0.1u
+ VENT. PELT.
GND VENT. PELT.
1
2
FAN PELT.
J6
1
2
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TEMP. - HALL SENSORS
E1
D2
N.M.
+ VENT. PELT.
GND VENT. PELT.
DL1
AMP 2/D
FAN PELT.
MOTOR
AMP 4X2/D
AMP 2/D
J5
1
2
3
4
AMP 4/D
MOLEX 2X8/90°
J4
J2
t
+
J1
HOT/COLD
RED/GREEN
+ VENT. PELT.
GND VENT. PELT.
AMP 2/D
E2
D1
N.M.
E3
E4
R2
560
E5
E6
J7
ARM LIQUID
SENSOR
1
2
VPP
PGND
R3 100 5W
AMP 2/D
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
E.M.
A4
1161
DATE
READING PLATE INTERFACE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04270-01
May 06, 2004
D
SHEET
1/1
TP1
+5VD
J2
LED SIERI
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
HALL SIERI
VACU. "R"
R1
220
DGND
VACU. "R"
12
TP2
DGND
U1F
74HC14
14
U2B
13
7
+
5
-
6
LM 358
7
R7
47K
U2A
1
1N4148
LM 358
DGND
+5VD
3
+5VD
FLAT 14/90°
EM1
LD274
U1B
4
DGND
TP3
VCT
2KHz
3
R9
5K6
74HC14
U1C
6
5
74HC14
J3
VACUTAINER
"R" LED
1
2
R3
10K
C3
4u7
+
U1D
8
R4
2K2
U1A
DGND
2
1
74HC14
9
C5
0.1u
74HC14
AMP2/90°
DGND
SERUM
VACUTAINER " L "
10n
DGND
R2
22K
+5VD
C4
2
RI1
PT380F
DGND
DGND
R8
56
1
DGND
3
D1
DGND
R6
C.C.
R5 N.M.
DGND
1
FLAT 10/D
TR1
1M
1
2
+
C1
0.1u
8
HALL SIERI
LED SIERI
VACU. " L"
C2
0.1u
4
DGND
C6
47u
VACU. "L"
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+5VD
0.65A
-
+5V
J1
SERUM PLATE
CONTROLLER
F1
U1E
10
DGND
DGND
11
74HC14
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
MENCHINELLI
MENCHINELLI
E.M.
1201
A4
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
SERUM VACUTAINER " R "
REV.
SE-04278-01
February 24, 2005
D
SHEET
1/1
+5VD
1
R8
56
C2
0.1u
3
DGND
U1F
+5VD
12
DGND
U2B
7
13
74HC14
R5 N.M.
8
C1
0.1u
D1
+
5
-
6
U2A
1
1N4148
LM 358
LM 358
TP1
+5VD
+5VD
2
3
DGND
10n
RI1
PT380F
EM1
LD274
DGND
U1C
R10
5K6
5
74HC14
2KHz
U1B
U1D
TP3
VCT
R2
22K
SERUM
HALL
SENSOR
FLAT 6/90°
DGND
C4
DGND
DGND
1
LED SIERI 2
3
OUT HALL SIERI
DGND 4
5
6
7
6
1
+5VD
+5VD
1
U1A
74HC14
VACU. " L"
J2
R9
4K7
14
DGND
2
4
FLAT 14/90°
HALL SIERI
R7
47K
R6
C.C.
+
SERUM
VACUTAINER " R "
LED SIERI
-
1 DGND
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
TR1
1M
2
R1
220
J1
8
9
4
74HC14
3
1
74HC14
+
C6
47u
C5
0.1u
U1E
R3
10K
R4
2K2
+
10
C3
4u7
11
DGND
74HC14
1
TP2
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
J3
VACUTAINER
"L" LED
1
2
AMP2/90°
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
MENCHINELLI
MENCHINELLI
E.M.
1201
A4
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
SERUM VACUTAINER " L "
REV.
SE-04280-01
February 24, 2005
D
SHEET
1/1
TP1
+5VD
1
+5VD
LED SIERI
J1
RED
HALL SIERI
R1
220
1
2
3
4
5
6
GREEN
R2
4K7
+5VD
LED SIERI
OUT HALL SIERI
GND HALL SIERI
TRANSIZ.6
DL2
U1
C1
0.1u
VCC
OUT
GND
A3121EU
TP2
DGND
1
SERUM
VACUTAINER " L "
DL1
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
E.M.
DATE
A4
SERUM HALL SENSOR
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04282-01
March 14, 2002
A
SHEET
1/1
A1
+
C3
0.1u
+
C4
0.1u
R7
330
DL1
DL2
ORANGE YELLOW
C5
47u/16V
+5VD
+5VD
R8
330
+5VP
R28
47u/16V 10K
R31
560
R32
560
1
2
4
3
DL3
GREEN
22
R29
10K
C11 +
U3
A1
K1 O1
A2 O2
K2
23 DATA A
7
6
21 DATA B
25 STRB A
DGND
SCL
18,432MHz
7
XT2
L1
L2
XT1
C10
22p
2
3
P0.3
P0.7
P1.4
18
13
8
DGND
8
+
PGND
C15
10n
+5VD
C19
22u
Q1
BC237
11
12
T1IN
R1OUT
T1OUT
R1IN
14
13
10
9
T2IN
R2OUT
T2OUT
R2IN
7
8
R18
3
15
GND
V-
6
1
TP9
GND
2K2
+
R19
MAX232
C18
22u
R23
N.M.
C26
N.M.
DGND
C31
1u
+5
C14
0.1u
+24RP
A1
K1
A2
K2
C1
E1
C2
E2
8
7
6
5
DGND
1N4148
7
R26
1K
6
5
U6B
MAX492
DGND
Q3
BD680A
DZ2
18V
R24
1K
R25
22K
TEMP. SENSOR
PELTIERS
AIR BLOWER
MOLEX 6X2/90°
Q2
BUZ111S
TLP521-2
+
F4
5A
1
2
3
4
AUX
N.M.
J7
+TEMP.REAG.
OUT TEMP.REAG. 1
2
GND TEMP.REAG.
3
+VENT.TANG. 4
GND VENT.TANG. 5
6
7
8
+PELT.
9
+PELT.
10
-PELT.
11
-PELT.
12
D1
U7
R27
1K
1
2
3
C27
N.M.
68
2K2
+24RP
+5VD
REAGENT
BARCODE
J6
+24VRP
DGND
R34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AMP 4X2/90°
22u
R35
100
C25
47u/16V
C17
J5
+5VD
+
R21
22K
1
COM
6
C29
0.1u
TP8
(0.4V)
DGND
+24VRP
MOLEX 4X2/90°
F5
5A
8
VCC
+5VD
CTS
DGND
DGND
RX
TX
SGND
RTS
+
+
2
OUT
R22
1K8
1
U6A
MAX492
R15
3K3
C28
0.1u
IN
V+
C21
22u
DGND
16
1
R17
100K
1
8
R16
10K
4
2
R13
10K
0=COLD
1=HOT
C23
0.1u
+
1
R14
1K
-
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
+SENSE
1 CONTROL1
2 -SENSE
3
4 GND
5 GND
6 +24rp
7 +24rp
8
C24
1u
+
J2
TP7
(20mV)
+5
U8
78L05
+5
R12
12K
JP1
OFF
C22
47u/35V
+5VD
C20
0.1u
22u
U5
DGND
-
+
AMP 3/90°
C16
R20
2K2
REAGENT
HALL SENSOR
DGND
0= ALL.TEMP.
HI. PELT.
0=INH.
PELT.
1
R36
12K
J4
OUT HALL REAG.
+ HALL REAG. 1
GND HALL REAG. 2
3
DGND
1
+24VRP
+5VD
R11
4K7
+24VRP
F3
0.65A
47u/35V
26
R9
10K
2
+24RP
+ C13
18 S GND
3
C30
10n
TP6
(16-29V)
28
R10
100
Y1
C9
22p
DGND
P1.7
P1.6
6
TLP2630
P0.6
P0.5
P1.1
P1.0
DGND
VPP
+
RST
1.2 1/2W
5
4
19
17
20
1
14
16
11
12
C1
47u/16V
+
R5
AMP 4/90°
+5VD
DGND
0.65A
1.2 1/2W
20 CLK B
C2-
GND
24 CLK A
7
6
C1-
5
A1
K1 O1
A2 O2
K2
3
F2
P0.2
P0.4
P0.1
PO.O
VCC
U4
R4
1
4
1
15
C8
0.1u
C12 +
C2+
TP4
1
2
4
3
87LPC764
15-04408-01
C+
+5VD
+5VD
MOLEX 5X2/90°
U2
REAGENT MOTOR
-
3A
DGND
R33
560
1
2
3
4
2
R30
47u/16V 10K
5
DGND
9
F1
SDA
VPP
DGND
C7
22p
R3
100
10
1
PGND
C6
22p
R2
100
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TP3
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
J3
27
R A
+5VP
1
+5VD
+
1
PGND
TP2
J1
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
PGND
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
5
TLP2630
PGND
TP1
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
4
MOTOR A 5
6
7
-
C2
47u/35V
R6
2K7
VOUT
GND
330 2W
+5VP
8
VIN
VPP
+
+5VP
U1
L4931CV50
R1
1
TP5
VPP
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
DZ1
15V
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
1120
A3
DATE
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04313-03
July 07, 2003
B
SHEET
1/1
TP5
P/O AR4
470
U3
1 A1
2 K1 O1
4 A2 O2
3 K2
C6
C5
47u/16V
R4
2K7
R5
330
R6
330
TLP2630
TP2
PGND
DGND
+5VD
+5VP
P1.1
P0.4
P1.0
1 FORCH. DILUITORE
P1.7
P1.4
2 POMPA DILUITORE
8 VALVOLA DILUITORE
8
470
L2
C33
22p
DGND
Y1
C32
22p
3
13
14
16
P/O AR4
470
U5
1
2
4
3
+5VD
A1
K1 O1
A2 O2
K2
+5VD
C30
10u
R33
470
+
5
18,432MHz
R34
470
DGND
C26
22p
DGND
+5VD
20
1
STRB B
VALVOLA ISE
GND
P0.7
P0.2
13
19
OPZIONALE
P1.0
P1.4
12
8
E1
E2
E3
E4
15
13
11
9
4
RST
P0.6
P0.5
14
16
7
XT2
P1.1
P1.7
11
2
6
XT1
C23
0.1u
R32
100
PGND
DGND
1
20
21
22
SCLK
DRDY
DOUT
DIN
R31 100
U12
+
OUT
C24
N.M.
N.M.
C22
22p
2
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
GND
C11
10n
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
CD
POMPA DILUITORE
AIN3
AIN2
AIN1
AIN6
AIN4
AIN5
TP8
CL
TP9
REF
TP10
CO2
9
8
7
17
10
16
U13
C42
C41
C40
C39
C38
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
+5VD
IN
R25
1
REFIN+
15
4
U10
LM385Z-2.5
R28
10K
C19
47u +
DGND
R29
10K
C20
0.1u
+VOUT
6
C18
GND OUT
0.1u
2 GND IN
-VOUT
1
5
VIN
78L05
R26
10K
C15
0.1u
7
IN
DCP020515DP
DRAWN BY
U14
1
2
ISE VALVE
AMP 2/90°
R41
1
J2
C37
10n
N.M.
1
2
AUX
TP11
GND
J3
K
9
NA
7
CL
10
REF
8
CO2
6
+2.5V (GND)
ISE PREAMPLIFIER
+5Va 2
-5Va 5
1
AGND
3
+
4
C14
PIN STRIP 2x5 M/D
1u/T.
R27
10K
+
C16
1u/T.
OUT
79L05
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
AGND
AGND
AGND
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DGND
DGND
J1
PGND
OUT
C17
0.1u
AGND
ISE INTERFACE
U9
MCLKOUT
AD7714
TP7
NA
ISE INTERFACE
DIN32M/90°
DIN32M/90°
PGND
TP6
K
PD 3A
3C
P/O J5
C13
10n
PGND
R30
2K2
DGND
PGND
P/O J5
2
VD 4A
4C
C12
10n
VPP
AR3 9X100
Y2
3
R24
1
PGND
VALVOLA DILUITORE
ULN2803A
+5VD
MCLKIN
C21
22p
DGND
0 = IMBUTO VUOTO
E2
t
PTC1 1.2
C43
0.1u
+5VD
+5VD
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4X4K7
AR2
U8
CLK B
DATA B
GND
R36
1
PGND
4
5
6
11
12
13
23
P0.1
PO.O
E1
ISE
LAMP
K1
K2
K3
K4
PGND
VCC
Y3
C25
22p
2
4
6
8
87LPC767
DGND
47u/35V
VPP
VALVOLA DILUITORE
REFINAGND
CS
C27
0.1u
16
14
12
10
14
18
19
TR1
1K
C9
+
TLP2630
POL
SYNC
RESET
STANDBY
AVDD
BUFFER
DVDD
15
C1
C2
C3
C4
GND
SCL
AMP 4/90°
+
U7
24
U11
A1
A2
A3
A4
2.45MHz
DGND
+5VD
9
DGND
2,6V NO LIQUID
3,6V WHIT LIQUID
10
22p
P/O AR5
10K
VPP
1
28
14
15
C8
POMPA DILUITORE
1
3
5
7
R37
100
P1.6
P0.3
P0.4
R35
1K
+D
1 +E
2 D
3 E
4
22p
R38
100
1.8 1/2W
16
47u/35V
+5VP
TLP521-4
3
18
17
J4
BUBBLES
SENSOR
PHOTOSWITCH
C28
DGND
SDA
+5VD
C44
10n
C29
R18
ISE INTERFACE
DIN32M/90°
7
6
U6
R39
10K
1.8 1/2W
1
AR1
4X1K
DGND
R40
10K
17
C10 +
-
P1.6
P0.7
P0.6
P0.5
12
R17
9C
8C
11C
10C
1
XT1
P/O AR4
1.8 1/2W
1
6
C31
0.1u
26
P/O AR5
47u/16V 10K
13
R16
ISE INTERFACE
P/O J5
27
2
15C
7A
13C
7C
12C
6A
11A
8A
DIN32M/90°
DGND
1.8 1/2W
5
18,432MHz
L1
3
+5VP
ISE
ISE
ISE
ISE
G
XT2
POMPA
POMPA
POMPA
POMPA
P/O J5
1
7
+
PO.O
DGND
DGND
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
R14
15K
FD
1
RST
DILUITORE
DILUITORE
DILUITORE
DILUITORE
1
4
R B
CLK A
CLK B
DATA B
STRB B
18 S GND
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
E.G.
+
TLP2630
20
19
18
C1
47u/16V
DATA A
STRB A
CLK A
+5VD
DGND
0.65A
11
17
12
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
1
GND
24
20
21
19
7
6
8
F2
DIN 32M/90°
VCC
5
C34
0.1u
1
+5VD
15
87LPC764
8
+5VD
TP4
VPP
U2
P/O AR5
10K
+
+
3A
DGND
C7
-
DGND
P/O AR4
470
U4
1 A1
2 K1 O1
4 A2 O2
3 K2
R A
5
F1
22p
P/O AR4
470
10
11
8
9
R15
15-04408-02
P/O AR5
10K
47u/16V
R3
100
9
22p
R2
100
10
C35
SCL
DGND
C36
SDA
VPP
1
PGND
TP3
1
TP12
25 STRB A
MOTOR B
PGND
1
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
DGND
+5V
SDA
SCL
DGND
MOTOR A
23 DATA A
7
6
4
5
6
7
G
+
C4
0.1u
R13
220
22
P/O AR5
10K
+
8
P/O AR4
470
PGND
1
ISE
INTERFACE
P/O AR5
47u/16V 10K
-
C3
0.1u
TP1
2A
2C
10A
12A
14C
1A
1C
14A
16C
13A
15A
16A
5A
6C
9A
5C
+5VP
+
GND
+
+5VD
DL3
GREEN
VOUT
220 2W
C2
47u/35V
DL1
DL2
ORANGE YELLOW
+5VD
A1
+5VD
5
VIN
P/O J5
+5VP
U1
L4931CV50
R1
+5VP
1
VPP
VPP
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
1158
A3
DATE
ISE CONTROLLER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04320-01
May 05, 2004
F
SHEET
1/1
JACK
MALE
J1
J1
1
2
P1
J7
A1
SE-04270-01
READING PLATE INTERFACE
PELTIER
J4
P1
RED
J2
P1
J3
P1
J5
P1
J6
P1
E6-
BLACK
E5+
RED
PELT.3
2
1
E4
-
2
1
E3
+
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PELTIER
E2
-
4
3
2
1
E1
+
2
1
PELT.1
BLACK
+
RED
E3
PELT.2
-
BLACK
FAN
PELTIER
+
E2
-
-
E1
FAN
+
FAN
M1
ST1
SH1
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
MOTOR
TEMP. & HALL SENSORS
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
A4
<P.d.V.> DATE
READING PLATE ASSY
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04334-02
March 19, 2002
A
SHEET
1/1
REF.
PHOTOD.
P1
JACK
MALE
J1
J1
1
2
P1
J7
A1
SE-04270-01
READING PLATE INTERFACE
PELTIER
J4
P1
RED
J2
P1
J3
P1
J5
P1
J6
P1
E6-
BLACK
E5+
RED
PELT.3
2
1
E4
-
2
1
E3
+
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PELTIER
E2
-
4
3
2
1
E1
+
2
1
PELT.1
BLACK
+
RED
E3
PELT.2
-
BLACK
FAN
PELTIER
+
E2
-
-
FAN
E1
+
FAN
M1
ST1
SH1
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
MOTOR
TEMP. & HALL SENSORS
<VISTO>
E.M.
A4
<P.d.V.> DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
READING PLATE ASSY
REV.
SE-04334-03
July 08, 2004
A
SHEET
1/1
DL1
GREEN
VACUTAINER R
DL1
GREEN
VACUTAINER L
P1
P1
J3
P2
12-04536-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J2
P2
P1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SERUM VACUTAINER " R "
SE-04278-01
J1
J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
12-04538-01
2
1
2
1
06-04486-01
J3
P1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
SERUM VACUTAINER " L "
SE-04280-01
J1
J2
J1
SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER
SE-04422-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
P1
J5
SERUM MOTOR ASSY
08-04349-01
P1
J4
1
2
3
4
J1
SERUM HALL SENSOR
SE-04282-01
J3
BARCODE
DRAWN BY
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
PASQUALINI F.
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
MENCHINELLI V.
MENCHINELLI V.
E.M.
1201
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
SERUM PLATE ASSY
REV.
SE-04348-02
February 25, 2005
B
SHEET
1/1
SPEAKERS
UPS
HOST
PRINTER
MODEM
KEYBOARD
USB X 2
MOUSE
TO
PERIPHERALS
DISABLE
MOTHER BOARD ASSY
07-04487-01
USB
BOARD
ASUS
FLEX
AUDIO
COM2
COM1
PARALL.
USB2
USB1
PS/2
PS/2
08-04594-01
IBM FAN
INPUT AC
COM 3
1
2
3
4
5
RED
ORANGE
CHA-FAN
CPU
FAN
SERIAL
BOARD
LCD
P1
LCD INTERFACE
LCD INVERTER
CPU-FAN
P1
1
2
3
CPU
IBM POWER SUPPLY
200W
CN1
COM4
DIMM
MASTER
LOGIC
FLEX
USB
CONTROLLER
TUOCHSCREEN
8WIRE
P1
12-04877-01
P2
P1
PWR-SW
+12V
ATX
POWER
12-04741-01
SECONDARY IDE
PRIMARY IDE
FLOPPY
TOUCH-SCREEN
HARD DISK
CDROM
P2
ON/OFF
PUSHBUTTON
12-04593-01
N.O.
N.O.
P3
FLOPPY
DISK
P4
P1
12-04584-01
P1
TO
POWER SUPPLY
INTERFACE
1
2
12-04740-01
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
A3
<P.d.V.> DATE
BOX COMPUTER ASSY
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04379-02
July 04, 2002
A
SHEET
1/1
LAN1
LAN2
AUX
UPS
HOST
AUX
PRINTER
AUX
AUX
SPEAKERS
KEYBOARD
MOUSE
CRT
TO
PERIPHERALS
DISABLE
MOTHER BOARD ASSY
J1
J2
COM3
COM2
COM1
LPT1
USB2/3
USB2/2
USB1/1
USB1/0
AUDIO
1
KB1
MS1
VGA1
INPUT AC
IBM FAN
LCD INVERTER
J8
LCD
CPU-FAN
CHA-FAN
CPU
FAN
P1
1
2
3
CPU
IBM POWER SUPPLY
200W
J7
CN1
DIMM
MASTER
LOGIC
COM4
ATX
POWER
USB
CONTROLLER
TUOCHSCREEN
PWR-SW
J3
13/15
8WIRE
PRIMARY IDE
SECONDARY IDE
FLOPPY
TOUCH-SCREEN
DVD
P2
ON/OFF
PUSHBUTTON
N.O.
N.O.
FLOPPY
DISK
HARD DISK
P3
P4
P1
TO
POWER SUPPLY
INTERFACE
P1
1
2
DRAWN BY
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
MENCHINELLI
MENCHINELLI
E.M.
01237
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
BOX COMPUTER ASSY
REV.
SE-04379-03
February 16, 2006
-
SHEET
1/1
VPP
VIN
VOUT
+
C2
47u/35V
C3
0.1u
R21
330
DL2
YELLOW
DL1
ORANGE
DL3
GREEN
PGND
PGND
VPP
DGND
VPP
DGND
TP3
VPP
1
PGND
PGND
+ C8
47u/35V
F1
C9
47u/35V
+
1
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
+5VD
R20
330
C5
47u/16V
TP2
DGND
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+
C4
0.1u
TP1
PGND
J1
+5VP
R19
2K7
GND
270 2W
VPP
1
R1
TP5
+5VP
+5VP
U1
L4931CV50
+5VD
3A
MOLEX 5X2/D
TP4
+5VD
+5VD
R4
560
1
F2
R5
560
U5
TLP2630 8
1
0.65A
C1
47u/16V
PGND
+5VP
C6
47u
16V
+
1
28
R7
10K
15
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
4
5
6
7
MOTOR A
23 DATA A
J4
SIERI
SIERI 1
2
SIERI
SIERI 3
4
J5
4
6
DGND
25 STRB A
3
8
9
MOTOR B 10
11
1
2
3
4
J2
DGND
R8
560
R17
100
C22
10n
C20
22p
DGND
C24
SCL
C14
22u
4
11
12
T2OUT
R2IN
T2IN
R2OUT
10
9
GND
15
C+
1
3
V-
V+
18
13
8
3
P0.3
P0.7
P1.4
P1.6
12
11
P1.0
P1.1
MAX232
16
14
P0.5
P0.6
87LPC764
DGND
R11
10K
13
R B
16
R14 1.8 1/2W
R15 1.8 1/2W
20 CLK B
19 STRB B
S GND
18
26
12 17
4
3
19
17
20
1
P1.7
2
VCC
15
GND
5
+5VD
C10
0.1u
DGND
Y1
18,432MHz
+
C15
22u
1.2 1/2W
PGND
P0.2
P0.4
P0.1
PO.O
2
XT2
T1IN
R1OUT
C13
22u
7
T1OUT
R1IN
6
C16
22u
C2+
VCC
14
13
7
8
AMP 4X2/D
5
16
C1-
DGND
C2-
U3
DGND
+
+5VD
CTS
DGND
DGND
RX
TX
SGND
RTS
+
SERUM BARCODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C17
0.1u
+
J3
C18
+ 22u
9
U2
R3
100
+5VD
R13
2
24 CLK A
6
3
5
DGND
+
R A
4
DGND
R2
100
C7
47u
16V
7
10n
DGND
C21
10n
+5VD
U4
TLP2630 8
1
R10
10K
RST
R16
100
DGND
R9
560
1.2 1/2W
27
+5VP
2
C19
22p
SDA
DGND
XT1
FLAT10/D
+5VD
C23
10n
R12
6
SERUM
VACUTAINER
" R "
DGND
DGND
DGND
+5V
+5V
HALL SIERI
LED SIERI
VACU."L"
DGND
VACU."R"
DGND
15-04408-01
L2
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
AUX
N.M.
5
R18
100
SERUM MOTOR
AMP 4/D
21 DATA B
2
L1
14
22
7
+
PGND
A1
R6
10K
C12
22p
C11
22p
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
DGND
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
1178
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
SERUM PLATE CONTROLLER
REV.
SE-04422-01
September 17, 2004
D
SHEET
1/1
K1
J1
GND
+12V
2
1
POWER SUPPLY
400W +12V
4
3 +
MOLEX 2/D
P1
2
F1
1
OUTLET
3A
E9
N
E8
E.G.
E7
L
S1
C
R
0.1u
EMI FILTER
E1
L
E2
E.G.
E3
N
100
L
E4
E.G.
E5
N
E6
E10
E.G.
INPUT AC/DC
POWER SUPPLY
400W
IBM POWER SUPPLY
200W
J2
L
N
1
2
3
4
IBM POWER SUPPLY
200W
MOLEX 2X2/D
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
<VISTO>
E.M.
PERIPHERALS DISABLE
SIZE
1136
A4
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04431-01
November 10, 2003
B
SHEET
1/1
ARM " L "
SE-04872-01
J1
ARM WITH HEATER
SE-04438-02
JACK
P1
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
<VISTO>
E.M.
1110
SIZE
A4
DATE
ARM " L " ASSY
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04436-03
April 28, 2003
B
SHEET
1/1
ARM " R "
SE-04873-01
J1
ARM WITH HEATER
SE-04438-02
JACK
P1
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
E.M.
SIZE
<VISTO>
A4
1110
DATE
ARM " R " ASSY
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04437-03
April 28, 2003
B
SHEET
1/1
JACK
P1
E3
E2
ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER
SE-05023-01
E1
E.G.
NEEDLE
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
E.M.
SIZE
<VISTO>
A4
1110
DATE
ARM WITH HEATER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04438-02
April 28, 2003
A
SHEET
1/1
IBM POWER SUPPLY
SW1
1
2
3
4
P2
P/0
12-04710-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
REAGENTS
PLATE
CONTROLLER
P1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MASTER POWER
N
E.G.
N
L
E.G.
N
L
24V
24V
0V
SLOT2
+24V
0V
L
E4
N
E6
E.G.
E5
P3
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3
LAMP
SOCKET
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
+
SE-04661-01
-
P5
1
2
___
INH
TRIPLE
OUTLET
PERIPHERALS DISABLE
SE-04431-01
J1
0V
+ S.
- S.
E1 E3 E2
SLOT1
P1
+12V
J2
P9
12V
12V
0V
P1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8A
INPUT
AC
LAMP FAN
08-04546-01
0V
P1
1
2
J4
P6
1
2
12-04715-01
P/0
12-04712-01
+24RP
0V
P7
P2
4
4
3
2
1
12-04718-01
2
12-04710-01
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3
E.G.
SLOT3
0V
J2
P2
CONTROL1
24V
P1
L
1
12-04770-01
LOAD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F2
+ S.
- S.
24V
P1
8A
2
1
12-04711-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
LINE
E1
P2
REAGENTS
PLATE
CONTROLLER
P4
POWER SUPPLY 400W
12-04578-01
1
2
F1
12-04775-01
AIR BLOWER
P1 08-04537-01
P8
P2
12-04713-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ISE
INTERFACE
P2
ARM
CONTROLLER
" R "
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12-04712-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
P1
J6
J5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
P1
J7
J8
12-04712-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12-04714-01
L
P2
E.G.
P11
ARM
CONTROLLER
" L "
COM 4
SERIAL
BOARD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P/0 12-04710-01
N
P10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
IBM POWER
SUPPLY
200W
2P+T
MASTER LOGIC
P2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SERUM PLATE
CONTROLLER
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
WIRED CASE
A3
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04439-01
June 28, 2002
C
SHEET
1/1
+5Va
U1B
OPA2111
K
5
+
6
-
AGND
7
4
1K 1/8W
8
R1
C2
470n
R2
NA
1K 1/8W
C1
470n
U1A
OPA2111
- 5Va
3
+
2
-
AGND
1
J1
+5Va
U2B
OPA2111
CL
5
+
6
-
+5Va
AGND
+ 2.5V (GND)
7
AGND
4
1K 1/8W
8
R3
C4
470n
R4
REF
1K 1/8W
CL
K
REF
NA
CO2
- 5Va
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ISE CONTROLLER
2X5 F/D
C3
470n
U2A
OPA2111
- 5Va
3
+
2
-
AGND
1
+5Va
3
+
2
-
AGND
6
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
4
1K 1/8W
7
R5
CO2
C6
470n
U3
AD795
+ 2.5V (GND)
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
ISE PREAMPLIFIER
GND
C5
470n
- 5Va
AGND
APPROVED
SIZE
A4
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
SE-04440-01
March 15, 2002
REV.
A
SHEET
1/1
A1
A4
MASTER LOGIC MODULE
P/O WASHING ASSY
PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE
WASHER MOTOR ASSY
S2
COM 4 SERIAL BOARD
VALVE ASSY
M3
DILUTER PUMP ASSY
V3
M2
J4
E.G.
OPTICAL MODULE
J2
P1
P1
P1
P1
A2
J12
J1
A4
P1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M1
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
1
PREAMPLIFIER
SE-04649-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DILUTER ASSY
MASTER LOGIC
SE-04211-01
P2
4
3
2
1
P1
J1
4
3
2
1
A5
J11
J8
J7
MASTER POWER MODULE
J2
J10
P/O WASHING ASSY
J14
E.G.
LIQUID SENSOR ASSY
P1
1
2
3
4
S1
J9
P1
1
2
REFIL PUMP ASSY
A3
MASTER POWER
SE-04209-01
J6
P2
P1
1
2
M4
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J4
E.G.
VALVE ASSY
J5
P1
1
2
J13
J1
J3
J1
READING PLATE INTERFACE
SE-04270-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
V1
READING PLATE ASSY
P1
E.G.
HEATER WIRE ASSY
J1
JACK
MALE
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
A3
<P.d.V.> DATE
READING STATION
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04442-04
December 06, 2002
A
SHEET
1/1
A1
MASTER LOGIC MODULE
A4
P/O WASHING ASSY
PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE
WASHER MOTOR ASSY
S2
COM 4 SERIAL BOARD
VALVE ASSY
M3
DILUTER PUMP ASSY
V3
M2
J4
E.G.
TO REFERENCE
PHOTODIODE
OPTICAL MODULE
MASTER LOGIC
SE-04211-01
M1
J2
P1
P1
P1
P1
A2
J12
J1
J11
J8
J7
MASTER POWER MODULE
J2
J10
P/O WASHING ASSY
J14
E.G.
LIQUID SENSOR ASSY
P1
1
2
3
4
S1
J9
P1
1
2
REFIL PUMP ASSY
A3
MASTER POWER
SE-04209-01
J6
P2
P1
1
2
M4
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J4
E.G.
J5
VALVE ASSY
P1
V1
1
2
READING PLATE ASSY
J13
J1
J3
J1
READING PLATE INTERFACE
SE-04270-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A4
P1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
1
PREAMPLIFIER
SE-04649-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DILUTER ASSY
2
1
JP1
P2
4
3
2
1
P1
J1
4
3
2
1
P1
3
2
1
A5
P1
E.G.
HEATER WIRE ASSY
J1
JACK
MALE
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
A3
<P.d.V.> DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
READING STATION
REV.
SE-04442-05
July 08, 2004
A
SHEET
1/1
PELT.1
A1
REAGENTS
CONTROLLER MODULE
P2
4
3
2
1
P1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J7
P1
TEMPERATURE SENSOR ASSY
4
3
2
1
15-04680-01
S1
E2
P3
AIR BLOWER
1
2
E3
P4
1
2
3
4
P1
1
2
3
4
E4
CN1/2
CN1/3
E5
E6
J6
P1
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
SE-04313-03
J3
REAGENTS MOTOR ASSY
E18
1
2
3
4
M1
E19
E21
J1
P1
REFRIGERATOR
INTERFACE
PELT.4
E8
SE-8244
E9
E10
E22
REAGENTS HALL SENSOR ASSY
1
2
3
E7
E17
E20
J4
PELT.3
CN1/7
CN1/8
J2
PELT.2
E1
S2
PELT.5
E11
E12
E13
E14
J5
BARCODE
PELT.6
E15
E16
PELT.7
E.G.
PELT.8
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
1101
A3
DATE
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04443-02
March 10, 2003
A
SHEET
1/1
COM4
SERIAL BOARD
IBM
POWER
SUPPLY
IBM
POWER
SUPPLY
J2
PERIPHERALS DISABLE
J4
MASTER LOGIC
J2
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J4
J1
MASTER POWER
WIRED CASE
BOX COMPUTER ASSY
P1
AIR BLOWER
J1
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J3
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
READING STATION
J13 MASTER POWER
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J6
J7
READING PLATE INTERFACE
J1
J1
J1
ARM CONTROLLER " L "
ARM CONTROLLER " R "
J7
J2
J1
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
SERUM PLATE CONROLLER
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J8
J5
J7
J1
ISE INTERFACE
REAGENTS PLATE ASSY
ISE UNIT
ARM WITH HEATER
P1
ARM WITH HEATER
P1
SERUM MODULE
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
A3
<P.d.V.> DATE
BT3000 PLUS
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04444-04
March 31, 2003
A
SHEET
1/1
COM4
SERIAL BOARD
IBM
POWER
SUPPLY
IBM
POWER
SUPPLY
J2
PERIPHERALS DISABLE
J2
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
BOX COMPUTER ASSY
J4
MASTER LOGIC
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J4
J1
MASTER POWER
WIRED CASE
P1
AIR BLOWER
J1
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J3
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
READING STATION
J13 MASTER POWER
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
READING PLATE INTERFACE
J1
J1
J1
ARM CONTROLLER " R "
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J5
J7
ARM CONTROLLER " L "
J2
J1
J7
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
J7
SERUM PLATE CONROLLER
J8
J6
J1
ISE INTERFACE
ISE UNIT
REAGENTS PLATE ASSY
ARM WITH HEATER
P1
ARM WITH HEATER
P1
SERUM MODULE
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
A3
<P.d.V.> DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
BT3000 PLUS
REV.
SE-04444-05
July 08, 2004
A
SHEET
1/1
ARM " L " ASSY
ARM " L "
SE-04872-01
J1
ARM WITH HEATER
SE-04438-02
JACK
P1
SERUM PLATE ASSY
ARM " R " ASSY
ARM " R "
SE-04873-01
J1
ARM WITH HEATER
SE-04438-02
JACK
P1
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
A4
<P.d.V.> DATE
SERUM MODULE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04445-04
September 18, 2002
A
SHEET
1/1
ISE MODULE
06-04655-01
TWO WAY VALVE ASSY
08-04656-01
ISE PUMP ASSY
08-04657-01
P1
P1
1
2
J1
J1
J2
1
2
E.G.
VALVE ASSY
08-04574-01
P1
SENSOR ASSY
08-04358-01
J5
P1
1
2
3
4
J4
ISE CONTROLLER
SE-04320-01
ISE LAMP ASSY
08-04659-01
1
2
1
2
J5
J6
ISE INTERFACE
SE-04503-01
P1
J3
E1
ISE MOTOR PUMP ASSY
08-04658-01
1
2
3
4
E2
P1
AUX
J2
J4
J3
ISE PREAMPLIFIER
SE-04440-01
J1
DILUTER ASSY
08-04568-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
E.G.
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
ISE UNIT
A3
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04446-01
April 05, 2002
A
SHEET
1/1
ISE MODULE
ISE PUMP ASSY
08-04657-01
P1
J1
J1
J2
1
2
E.G.
VALVE ASSY
08-04574-01
P1
J5
1
2
J4
ISE CONTROLLER
SE-04320-01
ISE LAMP ASSY
08-04659-01
1
2
J5
J6
ISE INTERFACE
SE-04503-01
J3
E1
E2
P1
AUX
J2
J4
J3
DILUTER ASSY
08-04568-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
E.G.
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
<CONTROLLATO>
SIZE
APPROVED
<VISTO>
E.M.
A3
<P.d.V.> DATE
ISE UNIT WITHOUT ISE MODULE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04446-03
April 30, 2003
A
SHEET
1/1
J1
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
MOLEX 5X2/D
J6
J2
1
2
DILUTER PUMP
2A
2C
10A
12A
14C
1A
1C
16C
13A
15A
14A
16A
3A
3C
9C
8C
11C
10C
5A
5C
15C
7A
13C
7C
12C
6A
11A
8A
4A
4C
6C
9A
VPP
PD
AMP 2/D
J3
1
2
3
4
ISE PUMP
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
AMP 4/D
J4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ISE DILUTER
MOTORE
FD
MOTORE
MOTORE
DGND
MOTORE
DGND
AMP 4X2/D
J5
DILUTER VALVE
ISE CONTROLLER
DIN 32 F/D
1
2
VPP
VD
E.G.
AMP 2/D
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
1163
A4
DATE
ISE INTERFACE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04503-01
May 12, 2004
B
SHEET
1/1
TP1
+5V
U1
LM7805CV
JP3
+ C1
100u
35V
1
2
3
4
POWER
SUPPLY
MOLEX 2X2
90°
C3
0.1u
+ C2
100u
35V
PGND
1
VOUT
GND
VIN
100/3W
C7
4n7
C4
0.1u
TP2
DGND
+ C5
100u
16V
U4
1
EARTH GND
R1
J1
+5V
1
C6
4n7
+24V
DGND
ON
2
N.M.
1
8
2
7
3
6
+24V
E1
EARTH GND
4
+
EARTH GND
+5V
+5V
BZ1
5
JP2
1
ON
2
DGND
-
+5V
R5
4K7
ON
JP1
R4
4K7
DGND
0= WASTE FULL
2
C8
2.2u
16V
TOP
TOP
BOTTOM 2
DGND
0= NO LIQUID
BOTTOM 1
0= NO LIQUID
8
3
15
U2
87LPC764
R13
4K7
R14
220
R15
220
R16
4K7
+24V
16
PUMP 1
PUMP 2
P1.0
P0.5
12
16
PROBE 2
PROBE 2
P1.1
P0.6
11
14
P0.7
13 LED EXHAU.CARTR.
RST
4
PO.O
1
P1.4
P1.6
VCC
GND
J5
18
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
+ LAMP 12
13
14
K LED EXHA. CARTR.
15
16
R18
Q1
IRF540
PUMP 1
PUMP 2
PROBE 2
PROBE 2
PROBE 2
PROBE 1
PROBE 1
PROBE 1
RESET
1
PGND
Q2
IRF540
PROBE 1
PROBE 1
R19
RESET
XT1
XT2
SDA
SCL
5
DGND
R12
4K7
17
P0.3
P0.2
C9
0.1u
DGND
R11
1K
1
P0.4
P1.7
+5V
AMP 4X2
90°
R10
220
U3C
R17
PGND
220
U3A
1
CA
470n
6
7
9
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
LIQUID LEVEL
SWITCHES
(INTERNAL
WASTE)
R9
4K7
3
J2
+
R8
4K7
20
R3
4K7
R7
4K7
2
P0.1
R2
1K
1
R6
4K7
18
PROBE 1
PROBE 2
PUSH BUTTON
EXH. CART. LED
PERISTALTIC 1
PERISTALTIC 2
AMP 8X2
90°
R20
+5V
SMD
220
U3B
2
17
DGND
CR1
100
J3
7
R21
12
100
3A
13
MOLEX 2
90°
9
4
8
J4
VACUUM
PUMP
0.1u
F1
2
1
INPUT AC
U3G
2
1
+5V
11
+24V
R24
4K7
6
1
16
+5V
R22
8K2
C11
0.1u
C12
0.1u
DGND
+5V
K1
MOLEX 2
90°
+24V
R23
4K7
U3F
13
U3D
6
15
U3H
4
10
11
C10
10u
16V
+
DGND
8
ULN2803A
9
PGND
DRAWN BY
U3E
5
PASQUALINI
14
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
1094
A3
DATE
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04541-01
January 21, 2003
B
SHEET
1/1
C2 10p
C4 10p
C6 10p
C8 10p
C10 10p
R2 50-100M
R4 50-100M
R6 50-100M
R8 50-100M
R10 50-100M
C1 10p
7
-
8
2
4
8
8
6
+
U5A
AD648
1
-12Va
P10
10K
C19
0.1u
R20
2K
2
AGND
C9 10p
R7 50-100M
R9 50-100M
U4B
AD648
7
P5
10K
5
+
6
-
U5B
AD648
7
P7
10K
D7
VTB8441B
R15
2K
5
+
6
-
7
P9
10K
D9
VTB8441
R17
2K
AGND
R19
2K
AGND
AGND
AGND
-12Va
L2
C22
220u/T
17
16
15
14
+
AGND
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
A0
A1
A2
A3
+5VD
DG406
+5VD
D
28
EN
S16
18
4
V+
1
+5VD
+12Va
C25
0.1u
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
V-
9
8
7
6
5
27
GND
12
U8
PAL110
-12Va
11
1
OUT
2
C23
0.1u
12
8
AR1
4X4K7
U10A
14
6
AGND
DGND
17
16
15
14
A0
A1
A2
A3
D
28
EN
S16
18
4
V+
1
+12VA
C24
0.1u
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
V-
9
8
7
6
5
27
GND
12
C27
0.1u
DGND
AGND
1
9
74LS132
U10C
DZ1
5V
8
10
3
+
REF.
PHOT.
CABLE
AGND
74LS132
12
OUT
8
IN
4
10
14
6
13
JP1
2
11
U10D
2
5
C29
10u
12
DGND
11
R21
2K
6
DGND
7
1
-12Va
74LS132
4
74LS132
13
U9
PAL110
U10B
3
+12Va
U7 DG406
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
C28
0.1u
2
10
AGND
+12Va
1
IN
4
13
DGND
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
11
10
+5VD
14
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
11
10
C21
220u/T
7
U6
FLAT16/D
+
R18
2K
C7 10p
D5
VTB8441
R13
2K
P8
10K
3
+12Va
+
MASTER
LOGIC
5
AGND
L1
J1
-12Va
U3B
AD648
D3
VTB8441B
AGND
1
C17
0.1u
R5 4M7
P3
10K
2
2
R11
2K
-
AGND
AGND
2
D1
VTB8441B
6
1
1
P1
10K
+
R16
2K
1
-
5
-
U4A
AD648
D10
VTB8441B
C5 47p
U2B
AD648
7
2
AGND
R3 50-100M
U1B
AD648
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C15
0.1u
C3 10p
R1 50-100M
6
R14
2K
AGND
+
P6
10K
+
D8
VTB8441B
2
C13
0.1u
AGND
5
-12Va
D6
VTB8441B
2
2
R12
2K
1
3
2
D4
VTB8441B
C11
0.1u
-
AGND
1
P4
10K
2
U3A
AD648
2
-12Va
+
C20
0.1u
1
1
3
4
-
AGND
1
P2
10K
2
U2A
AD648
+12Va
2
1
-12Va
D2
VTB8441B
+
+12Va
C18
0.1u
1
1
3
+12Va
C16
0.1u
4
-
AGND
4
2
U1A
AD648
1
+
4
3
8
8
AGND
+12Va
C14
0.1u
1
+12Va
C12
0.1u
+12Va
DRAWN BY
C26
0.1u
7
DGND
AGND
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
1109
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
PREAMPLIFIER
REV.
SE-04649-01
March 07, 2003
C
SHEET
1/1
2
-
1
P2
10K
-12Va
-
P4
10K
C13
0.1u
R14
2K
AGND
3
+
2
-
1
-12Va
P6
10K
U4A
AD648
AGND
AGND
R16
2K
3
+
2
-
1
-12Va
P8
10K
D8
VTB8441B
C15
0.1u
8
8
8
2
U3A
AD648
D6
VTB8441B
2
2
R12
2K
+
1
D4
VTB8441B
C11
0.1u
3
2
D2
VTB8441B
AGND
U5A
AD648
1
-12Va
P10
10K
C19
0.1u
R20
2K
D10
VTB8441B
C17
0.1u
2
1
-12Va
U2A
AD648
C20
0.1u
4
+
4
8
3
+12Va
C18
0.1u
1
-
AGND
4
2
U1A
AD648
R10 100M
+12Va
C16
0.1u
1
+
4
3
R8 51M
+12Va
C14
0.1u
8
C12
0.1u
AGND
R6 51M
+12Va
C10 10p
1
R4 51M
+12Va
C8 22p
4
R2 51M
C6 22p
2
C4 22p
1
C2 22p
AGND
R18
2K
AGND
AGND
AGND
C1 22p
C3 22p
C5 47p
C7 22p
C9 10p
R3 51M
R5 3M3
R7 51M
R9 100M
R1 51M
-
+
6
-
7
P3
10K
U4B
AD648
D3
VTB8441B
P5
10K
6
-
U5B
AD648
R15
2K
5
+
6
-
7
P7
10K
D7
VTB8441B
2
2
+
7
D5
VTB8441
R13
2K
5
7
1
R11
2K
D1
VTB8441B
6
U3B
AD648
5
P9
10K
R19
2K
D9
VTB8441
R17
2K
2
P1
10K
+
1
1
-
5
2
U2B
AD648
7
2
6
+
1
5
1
U1B
AD648
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
+12Va
L1
AGND
-12Va
L2
17
16
15
14
+
AGND
J1
MASTER
LOGIC
C22
220u/T
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FLAT16/D
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
A0
A1
A2
A3
+5VD
DG406
+5VD
D
28
EN
S16
18
4
V+
1
+12Va
11
+12Va
1
-12Va
C25
0.1u
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
VGND
12
C23
0.1u
12
AR1
4X4K7
OUT
2
9
8
7
6
5
27
+5VD
U8
PAL110
+5VD
U10A
8
C28
0.1u
14
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
11
10
C21
220u/T
U10B
1
74LS132
R21
2K
4
3
IN
6
2
4
10
5
14
JP1
+12Va
1
74LS132
7
U6
+
6
2
3
+
DGND
13
C29
10u
7
AGND
12
DGND
9
11
DGND
REF.
PHOT.
CABLE
DZ1
5V
8
13
AGND
10
U7 DG406
AGND
DGND
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
11
10
17
16
15
14
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
A0
A1
A2
A3
D
28
EN
S16
18
4
V+
1
U10D
11
1
+12VA
GND
12
74LS132
OUT
8
+12Va
C24
0.1u
9
8
7
6
5
27
U10C
12
-12Va
2
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
V-
74LS132
U9
PAL110
IN
4
10
14
6
DRAWN BY
C27
0.1u
C26
0.1u
13
PASQUALINI
7
MENCHINELLI
AGND
DGND
AGND
MENCHINELLI
E.M.
PREAMPLIFIER
SIZE
APPROVED
DGND
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
1256
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04649-01
November 21, 2006
D
SHEET
1/1
+D
+E
+E
+D
U1
H21A1
E
E
D
D
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
PHOTOSWITCH INTERFACE
A4
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04651-01
March 15, 2002
A
SHEET
1/1
J5
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
+SENSE
CONTROL1
-SENSE
GND
GND
+24RP
+24RP
MOLEX 4X2/D
JP2
ON
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
J1
SHIELD
MOLEX 5X2/D
EARTH GROUND
J6
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
2
J2
JP1
1
DGND
1 DGND
2 PGND
3 PGND
4
5 -SENSE
6 CONTROL1
7 +SENSE
8 INH/RST
9 +5V
10 +24V
11 +24V
12 +24RP
13 +24RP
14 GND
15 GND
16
SHIELD
J7
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
J3
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
J8
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
J4
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MOLEX 5X2/D
MOLEX 5X2/D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MOLEX 5X2/D
MOLEX 8X2/D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MOLEX 5X2/D
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
MOLEX 5X2/D
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
A4
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
B
SE-04661-01
June 27, 2002
SHEET
1/1
PELT.1
E18
+ PELT.
PELT.3
E17
- PELT.
PELT.5
PELT.7
+
E1
+
E3
-
E2
-
E4
+
E5
+
E7
-
E6
-
E8
+
E9
+
E11
-
E10
-
E12
+
E13
+
E15
-
E14
-
E16
PELT.2
PELT.4
PELT.6
PELT.8
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
1088
A4
DATE
REFRIGERATOR INTERFACE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04680-01
November 25, 2002
B
SHEET
1/1
VPP
+ C13
47u/35V
TP5
GND
+
+
C4
0.1u
C3
0.1u
C5
47u/16V
A1
+
7
2
PGND
C11
47u
16V
28
14
1
2
3
4
15
22
1
U3
TLP2630 8
1
J2
PGND
1
C
C2
47u/35V
AR2
470
C
270 2W
+5VP
+5VP
1
VOUT
PGND
5
4
3
2
VIN
+5VD
5
4
3
2
+5VP
U1
L4931CV50
R1
1
VPP
C14
47u/35V
+
AR1
10K
4
5
6
7
MOTOR A
23 DATA A
AMP 4/D
21 DATA B
J3
4
6
25 STRB A
3
8
9
MOTOR B 10
11
1
2
3
4
5
VPP
+5VP
R4
2K7
R5
330
+5VD
ANGULAR MOTOR
AMP 4/D
15-04408-01
+5VP
R6
330
UP/DW MOTOR
R12
1.2 1/2W
R13
1.2 1/2W
27
R A
+5VD
2
DL1
ORANGE
DL2
YELLOW
PGND
DL3
GREEN
PGND
C20
470n
DGND
U4
TLP2630 8
1
C12
47u
16V
13
R B
24 CLK A
7
2
+
16
R14 1.8 1/2W
DATA
CS
CS
R15 1.8 1/2W
CLK
20 CLK B
4
6
3
5
1
26
12 17
R2
C7 100
22p
DGND
U2
87LPC764
+5VD
TP4
+5VD
VCC
5
GND
C8
0.1u
F2
DGND
+
DGND
L1
L2
C9
22p
DGND
4
RST
7
XT2
6
XT1
P1.1
P0.4
P1.0
PO.O
12
1
P0.1
P0.2
P0.5
P0.6
P1.6
P1.7
Y1
C10
22p
VCC
GND
11
17
20
19
16
14
3
2
A3121EU
DGND
+5VD
R11
100
C16
10n
R9
1K
DGND
R10
47
U6
RECEIVER
DL5
RED
P1.4
P0.7
P0.3
O.65A
C1
47u/16V
15
U5
OUT
8
13
18
MOLEX 5X2/D
PGND
SCL
3A
DGND
C19
0.1u
UP
DL4
RED
9
F1
R3
100
SDA
1
C6
22p
18.432MHz
DGND
VPP
10
TP3
PGND
1
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
R8
1K
R7
4K7
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
DGND
+5VD
TP2
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FLAT10/D
S GND
18
3
TP1
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
19 STRB B
J4
VCC
OUT
R16
100
DGND
C18
47u
+
GND
IS1U60
C15
10n
+
C17
22u
DGND
DGND
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
1178
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
ARM L CONTROLLER
REV.
SE-04765-01
September 17, 2004
E
SHEET
1/1
VPP
+ C13
47u/35V
TP5
GND
+
+
C4
0.1u
C3
0.1u
C5
47u/16V
A1
+
7
2
PGND
C11
47u
16V
28
14
1
2
3
4
15
22
1
U3
TLP2630 8
1
J2
PGND
1
C
C2
47u/35V
AR2
470
C
270 2W
+5VP
+5VP
1
VOUT
PGND
5
4
3
2
VIN
+5VD
5
4
3
2
+5VP
U1
L4931CV50
R1
1
VPP
C14
47u/35V
+
AR1
10K
4
5
6
7
MOTOR A
23 DATA A
AMP 4/D
21 DATA B
J3
4
6
25 STRB A
3
8
9
MOTOR B 10
11
1
2
3
4
5
VPP
+5VP
R4
2K7
R5
330
+5VD
ANGULAR MOTOR
AMP 4/D
15-04408-01
+5VP
R6
330
UP/DW MOTOR
R12
1.2 1/2W
R13
1.2 1/2W
27
R A
+5VD
2
DL1
ORANGE
DL2
YELLOW
PGND
DL3
GREEN
PGND
C20
470n
DGND
U4
TLP2630 8
1
C12
47u
16V
13
R B
24 CLK A
7
2
+
16
R14 1.8 1/2W
DATA
CS
CS
R15 1.8 1/2W
CLK
20 CLK B
4
6
3
5
1
26
12 17
R2
C7 100
22p
DGND
U2
87LPC764
+5VD
TP4
+5VD
VCC
5
GND
C8
0.1u
F2
DGND
+
DGND
L1
L2
C9
22p
DGND
4
RST
7
XT2
6
XT1
P1.1
P0.4
P1.0
PO.O
12
1
P0.1
P0.2
P0.5
P0.6
P1.6
P1.7
Y1
C10
22p
VCC
GND
11
17
20
19
16
14
3
2
A3121EU
DGND
+5VD
R11
100
C16
10n
R9
1K
DGND
R10
47
U6
RECEIVER
DL5
RED
P1.4
P0.7
P0.3
O.65A
C1
47u/16V
15
U5
OUT
8
13
18
MOLEX 5X2/D
PGND
SCL
3A
DGND
C19
0.1u
UP
DL4
RED
9
F1
R3
100
SDA
1
C6
22p
18.432MHz
DGND
VPP
10
TP3
PGND
1
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
R8
1K
R7
4K7
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
DGND
+5VD
TP2
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FLAT10/D
S GND
18
3
TP1
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
19 STRB B
J4
VCC
OUT
R16
100
DGND
C18
47u
+
GND
IS1U60
C15
10n
+
C17
22u
DGND
DGND
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
1178
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
ARM R CONTROLLER
REV.
SE-04765-02
September 17, 2004
E
SHEET
1/1
VDD
U1
SMD
2
+5VD
DATA
PROG
4
7
PD/CS
NC
5
8
CLK
NC
6
3
+5VD
J1
DATA
CS
CS
C1
2.2u/10V
SMD
+
C2
2.2u/10V
SMD
AS5020
DGND
CLK
+5VD
U2
SMD
VDD
DGND
2
TRANSIZ. 10
DATA
PROG
4
7
PD/CS
NC
5
8
CLK
NC
6
VSS
1
3
ARM CONTROLLER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+
VSS
1
AS5020
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
A4
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04767-01
June 12, 2002
A
SHEET
1/1
UP/DW MOTOR
08-04891-01
P1
J2
J1
ANGULAR MOTOR
08-04733-01
P1
ARM CONTROLLER
SE-04765-01
J3
1
2
3
4
J4
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
1
2
3
4
P1
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
SE-05234-01
J1
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
MENCHINELLI
MENCHINELLI
E.M.
ARM " L "
SIZE
APPROVED
1196
A4
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04872-01
December 20, 2004
A
SHEET
1/1
UP/DW MOTOR
08-04891-01
P1
J2
J1
ANGULAR MOTOR
08-04733-01
P1
ARM CONTROLLER
SE-04765-02
J3
1
2
3
4
J4
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
1
2
3
4
P1
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
SE-05234-01
J1
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
MENCHINELLI
MENCHINELLI
E.M.
ARM " R "
SIZE
APPROVED
1196
A4
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04873-01
December 20, 2004
A
SHEET
1/1
+5VD
R2
1K
DL1
GIALLO
1
+5VD
P/O D1
E1
0.3V
Q1
P0102BL
(NO H20)
+
1
+5VD
Y1
VX3E-500
5MHz
OUT
3
4
-
C1
22n
2
E2
E3
OUT
BAS70-04
P/O D1
C5
100p
C2
C3
1n
470p
C4
22n
TR1
N.M.
R1
6K8
1
DGND
1
1
DGND
E4
E5
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
1159
A4
DATE
LIQUID SENSOR
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-04902-01
May 05, 2004
B
SHEET
1/1
+E
+D
U1
TLP814
J1
4
3
2
1
C1
22n
DILUTER MOTOR
AMP4 90°
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
GRIGIO
MARRONE
ARANCIO
BLU
ROSSO
GIALLO
E7
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
E8
NERO
D
VERDE
E
P1
AMP 4X2FV
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
A4
<P.d.V.> DATE
DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05021-01
April 08, 2003
A
SHEET
1/1
+E
+D
J1
U1
SG-211V
4
3
2
1
C1
22n
DILUTER MOTOR
AMP4 90°
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
MARRONE
GRIGIO
ARANCIO
BLU
ROSSO
GIALLO
E7
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
E8
VERDE
D
NERO
E
P1
AMP 4X2FV
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
MENCHINELLI
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO
WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY.
MENCHINELLI
E.M.
DILUTER ENDSTROKE SENSOR
SIZE
APPROVED
01245
A4
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05021-01
May 26, 2006
B
SHEET
1/1
U1
LM2931BD50
C5
10u
5
E2
VOUT
1
GND
ARM
WIRE
VIN
INH
8
E3
+5V
+5V
C7
470n
2,3,6,7
R2
33
GND
DL1
LD274
U2
87LPC764
6
RES1
8MHz
C1
D3
E1
470p
RA
DA
100K 1/8W BAT48
SDA
SCL
P1.1
P1.0
9
10
11
12
7
XT2
D1
BAT48
16
P0.5
P1.4
P0.7
P0.6
P0.3
P0.2
P0.1
8
13
14
18
19
20
VCC
15
BAS216
C2
1n
17
R1
100K
R5 1M
C4
10V 2.2u
C6
P0.4
PO.O
P1.7
P1.6
RST
D2
BAS216
+
R4
1M
+5V
+
GND
C3
2u2/10V
5
GND
1
2
3
4
NEEDLE
WIRE
GND
XT1
RES2
8MHz
DL2
RED
R3
N.M.
E.G.
1n
GND
E.G.
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
E.M.
DATE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
1188
A4
DRAWING NUMBER
ARM LIQUID SENSOR & EMITTER
REV.
SE-05023-01
October 29, 2004
D
SHEET
1/1
COM4
SERIAL BOARD
IBM
POWER
SUPPLY
IBM
POWER
SUPPLY
J2
PERIPHERALS DISABLE
J2
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J4
MASTER LOGIC
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
BOX COMPUTER ASSY
J4
J1
MASTER POWER
WIRED CASE
P1
AIR BLOWER
J1
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J3
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
READING STATION
J13 MASTER POWER
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
READING PLATE INTERFACE
J1
J1
J1
ARM CONTROLLER " R "
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
J5
J7
ARM CONTROLLER " L "
J2
J1
J7
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
J7
SERUM PLATE CONROLLER
J8
J6
J1
ISE INTERFACE
ISE UNIT
REAGENTS PLATE ASSY
ARM WITH HEATER
P1
ARM WITH HEATER
P1
SERUM MODULE
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
<CONTROLLATO>
SIZE
APPROVED
<VISTO>
E.M.
A3
<P.d.V.> DATE
BT3000 PLUS ( WHITOUT ISE)
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05050-01
April 30, 2003
A
SHEET
1/1
TP1
+5V
U1
L4931CV50
POWER
SUPPLY
24V
1
2
3
4
MOLEX 2X2/D
+ C2
100u
35V
VOUT
GND
VIN
330/2W
+ C1
100u
35V
C3
0.1u
PGND
C4
0.1u
+ C5
100u
16V
TP2
DGND
1
R1
J1
+5V
1
+24V
DGND
+24V
F1
3A
+ 5V
+ 5V
+5V
+
R2
10K
JP1
2
DGND
P0.1
DZA
12V
9
10
SDA
SCL
7
6
XT2
XT1
+5V
J7
1
2
VCC
P1.4
P0.2
8
19
P1.0
P1.6
12
3
P1.1
PO.O
11
1
P0.7
13
RST
4
C8
0.1u
N.M.
1
5
TR2
10K
GND
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
AUX
15
P1.7
2
DGND
R4
330
DL2
YELLOW
DL1
GREEN
NORMAL
PRESSURE
R15
330
R5
330
R6
10K
R7
680
C14
0.1u
J2
R9
10
DL3
RED
MOLEX 2/D
J3
MOLEX 2/D
Q1
SPP47N10L
R18
100K
PGND
RESET
PGND
PROBE LED
PROBE CONT.
PROBE GND
U2
87LPC767
DGND
J4
1
2
3
4
PROBE
AMP 4/D
J5
3
+5V
C6
0.1u
0.68u
+5V
R16
+12V
820K
8
DGND
R17
820K
DGND
DGND
R14
R10
10K
1K
R19
330
1
U4A
AD822AN
R11
C13
0.1u
+
DGND
AMP 4/D
TLP521-2
1
8
2
7
3
6
C15
2u2/10V
(SMD)
C11
0.1u
+
C12
10u
16V
100
4
5
SW1
RESTART
1,2
1
2
R8
DGND
+
Q2
2
TIP122
3K9
-
DGND
PGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
LOW PRESSURE ALARM RED= <16mbar
LOW PRESSURE YELLOW= 16-30mbar
NORMAL PRESSURE GREEN= > 30mbar
SOLENOID VALVE
AMP 2/D
GREEN
3,4
DGND
J6
3
3K9
U3
ANALYZER
(DOS)
1
3
4
R13
2
+
C9
0.1u
3K9
-
VCC
+
GND
-
R12
C7
0.1u
1
2
3
4
+12V
+5V
SP1
CONT.
GND
0.2V a 16mbar
C10
1
2
3
4
PUMP2
DX
1
2
LOW
PRESSURE LOW
PRESSURE
ALARM
ANALYZER
ANALYZER
DGND
SENS.
PRESS.
PUMP1
SX
1
2
18
17
16
14
2
R3
330
-
20
1
BZ1
SMA-21
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
1191
A3
DATE
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05085-01
November 29, 2004
E
SHEET
1/1
DL1
NORMAL PRESSURE
DL2
LOW PRESSURE
DL3
LOW PRESSURE ALARM
SW1
RESTART
1
2
J5
J6
1
2
3
4
1
2
P1
1
2
12-05168-01
SOLENOID VALVE
EARTH GROUND
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
SE-05085-01
P2
1
TO WASTE PROBE
SE-05165-01
12-05164-01
3
2
P1
J4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
J3
1
2
P1
+
1
2
-
PUMP 2
(DX)
EARTH GROUND
F1
0.5A/250V
L
J7
12-05169-01
J2
1
2
LINE 95-240VAC
1
2
P1
+
1
2
-
N
F2
PUMP 1
(SX)
EARTH GROUND
0.5A/250V
J1
1
2
3
4
L
N
AL1
1
2
3
4
EARTH GROUND
P1
AC/DC
FG
EARTH GROUND
24VDC
+
-
12-05171-01
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
A4
<P.d.V.> DATE
VACUUM SYSTEM
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05161-01
April 29, 2004
A
SHEET
1/1
J1
1
3
2
LV1
2
FISHER 3
DL1
1= WASTE FULL
1
RED
WASTE FULL
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
<CONTROLLATO>
<VISTO>
E.M.
A4
<P.d.V.> DATE
WASTE PROBE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05165-01
April 29, 2004
A
SHEET
1/1
+
R1
1K
5VDC
+
0.1u
0V
+
+5VD
+5VDX
+5VDX
+5VP
R9
47u/16V 10K
+V
24VDC
C4
10u/35V
+5VP
R2
1K
5VDC
GND
C5
R3
2K7
C6
+
0.1u
0V
R4
330
R5
330
DL1
DL2
ORANGE YELLOW
10u/16V
R6
330
DL3
GREEN
R7
560
R8
560
1
2
4
3
DL4
RED
22
C17 +
R10
10K
U4
23 DATA A
A1
K1 O1
A2 O2
K2
7
6
21 DATA B
25 STRB A
DGND
PGND
TLP2630
PGND
TP1
PGND
DGND
DGND
1
TP2
+5VDX
R A
+5VP
+
PGND
+5VDX
TP4
15
1
MOLEX 5X2/90°
C7
47u/35V
+5VD
F2
5
GND
4
RST
18,432MHz
6
C15
22p
28
+ C19
8
18 S GND
3
47u/35V
26
8
13
3
P1.4
P0.7
P1.6
+5VD
C25
7
T1IN
R1OUT
T1OUT
R1IN
14
13
10
9
T2IN
R2OUT
T2OUT
R2IN
7
8
15
GND
V-
6
NTC1
10K
2
C22
10n
RH
GND
+24VRP
0.1u
GND
DZ1
3.9V
8
C31
C27
22u
R18
0.1u
U7A
MAX492
U9
6N136
+24VRP
100
R19
3
1K
C30
4,7u/16V
+
R20
1K
DL5
WHITE
R41
8K2
PTC1 6
1
2
t
+24VRP
C37
4
U11
TLP521-1
U8
TLP521-1
DGND
AMP2/90°
10n
R40 10
J7
+TEMP.REAG.
OUT TEMP.REAG. 1
GND TEMP.REAG. 2
3
+VENT.TANG. 4
GND VENT.TANG. 5
6
7
8
+PELT.
9
+PELT.
10
-PELT.
11
-PELT.
12
TEMP. SENSOR
PELTIERS
AIR BLOWER
MOLEX 6X2/90°
Q1
BUZ111S
Q2
BUZ111S
4
3
2
2
3
E
TP8
1
C35
47u/35V
R22
10K
1
C
Q3
TIP122
B
+
R23
560
ACCESS
SENSOR
C29
0.1u
DGND
+5VDX
R37
22K
J6
+5VDX
DGND
+5VDX
R36
560
AMP 4X2/90°
C23
10n
2
REAGENT
BARCODE
1
2
DGND
MOLEX 4X2/90°
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DGND
DGND
RX
TX
SGND
R17
4K7
DGND
R21
10K
1
3
TP7
(16-26V)
3
1
2
5
MAX232
DGND
J5
+5VD
+5VDX
+
C32
0.1u
7
6
1W
C28
+ C21
22u
22u
8
PD2
R24
560
DGND
1
GND
GND
+24rp
+24rp
C34
0.1u
PD1
1W
C33
R38
4K7
+5VD
C36
10n
R35
10K
1
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
+SENSE
CONTROL1
-SENSE
RH
R25
10K
+
+5VDX
4
0=COLD
1=HOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C13
4.7u
R39
15K
R26
100
J2
+5VDX
AMP 3/90°
REAGENT
HALL
SENSOR
DGND
DGND
2
+24VRP
R27
12K
R28
10K
t
DGND
DGND
+
U10
TLP521-1
C1-
C9
10n
3
C+
4
V+
5
U7B
MAX492
5
C2-
11
12
-
1
LINE ON
C2+
VCC
+5VDX
2
6
DGND
16
1
R29
10K
U6
C24
0.1u
22u
4
C26
22u
1K
J4
OUT HALL REAG.
+ HALL REAG. 1
GND HALL REAG. 2
3
R34
10K
DGND
DGND
R33
0.1u
+5VDX
C16
10n
+
R30
1K
C20
PGND
+
DGND
+5VDX
R16
4K7
R15
100
XT2
XT1
VPP
20 CLK B
2
18
P1.7
P0.3
Y1
C14
22p
7
6
+
+5VDX
L2
1.2 1/2W
1
24 CLK A
A1
K1 O1
A2 O2
K2
TLP2630
PO.O
P0.6
P1.1
P1.0
L1
R12
10K
1
14
11
12
DGND
7
15-04408-01
C18 +
U5
R14
AMP 4/90°
DLA
GREEN
DGND
+
C8
47u/16V
1
2
4
3
19
17
20
16
P0.2
P0.4
P0.1
P0.5
VCC
+
C12
2u2/10V
(SMD)
0.65A
+5VD
SCL
3A
U3
87LPC767
1.2 1/2W
+
DGND
R13
-
DGND
10
F1
R11
560
REAGENT MOTOR
27
5
VPP
DGND
C10
22p
R31
100
9
PGND
R32
C11 100
22p
SDA
TP3
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
1
2
3
4
2
47u/16V
1
J1
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
PGND
J3
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
5
PGND
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
4
MOTOR A 5
6
7
-
GND
C2
A1
VPP
8
VIN
C3
10u/16V
+5VP
1
1
U2
NME2405S
+V
24VDC
C1
10u/35V
TP6
VPP
+
VIN
+5VDX
+
TP5
U1
NME2405S
-
VPP
DRAWN BY
DZ2
15V
EGND
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY.
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
PASQUALINI F.
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
MENCHINELLI V.
MENCHINELLI V.
E.M.
01206
A3
DATE
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05211-01
March 31, 2005
B
SHEET
1/1
TP5
TP6
A1
VPP
U2
NME2405S
R1
1K
C2
R2
1K
+
C5
R5
330
R6
330
R7
560
22
C17 +
R8
560
U4
DL1
DL2
ORANGE YELLOW
10u/16V
DL3
GREEN
1
2
4
3
DL4
RED
0V
R10
10K
23 DATA A
A1
K1 O1
A2 O2
K2
7
6
J3
21 DATA B
25 STRB A
DGND
PGND
TLP2630
PGND
TP1
PGND
DGND
1
DGND
TP2
+5VDX
+5VP
R13
1.2 1/2W
R14
1.2 1/2W
R32
C11 100
22p
C10
22p
C18 +
R11
560
U5
C7
47u/35V
+5VDX
TP4
15
1
+
+5VD
C12
2u2/10V
(SMD)
F2
GND
+
C8
47u/16V
4
RST
18,432MHz
7
L2
C14
22p
C15
22p
+
47u/35V
3
26
+5VDX
R16
4K7
8
13
3
P1.4
P0.7
P1.6
DGND
0.1u
C16
10n
+5VD
AMP 3/90°
R34
10K
DGND
C25
C24
0.1u
1
16
T1OUT
R1IN
14
13
10
9
T2IN
R2OUT
T2OUT
R2IN
7
8
t
DGND
DGND
15
GND
V-
6
+
R38
4K7
R24
390
GND
8
2
GND
DZ1
3.9V
R21
10K
1
3
5
8
0.1u
U7A
MAX492
U9
6N136
TP7
(16-26V)
R19
2
DGND
3
1K
C29
0.1u
DGND
C30
4,7u/16V
+
R20
1K
WHITE
R41
8K2
PTC1 6
1
2
t
+5VDX
+24VRP
1
+24VRP
+5VDX
C37
10n
R40 10
MOLEX 4X2/90°
R37
22K
R23
560
C
R36
560
ACCESS
SENSOR
AMP2/90°
+5VDX
DGND
+24VRP
J6
1
2
DL5
GND
GND
+24rp
+24rp
100
DGND
4
C34
0.1u
R18
DGND
7
6
1W
AMP 4X2/90°
C23
10n
+
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
+SENSE
CONTROL1
-SENSE
PD2
RH
1W
REAGENT
BARCODE
R17
4K7
DGND
-
PD1
RH
C27
22u
0.1u
C32
0.1u
C33
R25
10K
R28
10K
DGND
22u
C31
R26
100
MAX232
+
C13
4.7u
R39
15K
R27
12K
3
1
C28
+5VDX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DGND
DGND
RX
TX
SGND
+5VDX
+
+5VDX
0=COLD
1=HOT
DGND
2
+24VRP
C1-
NTC1
10K
2
C22
10n
C+
C9
10n
3
U10
TLP521-1
J5
+5VD
+ C21
22u
1
4
5
VCC
T1IN
R1OUT
V+
+5VD
C36
10n
R35
10K
C2-
+
+5VDX
LINE ON
5
DGND
11
12
2
1K
4
U6
C2+
C26
22u
R29
10K
6
U7B
MAX492
REAGENT
HALL
SENSOR
DGND
7
DGND
R33
J4
OUT HALL REAG.
+ HALL REAG. 1
GND HALL REAG. 2
3
+5VDX
22u
R30
1K
C20
PGND
+
+5VDX
+ C19
18 S GND
R15
100
XT2
XT1
28
20 CLK B
2
18
P1.7
P0.3
Y1
6
TLP2630
PO.O
P0.6
P1.1
P1.0
L1
7
6
1
14
11
12
DGND
24 CLK A
A1
K1 O1
A2 O2
K2
DLA
GREEN
DGND
0.65A
+5VD
5
19
17
20
16
P0.2
P0.4
P0.1
P0.5
VCC
1
2
4
3
1
-
+
SCL
3A
U3
87LPC767
R12
10K
5
DGND
9
DGND
SDA
F1
10
DGND
VPP
15-04408-01
R31
100
8
VPP
1
PGND
MOLEX 5X2/90°
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AMP 4/90°
2
47u/16V
TP3
PGND
J2
REAGENT MOTOR
27
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PGND
PGND
DGND
DGND
RST
+24V
+24V
+5V
SDA
SCL
1
2
3
4
R A
J1
POWER
SUPPLY
INTERFACE
PGND
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
REAGENTI
5
PGND
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
MOTORE
4
MOTOR A 5
6
7
-
GND
R4
330
C6
0.1u
0V
R9
47u/16V 10K
+
5VDC
C4
10u/35V
0.1u
GND
24VDC
+
5VDC
+5VP
+5VDX
+V
R3
2K7
C3
10u/16V
+5VD
+
24VDC
+
C1
10u/35V
+5VP
8
VIN
+5VDX
VPP
+
+V
+5VP
-
VIN
+5VDX
1
U1
NME2405S
1
VPP
J7
+TEMP.REAG.
OUT TEMP.REAG. 1
GND TEMP.REAG. 2
3
+VENT.TANG. 4
GND VENT.TANG. 5
6
7
8
+PELT.
9
+PELT.
10
-PELT.
11
-PELT.
12
R22
10K
TEMP. SENSOR
PELTIERS
AIR BLOWER
MOLEX 6X2/90°
Q1
BUZ111S
1
4
4
3
3
Q2
BUZ111S
DRAWN BY
2
2
U11
TLP521-1
E
TP8
1
C35
47u/35V
1
Q3
TIP122
B
+
DZ2
15V
U8
TLP521-1
PASQUALINI F.
MENCHINELLI V.
MENCHINELLI V.
E.M.
REAGENTS PLATE CONTROLLER
SIZE
APPROVED
EGND
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY.
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
01255
A3
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05211-01
November 02, 2006
C
SHEET
1/1
+5VD
R4
4K7
J2
+5VD
1
2
3
AUX
R5
100
MOLEX 3 D
DGND
U1
C5
10n
DGND
+5VD
J1
ARM CONTROLLER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
R3
18K
DATA
OPTIONAL
CLK
TRANSIZ. 10
DGND
R6
100
Vss
Vdd
Vss
LE
N.C.
N.C.
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vdd
Vdd
BP
AGD
AGDI
VB
OSCF
Ihal
Boh
Isin
Icos
Vss
BP
BP
CLOCK
TSC
B
N.C.
Ri
A
Vss
BP
DATA
N.C.
N.C.
Sin
Cos
ERR
PRG
PROG
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+
C1
2.2u/10V
AM-512 S/I
C2
0.1u
R1
82K
R2
100
C3
N.M.
C4
N.M.
C6
10n
E1
DGND
E.G.
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
<CONTROLLATO>
APPROVED
SIZE
<VISTO>
E.M.
A4
<P.d.V.> DATE
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05234-01
November 10, 2004
A
SHEET
1/1
+5VD
R4
N.M.
J2
1
2
3
AUX
+5VD
R5
N.M.
N.M.
DGND
C5
N.M.
U1
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
DGND
+5VD
J1
ARM CONTROLLER
R3
18K
DATA
1 OPTIONAL
2
3
4
CLK
5
6
7
8
9
10
TRANSIZ. 10
R6
100
DGND
C2
0.1u
C6
10n
E.G.
E1
R1
82K
Vss
RefN
Vdd
Vss
LE
N.C.
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vdd
Vdd
BP
RefP
AGD
AGDI
Ihal
N:C:
Boh
R25
P/S
Vss
BP
BP
CLOCK
TSC
Vni
B
Vdd
Ri
A
SIN
Vss
BP
COS
Vout
DATA
Vgi
N.C.
N.C.
Sin
Cos
ERR
PRG
PROG
AM-512b
E3
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
E2
+
R2
100
C3
N.M.
C1
2.2u/10V
C4
N.M.
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI F.
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
MENCHINELLI V.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO
WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY.
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
CHECKED
MENCHINELLI V.
E.M.
01238
A4
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
REV.
SE-05234-01
February 28, 2006
A
SHEET
1/1
+5VD
R4
N.M.
J2
1
2
3
AUX
+5VD
R5
N.M.
N.M.
DGND
C5
N.M.
U1
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
DGND
+5VD
J1
ARM CONTROLLER
R3
18K
DATA
1 OPTIONAL
2
3
4
CLK
5
6
7
8
9
10
TRANSIZ. 10
DGND
R6
100
Vss
RefN
Vdd
Vss
LE
N.C.
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vdd
Vdd
BP
RefP
AGD
AGDI
Ihal
N:C:
Boh
R25
P/S
Vss
BP
BP
CLOCK
TSC
Vni
B
Vdd
Ri
A
SIN
Vss
BP
COS
Vout
DATA
Vgi
N.C.
N.C.
Sin
Cos
ERR
PRG
PROG
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
E2
+
C1
2.2u/10V
AM-512b
C2
0.1u
R1
82K
R2
100
C3
10n
C4
10n
E3
C6
10n
E1
DGND
E.G.
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI F.
BIOTECNICA INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. Rome, ITALY
DESCRIPTION
CHECKED
MENCHINELLI V.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. IT IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE USE OF ENTITY TO
WHICH IT IS ADDRESSED. DO NOT DISCLOSE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE INFORMATION IN ANY OTHER WAY.
MENCHINELLI V.
E.M.
ANGULAR POSITION ENCODER
SIZE
APPROVED
01276
A4
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-05234-01
March 27, 2007
B
SHEET
1/1
PV1
VAC1
F1 2A
INPUT AC
F2
VAC2
5V
AL1
L
L
N
N
LAMP1
AC/DC
2A
PS1
NO
+
JWS50-24A
24VDC
+
FG
EARTH GND
NO
J1
LV3
2
1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P2
WB2
RIGHT
LV2
LV4
2
1
2
J2
A3
662.0788B
PROBE 2
FISHER 3
AMP 8X2
L
VAC1
C1
VAC2
10n
M2
24V
1n
C4
C3
1n
10n
VP1
1
2
C2
EARTH GND
1n
A
L2
VACUUM PUMP
220VAC
C5
+
C6
-
EARTH GND
1
N
M1
24V
P3
MOLEX 2
L3
1n
EARTH GND
2
P4
MOLEX 2
L1
2
1
0= NO LIQUID
J3
2
1
J4
+
1
J2
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
15-04541-01
AMP 4X2
LEFT
INTERNAL
WASTE 2
A
INTERNAL
WASTE 1
J5
A1
-
WB1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P1
P5
2
3
2
LV1
1
P1
1
0= WASTE FULL
J1
FISHER 3
A2
662.0788A
PROBE 1
4
3
2
1
P1
MOLEX 2X2
1
3
2
EARTH GND
L4
L
N
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM
A4
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-662.0788
September 06, 2001
SHEET
1/1
2
3
P1
FISHER 3
DL1
RED
1
TO VACUUM
PUMP SYSTEM
2
EXTERNAL
WASTE
FULL
LV1
1
1= EXTERNAL
WASTE FULL
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
WASTE PROBE-1
A4
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-662.0788A
September 06, 2001
SHEET
1/1
2
3
P1
FISHER 3
DL1
RED
1
TO VACUUM
PUMP SYSTEM
2
EXTERNAL
WASTE
FULL
LV1
1
1= EXTERNAL
WASTE FULL
DGND
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
WASTE PROBE - 2
A4
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-662.0788B
September 06, 2001
SHEET
1/1
PV1
VAC1
F1 4A
INPUT AC
F2
VAC2
5V
AL1
L
L
N
N
LAMP1
AC/DC
4A
PS1
NO
+
JWS50-24A
24VDC
+
FG
EARTH GND
NO
J1
LV3
2
1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P2
WB2
RIGHT
LV2
LV4
2
1
2
J2
A3
662.0788B
PROBE 2
FISHER 3
AMP 8X2
L
VAC1
C1
VAC2
10n
M2
24V
1n
C4
C3
1n
10n
VP1
1
2
C2
EARTH GND
1n
A
L2
VACUUM PUMP
110VAC
C5
+
C6
-
EARTH GND
1
N
M1
24V
P3
MOLEX 2
L3
1n
EARTH GND
2
P4
MOLEX 2
L1
2
1
0= NO LIQUID
J3
2
1
J4
+
1
J2
VACUUM SYSTEM CONTROLLER
15-04541-01
AMP 4X2
LEFT
INTERNAL
WASTE 2
A
INTERNAL
WASTE 1
J5
A1
-
WB1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P1
P5
2
3
2
LV1
1
P1
1
0= WASTE FULL
J1
FISHER 3
A2
662.0788A
PROBE 1
4
3
2
1
P1
MOLEX 2X2
1
3
2
EARTH GND
L4
L
N
DRAWN BY
PASQUALINI
CHECKED
DESCRIPTION
APPROVED
SIZE
VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM
A4
E.M.
DATE
DRAWING NUMBER
REV.
SE-662.0788E
September 06, 2001
SHEET
1/1